You are on page 1of 242

TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER

FR-A500
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
HIGH FUNCTION & LOW ACOUSTIC NOISE

FR-A520-0.4K to 55K(-NA) FR-A540-0.4K to 55K(-NA)(-EC)

OUTLINE Chapter 1

INSTALLATION AND WIRING Chapter 2 OPERATION /CONTROL Chapter 3

PARAMETERS Chapter 4

PROTECTIVE Chapter 5 FUNCTIONS

SPECIFICATIONS Chapter 6

OPTIONS Chapter 7

Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi transistorized Inverter. This instruction manual gives handling information and precautions for use of this equipment. Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum. Please forward this manual to the end user. This instruction manual uses the International System of Units (SI). The measuring units in the yard and pound system are indicated in parentheses as reference values. This section is specifically about safety matters
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read through this instruction manual and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this instruction manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into “WARNING” and “CAUTION”. Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause physical damage only.

WARNING CAUTION

Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety.

A-1

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
! While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. You may get an electric ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
shock. Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed highvoltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock. If power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock. Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more than at least 10 minutes and check for the presence of any residual voltage with a meter (check chapter 2 for further details.) etc. Earth the inverter. Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should be fully competent to do the work. Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or be injured. Operate the switches with dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. Do not change the cooling fan while power is on. To do so will invite a hazardous condition.

2. Fire Prevention
CAUTION
! Mount the inverter on an incombustible surface. Installing the inverter directly on or near a combustible
surface could lead to a fire.

! If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow of large current could
cause a fire. ! Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+, N/-. This could cause a fire.

3. Injury Prevention
CAUTION
! ! ! !
Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to prevent damage etc. Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, damage etc. may occur. Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage etc. After the inverter has been operating for a relatively long period of time, do not touch the inverter as it may be hot and you may get burnt.

A-2

4. Additional instructions
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.:

(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
! When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury. ! Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended. ! Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the inverter. Install ! ! ! ! ! ! !
according to the information in the Instruction Manual. Do not operate if the inverter is damaged or has parts missing. Do not hold the inverter by the front cover; it may fall off. Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter. Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct. Prevent screws, wire fragments, conductive bodies, oil or other flammable substances from entering the inverter. Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact. Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:

Constant torque: -10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing) (-10°C to +40°C with FR-A5CV"" attachment) Ambient temperature Variable torque: -10°C to +40°C (14°F to 104°F) (non-freezing) (-10°C to +30°C with FR-A5CV"" attachment) Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C* (-4°F to 149°F) Ambience Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt) Maximum 1000m (3280.80 feet.) above sea level for standard operation. Altitude, vibration After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%). 2 5.9 m/s or less (conforming to JIS C 0040) *Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.

(2) Wiring
CAUTION
! Do not fit capacitive equipment such as a power factor correction capacitor, noise filter or surge
suppressor to the output of the inverter.

! The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the direction of
rotation of the motor.

(3) Trial run
CAUTION
! Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by a sudden start-up.

(4) Operation
CAUTION
! When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will restart suddenly
after an alarm stop.

! The [STOP] key is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been made. Prepare an
emergency stop switch separately.

! Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure to do so may restart
the motor suddenly. A-3

Environment

Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period. it should be insulation-enhanced or surge voltages suppressed. Surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals. inspection and parts replacement CAUTION ! Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter. (7) Disposing of the inverter CAUTION ! Treat as industrial waste. Before changing its setting. The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may be affected. The electronic overcurrent protection does not guarantee protection of the motor from overheating. (6) Maintenance. deteriorating the insulation of the motor. Connection of any other electrical ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment. Re-set the required parameters before starting operation. install a holding device to ensure safety. Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. (5) Emergency stop CAUTION ! Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails. always perform inspection and test operation. When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven. In addition to the inverter's holding function. A-4 . examine the performance of the motor and machine. (8) General instructions Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a cover. Take measures to suppress harmonics. Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise power harmonics from the inverter may heat/damage the power capacitor and generator. or partially open.CAUTION ! The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Never run the inverter like this. each parameter returns to the factory setting. Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter. When parameter clear or all clear is performed.

...............................4 Frequency setting .......................2 Wiring of the main circuit ................................. 1 1........................................ 3 1..................................1 Devices and parts to be prepared for operation ..................................................................2 Monitor display changed by pressing the MODE key .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 2...............................................3............................................................................... 28 2..................................................................................................... 55 I Contents .......................................................................................3.........2..............2 Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines....................................9 Earthing (EC version) ...............................................................1.....6 Design information... 53 3...................................................... 7 2...........................................................................2... 45 3....................... 22 2................................1 Appearance and structure .....................3...................4 Connection to the PU connector.. 49 3...............................................................8 Instructions for compliance with the European standards ............................1 Installation ............................................................................................1 Terminal connection diagram ...........................1 Instructions for installation ......6 Operation mode ...................................................................................................3.........................................................3 Structure .......................1 Basic configuration ...............................................3...... 45 3............................................. 9 2... 1 1......................CONTENTS 1 OUTLINE 1 1................. 49 3.................................. 30 2................................................................................................S.............................. 43 3 OPERATION/CONTROL 45 3........................................2........................ 51 3.............. and Canadian Electrical Codes...........2......................................................................2............. 33 2.................1 Precautions for operation ...................................................2........................1 Power harmonics ........................................................................................................... 51 3.. 4 1..................3....... 36 2.............................................................................. 41 2...... 40 2............1...................................... 3 1..............3 Monitoring ....2 External operation mode (Operation using external input signals) ............. 54 3..2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover ..................................... 29 2.....................1......................................3 Wiring of the control circuit ......................................................................................................................2 Wiring ............................................................... 38 2.........................................................................................................................................................................................8 Copy mode ..................................5 Parameter setting method ........2.....................3................................................2.......... 54 3.............. 47 3....................................................................................................................................7 Help mode ............................................................... 24 2...............3 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel .................................................................................................................................................................3...........................................................2 Power on....7 Instructions for compliance with U.............................................................................................................3................................ 50 3.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3............................................................. 2 1.....2 Basic Configuration ...................... 12 2........5 Connection of stand-alone option units .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2...............3..........................3..... 37 2............................................................ 6 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 7 2......3....................3 Inverter-generated noises and reduction techniques ........................................................................................2.3 Operation.......................................2........1 Pre-Operation Information ..............................2 Operation Panel...........................1 Names and functions of the operation panel (FR-DU04).............................................................. 48 3.......2.....................................2.............................................................................................. 48 3...................................................................................................................................................................................1 Pre-Operation Information ........5 Inverter-driven 400V class motor................................................................................................ 49 3.................................... 2 1.................................................................. 29 2....... 9 2.............................................3................................ 7 2...............................2..............................................................6 Peripheral devices ..............4 Leakage currents and countermeasures ....................................................................................................3 Other wiring .........................1 Pre-operation checks..................................2..............1..........................

...................27 Retry function (Pr.......................................................................................................2... Pr.....3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user.39 Online auto tuning selection (Pr.................2......................................... 81 4...... Pr...................................................... 52 to Pr................................................................. 22.36 Operation mode selection (Pr.................................................2............ 73)......... 154) ... 17)...........................................2...2...................... Pr. Pr...................24 Remote setting function selection (Pr. Pr......2......... 90 to Pr......... 61 to Pr......... 74 4.................................15 Regenerative brake duty (Pr.......... Pr.......................... 70 4...................... 66 4.......... 116 4.....2........2......................2 Output frequency range (Pr.... 57 4 PARAMETERS 58 4.................................. 77 4...... 165)........... 115)....2......... 49.................18 Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr....... 100 4................. 64 4.... 68 4...................... 4 to Pr........... Pr................. 140 to Pr...............37 Motor capacity/number of motor poles/speed control gain (Pr...... 77).....................2 Parameter Function Details ...... Pr..... 105 4... Pr....2.......3.......... 58 4... 82 4................................. 89)..........29 PWM carrier frequency (Pr....................... 148. Pr.. 18)... 104 4.............................................. 69) .......................................... Pr...............2............................................ Pr......1. 143) ........2.12 Stall prevention (Pr.... Pr............................................................ 8.............................................. 19........2........21 Monitor display/FM...30 Voltage input (Pr..................... 92 4.. Pr........................................ 78 4............. 108 4.....................................35 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr........2..... 158) ................ 12) .............. Pr. Pr...2.......9 Load pattern selection (Pr... 111) ...3.................................... 11.......... 116)........ 72 4.......................................... 162 to Pr........2. 16) ................................. 83 4.........................2......... 69 4....................... 80.... 100 to Pr...................... 65...................... 109 4...11 MRS input selection (Pr....... 73 4.............................................1....... 13)........................... 95 4...................... 43..................26 Acceleration/deceleration reference current/lift mode starting frequency (Pr........................ 1........ 64) ........ Pr........................23 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr... 24 to Pr..... 82 to Pr.................. Pr................ 56 3..............14 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr............... 83 4................. 75) ..3 Base frequency.................... 65 4....... 144)............ 239) .. 84 4.......... Pr...........2........................................................4 Multi-speed operation (Pr.5 Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr......... Pr. 97 4............. 44..............................13 Multi-speed input compensation (Pr................ 110............ AM terminal function selection (Pr....2... 95) .............. 67 to Pr................................ 99 4.............................. 14) ..... 9) ........... Pr...2............................ Pr...............2............2.................................... Pr........................ Pr................................... 21.... 36) ...7 DC injection brake (Pr.....8 Starting frequency (Pr.............. 240) ..................................................34 Parameter write inhibit selection (Pr... 81................................ Pr......... 113) ...... 6. 103 4...................31 Input filter time constant (Pr.. 102 4.. 114........... 10......................... 94.... 76 4.... 112) .....20 Second/third stall prevention (Pr.......................... 0..... 58........................ 84.........................................................................16 Frequency jump (Pr...........4 Combined operation mode (Operation using the external input signals and PU)........................ 149......25 Intelligent mode selection (Pr..................................................... base frequency voltage (Pr...........2.......... 76) ......................... 15.... 58 4................ 109) ..... 23....10 Jog operation (Pr.............. Pr.......... 56) ... 42................. 98 4..................................... Pr....... 72...................17 Speed display (Pr..2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use .................................... 47........................................ 7.... Pr.............................2................................... 30..6 Electronic overcurrent protection (Pr...................... Pr....... Pr...........................................2..................3................2............. 57.....................27..... 37........................... 232 to Pr.... 28) .......................2........... 100 4.....................2...... 54......... 59)...................2...................................... 3. Pr............... 66............. 48..............2....... Pr... 91 4............................2............................................................................................................41 Computer link operation (Pr....................... 60) ............................. Pr..........28 Applied motor (Pr............22 Monitoring reference (Pr................................ 96).......... 342) .. 66 4. 124................. 70) .................................................. 46........2......... 71)................................................................................33 Alarm code output selection (Pr................... 31 to Pr.2............... Pr.......... Pr................2.............3 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel (FR-DU04)).........................................2.................. 74) . Pr.................... 85 4......................... Pr.................. 41) .........2.. Pr..........................................2......... 50. 118 4..... 80 4...............................................................1 Torque boost (Pr...........2....................................... Pr.... Pr........................................... 89 4.2.............1......1 Parameter list ..19 Output frequency detection (Pr.. 75 4...... 67 4..2.. 20... 29..................40 V/F control frequency (voltage) (Pr.... 55.... 45.............. 2.. Pr... 88 4.................. 78) ... 117 to Pr.................................... 119 II ...... Pr............... Pr.........................38 Offline auto tuning function (Pr.... 79 4...... 94 4.........................................................2..............1 Parameter List .................. Pr............32 Reset selection/PU disconnection detection/PU stop selection (Pr......................................................................................................... 79)... 71 4....

........................... 276) ..................................... 182 5........................................2.......................2.................... 266)........... 193 5............................... Pr........................... 186) .....2........................... 990).......1................... 157)..................................................... 231)....................1 Error (alarm) definitions .........................................................................3 Periodic inspection .2...................... 161 4..................................55 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr......... 171) ...... 137 4.......2.................................. 191 5...2 Motor rotates in opposite direction... 150.............................................................. 158 4.................................. 192 5...2....2...................1 Errors (Alarms) ...................................2............... 162 4..................... 194 5................................................................................................ Pr............... 135 to Pr.................................... 287).......................43 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over function (Pr....... 181 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 182 5..............................2 Check items ............... 905) .................. 193 5...............................................................1 Motor remains stopped .................. 251) ..................2........62 Stop on contact (Pr................... 190 to Pr......................... 275.............2.......................................................2............................. 147 4..........................5 Motor current is large..................................................................................................... 146 4...................................................... 176)....1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection..... 194 5...............2.......................... Pr...............................64 Droop control (Pr...2.............................2.....................65 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr............... 157 4.................................................................2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of an alarm.................. 134) .................2...2 Troubleshooting.................................. 193 5.......................................................................... 128 to Pr...........................2...................... 166 4......... 156) ........................ 143 4....... 250) .......................................53 User initial value setting (Pr...........................1....2.........................2........................................................................................... 192 5.... 142 4.........6 Speed does not increase...................................................................2........................2....................................................................... 174 4..........60 Stop-on-contact...47 Stall prevention function and current limit function (Pr.....................................66 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain (Pr... 139) ................................................ 195 5..................1....4.................... 253) .....49 User group selection (Pr........... 152............ 901) ............... 193 5........................56 Stop selection (Pr..... 176 4...... 143 4.............................................................. 153) ...........................................................................................................50 Watt-hour meter clear/actual operation hour meter clear (Pr........................ 173 4..... 195 III Contents 4...............................................2................................................. 160 4.................... 145 4.......................... 900....... 194 5....... Pr................................... 152 4......................................3..............3 Correspondences between digital and actual characters ............. 194 5................................ 159 4............................................ 195 5.......... 151) . 193 5................................................. 155)....... 191 5................................9 Operation panel (FR-DU04) display is not provided ......59 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr....54 Programmed operation function (Pr................................................................... 170.....................................................................61 High-speed frequency control (Pr..............................7 Speed varies during operation. 271 to Pr....2........................................ 244) ........... 193 5.................... 141 4.....................................................10 POWER lamp is not lit ...........63 Brake sequence function (Pr..................................................................................11 Parameter write cannot be performed ........................................2............................................................................... Pr...51 Input terminal function selection (Pr.................... 130 .........3..... Pr............... 285)....................42 PID control (Pr.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth............3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection .........................................................................2.................... 274) ....................................................52 Output terminal function selection (Pr............. 153 4............................................................................................................2..............48 OL signal output timer (Pr... 200 to Pr... 150 4.......................3................................ load torque high-speed frequency selection (Pr.................. 194 5.............. 147 4....67 Buzzer control (Pr.... 261 to Pr.............................................................................2...2................................................. 286...46 RT signal activated condition selection (Pr...............................2..58 Override bias/gain (Pr..................................................45 Zero current detection (Pr...................................5 Resetting the inverter.... 160........ 270)....... 180 to Pr.......................................................................... 169 4.........................................................57 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr.............................2.. 194 5.......................................................2.4 Alarm code output ......................... 195)..2.......... 195 5..............8 Operation mode is not changed properly...................... 199).............................................2..........1..............2.............. 278 to Pr........... 902 to Pr...... 252.............................44 Output current detection function (Pr................ Pr......................................................2...........................2... Pr......2..... 159 4.............1................................................................. 182 5.. 173 to Pr.......................2...........................3 Speed greatly differs from the setting .................................................................................................................................................

.......................3....................................................................................................................................................................................................................3............................................................................ 203 6...........................................................................6 Daily and Periodic Inspection ......................... 196 5............... 224 IV ...................................................................... 211 7......................................................................................................................................................................1........................................................................1...............3 Outline drawings ...........................................................7 Replacement of parts .............. 213 APPENDICES 218 Appendix 1 Data Code List .......................................5 Pressure test ....................1 Stand-alone options............................................................................................. 207 7 OPTIONS 211 7............ 211 7...............................................................................1................................. 205 6...........................................................................................1.................................................................................... 203 6....................................3........2 Inboard dedicated options ................................................4 Insulation resistance test using megger .. 196 5............... 196 5.......3......5.........................................................................3................................2 Common specifications ..............3......................................................................... 201 6 SPECIFICATIONS 203 6.........1 Standard Specifications.............................................................................................................8 Inverter replacement.... currents and power .................................... 200 5......9 Measurement of main circuit voltages................................1 Option List .......................................1...................................1 Model specifications .... 218 Appendix 2 Operating the Inverter Using a Single-Phase Power Supply ........................ 199 5........................

.............................................1 Pre-Operation Information.....................3 Structure ............................ Chapter 1 1..........CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE This chapter gives information on the basic "outline" of this product......2 Basic Configuration.............. 3 <Abbreviations> DU Operation panel (FR-DU04) PU Operation panel (FR-DU04) and parameter unit (FR-PU04) Inverter Mitsubishi transistorized inverter FR-A500 series Pr....... Parameter number PU operation Operation using the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) External operation Operation using the control circuit signals Combined operation Operation using both the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) and external operation FR-A200E Mitsubishi transistorized inverter FR-A200 series <EXCELLENT> series Chapter 2 ! Chapter 3 ! ! ! Chapter 4 ! ! ! Chapter 5 ! Chapter 6 Chapter 7 ................ 2 1..... 1 1.......... Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the equipment.

Symbol Specifications None Japanese specifications NA U.0. This manual is written for the FR-A500 series transistorized inverters. For handling information on the parameter unit (FR-PU04). Prepare equipment and parts as necessary.1 Precautions for operation Incorrect handling might cause the inverter to operate improperly. specifications EC European specifications 2) Accessory Instruction manual If you have found any discrepancy. inboard options.) (4) Wiring Connect the power supply. install the inverter in a proper place. or at the worst. (See page 9.) (3) Installation To operate the inverter with high performance for a long time. please contact your sales representative.4K Inverter type FR-A520-0. damage. (Refer to page 45..1 Pre-Operation Information 1. (2) Preparations of instruments and parts required for operation Instruments and parts to be prepared depend on how the inverter is operated..1.1.S. Handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual to use it correctly. etc.4K/ Inverter type Serial number Input rating Output rating INPUT : XXXXX OUTPUT : XXXXX Serial number Rating plate SERIAL : PASSED Capacity plate FR. stand-alone options. and with proper clearances. (1) Unpacking and product check Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact. etc. refer to the corresponding manuals.4K to 55K Indicates capacity in "kW". (Refer to page 7. in the correct direction. Note that incorrect connection may damage the inverter and peripheral devices. its life to be reduced considerably.1 Pre-Operation Information OUTLINE 1 OUTLINE 1.A520 . 1) Inverter type Capacity plate MODEL Rating plate MITSUBISHI INVERTER FR-A520-0. motor and operation signals (control signals) to the terminal block.) 1 .4K - Symbol A520 A540 Voltage Class 200V class 400V class Symbol Applicable Motor Capacity 0. the inverter to be damaged.

2 Basic Configuration OUTLINE 1.1.) The breaker should be selected with care since a large inrush current flows in the inverter at power on. Proper peripheral devices must be selected and correct connections made to ensure proper operation.) Japanese Harmonic Suppression Guideline The "harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" was issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry in September. 1994. (Refer to page 203. Please handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual.) ! (NFB) or (ELB) 1 Magnetic contactor (MC) Reactors AC reactor (FR-BAL) DC reactor (FR-BEL) Inverter Ground Devices connected to the output Ground Ground Incorrect wiring might lead to inverter damage. Make selection carefully. (Refer to page 9. the inverter to be damaged.2.2 Basic Configuration 1. By connection of the power factor improving reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL). its life to be reduced considerably. The ambient temperature should be as low as possible within the permissible range.) Do not connect a power capacitor.) Name Power supply Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) or no-fuse breaker (NFB) Description Use the power supply within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter.) The magnetic contactor need not be provided.4K to 3. this product conforms to the "harmonic suppression technique for transistorized inverters (input current 20A or less)" set forth by the Japan Electrical Manufactures' Association. When installed. (Refer to page 38. This guideline applies to the FR-A520-0. (Refer to page 35. and in the worst case.1 Basic configuration The following devices are required to operate the inverter.81 feet)). To prevent an electric shock. This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. 2 . The grounding cable provided for reduction of induction noise from the power line of the inverter is recommended to be wired by returning it to the grounding terminal of the inverter. (Refer to page 38.) The reactors must be used when the power factor is to be improved or the inverter is installed near a large power supply system (1000kVA or more and wiring distance within 10m (32. always ground the motor and inverter. It might reduce the inverter life. refer to the corresponding manuals. (Refer to page 7. surge suppressor or radio noise filter to the output side. (For connections of the peripheral devices.7K. do not use it to start or stop the inverter. ! The inverter life is influenced by ambient temperature. The control signal lines should be kept away from the main circuit to protect them from noise. Incorrect system configuration and connections can cause the inverter to operate improperly.

3. Note: The "EC" version of the FR-A500 uses pheonix type connectors for the control circuit terminal block.3 Structure OUTLINE 1. 3 .1 Appearance and structure (1) Front view POWER lamp ALARM lamp PU connector (Provided with modular jack type relay connector) (For use with RS-485 cable communication) Operation panel (FR-DU04) Brake resistor* (Fitted to the back) Accessory cover Wiring port cover for option Front cover Rating plate Capacity plate Control circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block Wiring cover Inboard option mounting positions Modular jack type relay connector compartment (2) Without front cover *7.1.3 Structure 1.5K or less inverters are equipped with an inboard brake resistor.

remove the operation panel before reinstalling the front cover. FR-A540-11K to 22K • Removal 1) Remove the installation screw at top of the front cover. securely press the front cover against the inverter.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover FR-A520-0.) Catch Front cover Inverter 1 • Reinstallation 1) Insert the catches at the bottom of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter.4K to 11K. 3) Pull the front cover toward you to remove. 2) Using the catches as supports. (The front cover may be removed with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) on. 2) Hold down the front cover and pull it toward you to remove.3.5K • Removal 1) Hold both sides of the front cover top and push the front cover down. (The front cover may be removed with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) on. 3) Fix the front cover with the top screw.OUTLINE 1.4K to 7. securely press the front cover against the inverter. FR-A520-15K to 22K. 4 . 2) Using the catches as supports. 2) Hold both ends of the front cover top. remove the operation panel before reinstalling the front cover. FR-A540-0. Note: When the operation panel is mounted on the front cover removed. Note: When the operation panel is mounted and the front cover is removed.) • Reinstallation 1) Insert the catches at the front cover bottom into the sockets of the inverter.

Before reinstalling the front cover. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Note: 1.OUTLINE FR-A520-30K to 55K. check the serial number to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed. FR-A540-30K to 55K • Removal 1) Remove the front cover mounting screws. • Reinstallation 1) Fix the front cover with the mounting screws. 2. Make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. 5 .

) Modular jack type relay connector Modular jack type relay connector compartment 1 3) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector (modular jack type relay connector) of the inverter and the other end into the operation panel. " Removal Reinstallation To reinstall.3. Note: Install the operation panel only when the front cover is on the inverter. insert straight and mount securely. 6 . remove and reinstall the operation panel after switching power off. • Removal Hold down the top button of the operation panel and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.3 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel To ensure safety. 2) Disconnect the modular jack type relay connector. (Place the disconnected modular jack type relay connector in the modular jack type relay connector compartment.OUTLINE 1. • Reinstallation using the connection cable 1) Remove the operation panel.

............................................................................ Chapter 1 2.................. Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the equipment......................3 Other wiring ..1 Installation.... 29 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 2 .....2 Wiring ........... 7 2....................................................... 9 2......CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter gives information on the basic "installation and wiring" of this product..

Install it on a non-combustible surface (e. Also. hold the unit with even strength and do not apply too much strength to the front cover alone. 2) Install the inverter in a place where it is immune to vibration. etc. Use the option (FR-A5CN##) for installation. fluff. The inverter will be very hot (maximum about 150°C). dirt etc.2. dust.94 inches) or more 5cm (1. If they are installed in improper positions. Cooling fan built in the inverter Cooling air 2 Measurement position 5cm (1. Check that the ambient temperature is within that range in the positions shown in figure 3). flammable gases. Handle it gently to protect it from damage. 8) Note the cooling method when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. oil mist.g. 9) Install the inverter securely in the vertical direction with screws or bolts. When two or more inverters are installed or a ventilation fan is mounted in an enclosure. ambient temperature must be within the permissible range (depending upon the operation mode and conditions (see ambient temperature specifications on page 203). Avoid direct sunlight and places of high temperature and high humidity. The mounting area should be cut to the panel cutting dimensions. 3) Note on ambient temperature The inverter life is under great influence of ambient temperature. The cooling section outside the enclosure has the cooling fan.1 Installation INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. press.9 m/s or less) Also note the cart.97 inches) 5cm (1. etc.1. 6) The amount of heat generated in an enclosure can be reduced considerably by placing the heat sink outside the enclosure. 7) Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to oil mist. the inverters and ventilation fan must be installed in proper positions with extreme care taken to keep the ambient temperatures of the inverters below the permissible value. Install the inverter in a clean place or inside a "totally enclosed" panel which does not accept any suspended matter. 5) Avoid high temperature and high humidity. In the place of installation.97 inches) or more * Leave sufficient clearances above and under the inverter to ensure adequate ventilation. (5. metal).94 inches) or more *: 1cm (0. 4) Install the inverter on a non-combustible surface. 7 . 3) Note on ambient temperature 4) Clearances around the inverter 5cm (1. dust.97 inches) or more * 10cm (3. Do not use the inverter in any environment where it is exposed to waterdrops. Note: 1. the ambient temperatures of the inverters will rise and ventilation effect will be reduced.1 Installation 2.97 inches) Measurement position 10cm (3. 2.39 inches) or more for model 3. Also leave sufficient clearances around the inverter.7K or less These clearances are also necessary for changing the cooling fan. The inverter uses plastic parts.97 inches) 5cm (1.1 Instructions for installation 1) Handle the unit carefully.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING 8) For installation in an enclosure Ventilation fan Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Built-in cooling fan (Correct example) (Incorrect example) (Correct example) (Incorrect example) Inverter Position of Ventilation Fan Accommodation of two or more inverters 9) Vertical mounting (1) Wiring cover and handling (22K or less) 1) When cable conduits are not connected Cut the protective bushes of the wiring cover with nippers or a cutter before running the cables. Otherwise. Wiring cover 2 Protective bush WARNING Do not remove the protective bushes. resulting in a short circuit or ground fault. 8 . 2) When cable conduits are connected Remove the corresponding protective bushes and connect the cable conduits. the cable sheathes may be scratched by the wiring cover edges.

In this case.5K A RH B RM C RL JOG RT MRS RES AU CS SD RUN SU IPF OL FU SE Running Up to frequency Instantaneous power failure Overload Frequency detection Open collector output common Common to sink and source Open collector outputs Alarm output 10E(+10V) 10(+5V) FM SD AM 5 Meter (e.g.1 Terminal connection diagram EC version NFB L1 3-phase AC power supply L2 L3 L11 L21 PR – + PX P1 EC version Jumper NFB R 3-phase AC power supply S T R1 S1 PC P1 P/ + R (Note) PX (Note) PR N/– PU connector (RS-485) Jumper 24VDC power output and external transistor common (Contact input common for source logic) U V W Motor IM Ground Jumper Remove this jumper when using FR-BEL.2 Wiring 2. use this resistor and the operation panel or parameter unit together to make calibration.4K to 7. FR-A540-0.4K to 7. However. Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start Start self-holding selection High Multi-speed selection Middle Low Jog mode Second acceleration/deceleration time selection Output stop Reset Current input selection Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Contact input common for sink logic) Control input signals (no voltage input allowed) Frequency setting signals (analog) STF STR STOP Note: Terminals PR. PX are provided for FR-A520-0. 9 .2. Jumper Remove this jumper when using FR-ABR. frequency meter) + − Calibration resistor* (+) (−) Analog signal output (0 to 10VDC) Moving-coil type 1mA full-scale 3 Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1kΩ 2 1 Common Auxiliary input Current input 0 to 5VDC 2 Selected 0 to 10VDC 5 (Analog common) 1 0 to ± 5VDC Selected 0 to ±10VDC 4 (4 to 20mADC) Ground Main circuit terminal Control circuit input terminal Control circuit output terminal * Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU04) or parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used for calibration. the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. Used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for such a reason as a remote frequency meter.2.2 Wiring INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5K.

5K or less. 24VDC power and When transistor output (open collector output). JOG Reverse rotation start Start self-holding selection Multi-speed selection Turn on the STOP signal to select the self-holding of the start signal. start (STF). such as a programmable controller. the inverter can be Input terminal selection operated with the 4-20mADC frequency setting signal. Output stop Used to shut off the inverter output to bring the motor to a stop by the magnetic brake. V. PX Terminal Name AC power input Inverter output Power supply for control circuit Brake resistor connection Brake unit connection Power factor improving DC reactor connection Built-in brake circuit connection Ground Description Connect to the commercial power supply. (Turn on to start and turn off to stop. Acts as a programmed operation start signal in the programmed operation mode.1A power output. Pr. Current input Only when the AU signal is turned on. 10 . this terminal common (source) serves as a contact input common. This terminal can be used Contact input as a 24VDC. N 〈+. selection been set. When failure selection the inverter is shipped from the factory. P1 〈+. is external transistor connected. Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor. Connected to the AC power supply terminals R and S 〈L1 and L2〉. Disconnect the jumper from terminals P-P1 〈+ -P1〉 and connect the optional power factor improving reactor (FR-BEL). function selection JOG mode selection Jog operation can be performed with the start signal (STF or (Pr. these functions can also be selected by turning on the RT signal. 186) change the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure. (2) Description of control circuit terminals Type Symbol STF Terminal Name Forward rotation start Description Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop. Keep these terminals unconnected when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC). S.1 second. 0. the stop command is given. 180 to With the CS signal on.) For grounding the inverter chassis.1A power (PC terminal). T 〈L1. e. Input signals RT MRS RES AU CS SD PC Use the RH.g. To retain the alarm display and alarm output or when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC). L21〉 P. L3〉 U. functions. Disconnect the jumper from terminals PR-PX and connect the optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR. Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or longer) to stop the inverter output.) Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop. Turn on the RES signal for more than Reset 0. restart can be made automatically when Automatic restart after Pr. L2. the built-in brake circuit is valid. (Provided for 7. 186) change Turn on the RT signal to select the second acceleration/ terminal Second acceleration/ deceleration time. Must be earthed. −〉 P. PR 〈+. S1 〈L11. 180 to STR). W R1. function selection (Pr. Contact input Common to the contact input terminals and terminal FM. 2 STR STOP RH. stop (STOP) etc.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (1) Description of main circuit terminals Symbol R. Connect the optional FR-BU brake unit. When source logic has been selected. Note: 〈 〉 Terminal names in parentheses are those of the EC version. PR〉 P. connect the external power supply common for transistor output to this common terminal to prevent a fault caused by undesirable current. Input terminal Turn on the JOG signal to select jog operation (factory setting). it is set to disallow restart. Common output terminal for common (sink) 24VDC 0. Note instantaneous power terminal that this operation requires restart parameters to be set. P1〉 PR. remove the jumpers from terminals R-R1 and S-S1 〈L1-L11 and L2-L21〉 and apply external power to these terminals. RL Contacts. Used to reset the protective circuit activated. then turn it off. RM and RL signals as appropriate to select multiple speeds. power regeneration converter (FR-RC) or high power factor converter (FR-HC). When the jumper is connected across terminals PX-PR (factory setting). RM. When the second functions such as "second deceleration time torque boost" and "second V/F (base frequency)" functions have functions. When the STF and STR signals are turned on simultaneously.

5Hz. the maximum output frequency is reached at 20mA and I/O are proportional.1A 10VDC. B. Switch between input 0 to 5VDC (factory setting) and 0 to 10VDC from the operation panel. Permissible Pr. Switched high when stall prevention is reset (*2). SU. deceleration or stop (*2). this signal is added to the frequency setting signal of terminal 2 or 4.4K to 7. the maximum output frequency is reached at 5V (or 10V) and I/O are proportional. By entering 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10VDC). OL. Permissible load 24VDC 0. Switch between input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (factory setting) from the operation panel. By entering 4 to 20mADC. normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C). Alarm: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C).5K. Not output while the inverter is reset.1A. High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct). Input resistance 10kΩ. Permissible load 24VDC 0. change the 10mA input specifications of terminal 2. 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. 200VAC 0. FR-A540-0. Switched (Pr.1A. Maximum permissible voltage 20V. 11 . Input resistance 10kΩ. Output signal 0 to 10VDC Permissible load current 1mA With the operation panel connector.1A. variable). Switched low when the output frequency has reached or exceeded the detection frequency set as appropriate.5K. Switched low when instantaneous power failure or undervoltage protection is activated (*2). communication can be made through RS-485. permissible load current 10mA Common to the RUN. Switched high when below the detection frequency (*2). permissible load current When it is connected to terminal 10E. 190 to high during acceleration. Input resistance 235Ω. Maximum permissible current 30mA. terminal functions. IPF and FU terminals.1A.3A. such as 1440 pulses/s at 60Hz output frequency. Do not earth. Permissible load 24VDC 0. C Alarm output RUN Inverter running SU Open collector Up to frequency Output signals OL IPF Overload alarm Instantaneous power failure Frequency detection Open collector output common For meter FU SE Pulse FM Analog AM Analog signal output Communication RS-485  PU connector *1: *2: *3: Terminals PR and PX are provided for the FR-A520-0. Permissible load 24VDC 0. is output. • Conforming Standard : EIA Standard RS-485 • Transmission format : Multi-drop link • Communication speed : Maximum 19200 bps • Overall length : 500m 2 Analog Frequency setting (voltage) Frequency setting (current) Auxiliary frequency setting Frequency setting input common 4 1 5 Contact A. Low indicates that the open collector outputting transistor is on (conducts). Output terminal Switched low when the output frequency has reached within function selection ±10% of the set frequency (factory setting. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on. 5VDC. 1 contact output indicating that the output has been stopped by the inverter protective function activated.INSTALLATION AND WIRING Type Symbol 10E 10 Frequency setting Frequency setting power supply Terminal Name Description When the frequency setting potentiometer is connected in the factory-set state. Switched low when the stall prevention function has caused stall prevention to be activated. Common to the frequency setting signal (terminal 2. 195) change load 24VDC 0. connect it to terminal 10. (*3) The output signal is Factory setting of output item: proportional to the magnitude Frequency of each monitoring item. Maximum permissible voltage ±20V. Factory setting of output item: Frequency One selected from 16 Permissible load current 1mA monitoring items. variable). 30VDC 0.4K to 7. Switched high during stop or DC injection brake operation (*2).3A. Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the starting frequency (factory set to 0. By entering 0 to ±5VDC 0 to ±10VDC.

surge suppressor or radio noise filter (FR-BIF option) in the output side of the inverter.75K 500m (1640. Especially for long distance wiring.24 feet) 300m (984.40 feet) 500m (1640.24 feet) 300m (984. exercise care to prevent chips and other foreign matter from entering the inverter. wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter. These terminals must not be shorted. Otherwise the inverter will be damaged.5K or more 500m (1640. 2) Cut the protective bushes of the wiring cover when running the cables..2 Wiring of the main circuit (1) Wiring instructions 1) Crimping terminals with insulation sleeves are recommended for use with the power and motor cables. 8) Electromagnetic wave interference The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components. (A selection example for the wiring length of 20m is shown on page 16.24 feet) = 600m (1968.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.40 feet) 2 Overall wiring length (1. W) of the inverter.24 feet) 200m (656. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor. connect the radio noise filter in the primary side of the electromagnetic contactor. In this case.48 feet) 7) Connect only the recommended optional brake resistor between the terminals P and PR 〈+ and PR〉.) Inverter Capacity Non-low acoustic noise mode Low acoustic noise mode 0. (When two or more motors are connected to the inverter. In this case. failure or malfunction. the maximum overall wiring length should be as indicated in the following table. If any of the above devices are installed.40 feet) maximum 300m (984. the total wiring length should be within the indicated value. the overcurrent protection may be misactivated or the devices connected to the output side may misoperate or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacitance of the wiring. Always keep the inverter clean.40feet) maximum.) 12 . Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm.4K 300m (984.40 feet) 300m (984. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. switching power off during motor operation may result in E.) 5) Use cables of the recommended size for wiring to make the voltage drop 2% or less. (22K or less) 3) Power must not be applied to the output terminals (U. (If the FR-BIF radio noise filter is connected. which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter.24 feet) 1.UVT. Therefore.5K or more) 500m (1640. When drilling mounting holes in a control box etc. install the FR-BIF optional radio noise filter (for use in the input side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF line noise filter to minimize interference. 4) After wiring. V.16 feet) 0. immediately remove them.2.24 feet) + 300m (984. 9) Do not install a power capacitor. 6) The overall wiring length should be 500m (1640.

S1 〈L11. 10HP) 11kW to 15kW (15 to 20HP) 14 8 to minimize the ground cable length. Protective earth connection essential.5HP.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 10) When rewiring after operation.5kW to 37kW (25 to 50HP) 22 14 • Ground the motor on the inverter side using one 45kW. 55kW (60. make sure that the POWER lamp has gone off. 13 . L21〉 of the FR-A520-11K. and when more than 10 minutes have elapsed after power-off. • Use the dedicated ground terminal to ground the inverter. 75HP) 38 22 wire of the 4-core cable. the inverter and motor must be grounded.5kW. The grounding 3.) 2 (Unit: mm ) • The ground cable should be as thick as possible. start rewiring work. check with a meter that the voltage is zero.5 3. For some time after power-off. 7.5 point should be as near as possible to the inverter 5.5 2 5.5kW (7. Ground Cable Gauge Motor Capacity Its gauge should be equal to or larger than those 200V class 400V class indicated in the following table. Use transformer or surge absorber EN/IEC standard compliant. etc. Notes on Grounding • Leakage currents flow in the inverter. Connection cable R1 S1 〈L11〉 〈L21〉 Charge lamp R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 N 〈−〉 T 〈L3〉 P1 U P 〈+〉 V W Screw size (M5) CAUTION Do not use residual current protective device as the only protection against indirect contact. 11) Use the space on the left-hand side of the main circuit terminal block to run the cable for connection of the control circuit power terminals R1. Use contactor and no fuse breaker EN/IEC standard compliant. To prevent an electric shock. Do not connect more than 2 wires on the protective earth terminal. 18. chassis. (Do not use the screw in the case. After that.7kW (5HP) or less 3. there is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor.

5K R1 R S1 S Charge lamp Screw size (M4) FR-A520-37K. 0.5K.5K.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (2) Terminal block layout In the main circuit of the inverter. 7.22K (M8) Jumper Screw size (M6) FR-A520-1.5K.2K. 45K Charge lamp R1 R S1 S Screw size (M4) R R N/– S P1 T P/+ U PR V PX W Screw size (M5) S T U V W N/– P1 P/+ Screw size (M10) Screw size (M8) Jumpers Screw size (M5) Jumper FR-A520-11K R1 R Charge lamp R S N/– T P1 U P/+ V W Screw size (M5) S1 S Screw size (M4) FR-A520-55K Charge lamp R1 R S1 S Screw size (M4) R S T U V W N/– P1 P/+ Screw size (M12) Screw size (M8) Jumper Jumper Screw size (M5) 14 .5K.4K.7K R R1 S S1 Screw size (M4) Jumper Screw size (M4) T U V W N/– P1 P/+ PR PX Charge lamp FR-A520-30K Charge lamp R1 R S1 S Screw size (M4) R S T U V W N/– P1 P/+ Screw size (M8) Screw size (M6) Jumper 2 FR-A520-5.75K R R1 S S1 T N/– U P1 V P/+ W PR PX Charge lamp Jumper Screw size (M4) R S T U V W N/– P1 P/+ Screw size (M4) Charge lamp FR-A520-15K. 18. 2. the terminals are arranged as shown below: 1) 200V class FR-A520-0. 3. 22K R1 R S1 S Screw size (M4) Screw size 15K (M6) 18.

7K R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 U V W N/– P1 P/+ PR PX Screw size (M4) Jumper Screw size (M4) Screw size (M6) Jumper Charge lamp Charge lamp FR-A540-30K R1 S1 〈L11〉 〈L12〉 R S 〈L1〉 〈L2〉 V W Screw size (M4) S1 R1 〈L11〉 〈L21〉 R S T 〈L1〉 〈L2〉 〈L3〉 U N/– P1 P/+ Screw size (M6) FR-A540-5. 7. 3. 15K.5K. 55K R1 S1 〈L11〉 〈L12〉 R S 〈L1〉 〈L2〉 V W N/– Screw size (M4) Charge lamp R T S 〈L1〉 〈L2〉 〈L3〉 U P1 P/+ Screw size (M8) Screw size (M8) Jumper Screw size (M4) Jumpers FR-A540-11K.4K. 45K.75K. 0.2K. 22K S1 R1 〈L11〉 〈L12〉 Charge lamp R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 Screw size (M4) R S T 〈L1〉 〈L2〉 〈L3〉 U V W N/– P1 P/+ Screw size (M6) Jumper Screw size (M6) Note: 〈 〉 Terminal names in parentheses are those of the EC version.5K.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2) 400V class FR-A540-0. 18.5K R1 S1 〈L11〉 〈L12〉 R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 Charge lamp R 〈L1〉 N/– S 〈L2〉 P1 T 〈L3〉 P/+ U PR V PX W Screw size (M4) Screw size (M4) FR-A540-37K. 15 . 2.

W 〈L1.5K FR-A520-7. etc.5 1. Overtightening can cause the screws and unit to be damaged.5 3. L3〉 〈L1.5 14 8 14 8 22 14 22 22 38 22 38 38 60 60 AWG R.8 7.8 7. L3〉 2-4 〈2. L2.5 2 3. W 〈L1. (4) Connection of the power supply and motor Power supply Ground terminal No-fuse breaker R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 T 〈L3〉 U V W R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 U V W Motor Ground Ground The power supply cables must be connected to R. L2. S. Undertightening can cause a short or misoperation. V.4 4.4 4. L3〉 W 14 14 2.4K to 55K Applicable Inverter Type FR-A540-0. S. V. W 〈L1. T 〈L1.5 5. L3〉 14 14 12 14 12 12 10 10 6 8 6 8 4 6 4 4 2 4 2 2 1/0 1/0 PVC insulated Cables mm2 R.5 4 4 6 6 16 10 16 10 25 16 25 25 35 25 50 35 70 50 2 Note: 1.2K FR-A520-3. L3〉 〈L1. T) 〈L1. L2. Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torques.7K FR-A540-5.5 2. T U. 2. V. S. L2.5 1.4K to 3. The following table lists the cables and crimping terminals used with the inputs (R. S. In the above connection.5-4〉 2-4 〈2.5 2. T U. The cables used should be 75°C (167°F) copper cables.4 4.7K FR-A520-5.5 2.5 1.5-5 〈6-5〉 5.5-4〉 5.7 14.8 Crimping Terminals R. 〈L1. L2.5 2.5-4 〈4-4〉 5. L2.5 5. V. S. V.5-4〉 2 2 5.5-6 〈6-6〉 14-6 〈16-6〉 14-6 〈16-6〉 22-6 〈25-6〉 22-6 〈25-6〉 38-8 〈37-8〉 38-8 〈50-8〉 60-8 〈70-8〉 U. S. the inverter will be damaged.5-4〉 5. L3〉 and outputs (U. L3〉 2-4 〈2.8 7.8 7. Connect the motor to U. T 〈L1. S. turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the counterclockwise (arrow) direction when viewed from the load shaft.5K FR-A540-7. W 2-4 〈2. If they are connected to U. L3〉 W 2. T U. V. L2.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (3) Cables. L3〉 2 2 3. T R. V.5-4 〈4-4〉 5.the power supply cables must be connected to R and S 〈L1 and L2〉. crimping terminals.5K FR-A520-11K FR-A520-15K FR-A520-18.5K FR-A540-22K FR-A540-30K FR-A540-37K FR-A540-45K FR-A540-55K Terminal Tightening Screw Torque Size N⋅m M4 M4 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 1.5 3.5-4〉 2-4 〈2. W U. V.4K to 2.5K FR-A540-11K FR-A540-15K FR-A540-18.5 12 12 4 2. T U.5 4 2. T R. resulting in a short or misoperation. L2.5 4.7 24.5 4. S.5 5. W. V.4K to 55K Applicable Inverter Type FR-A520-0.5-5 〈4-5〉 5. V.5-4〉 3.5-6 〈6-6〉 8-6 〈10-6〉 8-6 〈10-6〉 14-6 〈16-6〉 22-6 〈25-6〉 22-8 〈25-8〉 38-8 〈35-8〉 60-8 〈50-8〉 Cables (Note 1) mm2 R.5 2.5 14-5 〈16-5〉 8-5 〈6-5〉 14 8 14-5 〈16-5〉 14-5 〈16-5〉 14 14 22-6 〈35-6〉 22-6 〈16-6〉 22 22 38-8 〈35-8〉 38-8 〈25-8〉 38 38 38-8 〈70-8〉 38-8 〈35-8〉 38 38 60-8 〈95-8〉 60-8 〈30-8〉 60 60 100-10 〈95-8〉 100-10 〈70-8〉 100 100 100-10 100-10 〈95-40〉 100 100 150-12 150-12 〈110-12〉 150 150 PVC insulated Cables AWG mm2 R. W) of the inverter and the torques for tightening the screws: • FR-A520-0.5-4 〈2. L2.4 7.8 14.5-4 〈4-4〉 5. L2. S. 16 . For use with a single-phase power supply.4 7.5 5. T U.5K FR-A520-22K FR-A520-30K FR-A520-37K FR-A520-45K FR-A520-55K Terminal Tightening Screw Torque Size N⋅m M4 M4 M5 M5 M5 M6 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 1. W. S. Phase sequence need not be matched. U.5 Crimping Terminals Cables (Note 1) mm2 R.5-4 〈4-4〉 5. W 〈L1.5 10 10 6 4 6 8 16 6 6 6 16 10 4 4 35 16 2 2 35 25 2 2 70 35 1/0 1/0 95 50 4/0 4/0 75 70 4/0 4/0 − − MCM300 MCM300 − − • FR-A540-0. L3〉.4 4. V.

L21〉). (Note 4) Main power supply Note: 1. L21〉). Otherwise the inverter may be damaged. For a different power supply system which takes the power of the control circuit from other than the primary side of the MC. the inverter control circuit power is lost and the alarm output signal cannot be kept on. Otherwise the inverter may be damaged. (Note 4) • Model FR-A520-5. 5. • Model FR-A520-0. the voltage should be equal to the main circuit voltage. S1 〈L11.7K. the power supply cables must not be connected to the lower terminals. To keep the alarm signal on terminals R1 and S1 are available. connect the power supply terminals R1 and S1 〈L11 and L21〉 of the control circuit to the primary side of the MC.5K to 55K <Connection procedure> R1 S1 〈L11〉 〈L21〉 Power supply terminal block for control circuit Power supply terminal block for control circuit R S T 〈L1〉 〈L2〉 〈L3〉 MC 1) Loosen the upper screws. S1 〈L11. 4) Connect the separate power supply cables for control circuit to the lower terminals (R1.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (5) Connecting the control circuit to a power supply separately from the main circuit If the magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter power supply is opened when the protective circuit is operated. L21〉). the jumpers across R-R1 and S-S1 〈L1-L11 and L2-L21〉 must be removed. When using a separate power supply. FR-A540-5. 4. L3〉 is on.7K <Connection procedure> R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 Terminal block for main circuit R1 〈L11〉 S1 〈L21〉 1) Loosen the upper screws 2) Remove the lower screws. 17 . S1 〈L11. Supplying power to only the R1 and S1 〈L11 and L21〉 terminals and entering the start signal results in an error indication (E. do not switch off the control power (terminals R1. T) 〈L1 L2.5K to 55K.4K to 3. 4) Connect the separate power supply cables for control circuit to the upper terminals (R1. In this case. For the FR-A520-5. the inverter may be damaged. If connected.5K to 55K. S.OC1). 2) Remove the lower screws. FR-A540-0.4K to 3. 3) Remove the jumpers. 3. When the main circuit power (R. FR-A540-5.5K to 55K. 2. 3) Pull out and remove the jumper.

2 If the cable gauge used is 1. 3) The frequency input signals to the control circuit are micro currents.25mm or more. When contacts are required.5 Tightening torque: 1. Make sure that the control circuit terminal wiring does not touch power circuit terminals (or screws) or conducting power circuit. resulting in an operation panel or parameter unit contact fault. Use a NFB (No fuse breakers) or fuse on the inverter input (primary) side. A too short dimension may cause cable disconnection. Note: Wire the stripped cable by twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose.2N⋅m A RL SE B RM SU C RH IPF PC RT OL AM 10E AU 10 2 RES 5 SD 4 FM CS 1 STOP MRS FU SD 2 RUN STF STR JOG •EC version Terminal screw size: M3.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the cables are run improperly. 3) Tighten the screw to the specified torque.) Note: 1. strip the sheaths of the cables and use them as they are.5 Tightening torque: 1.2. 2. SE and 5 are common to the I/O signals and isolated from each other. 18 . These common terminals must not be connected to each other or earthed. A too long stripping dimension may cause a short circuit with the neighboring cable. use two or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to prevent a contact fault. (2) Terminal block layout •Japanese and NA version In the control circuit of the inverter. Undertightening can cause cable disconnection or malfunction.2N⋅m A SE B RUN C SU SD LPF AM 10E OL FU 10 2 5 RES 4 PC 1 STF RL RM STR RH CS RT FM AU SD STOP MRS JOG <Wiring procedure> 1) For the wiring of the control circuit. 2 4) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.3 Wiring of the control circuit (1) Wiring instructions 1) Terminals SD. 2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).75mm gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals. (Do not plate the cable with solder. Strip the sheath to the following dimension. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the screw or unit damaged. the terminals are arranged as shown below: Terminal screw size: M3. 6mm ± 1mm 2) Loosen the terminal screw and insert the cable into the terminal.

If it is fitted in both positions at the same time. the connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the other position. reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws. never disconnect the control circuit terminal block. While power is on. and to source Logic for the EC version. EC version C ON 3 C ON 2 NA and Japanese version C ON 3 S INK C ON 2 3) Using care not to bend the pins of the control circuit connector. 3.) With both hands. the inverter may be damaged. The sink-source logic change-over connector must be fitted in only one of those positions. 2) Remove the connector from the rear surface of the control circuit terminal block and place in required Logic position (either Sink or Source).) 1) Loosen the two mounting screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. SOU RCE SOU RCE SINK CON 3 S INK CON 2 SOU RCE CON1 19 .INSTALLATION AND WIRING (3) Changing the control logic The input signals are set to sink logic for the Japanese and NA version. pull down the terminal block from the back of the control circuit terminals. 2. Note: 1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly. To change the control logic. (The screws cannot be removed. (The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the connector position.

R Current STF RUN R STR 1 R R Current flow related to RUN signal Inverter AX40 SD SE DC24V 9 • When using an external power supply for transistor output. a signal switches on when a current flows out of the corresponding signal input terminal. do not install the power supply in parallel outside the inverter.) AY40 type transistor output module Inverter 1 STF 2 STR 3 RH 4 RM 5 RL 6 RES 9 PC DC24V (SD) 2 10 DC24V SD 20 . Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. (Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power supply.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 4) Sink logic type • In this logic. Doing so may cause misoperation due to leakage current. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply. use terminal PC as a common to prevent misoperation caused by leakage current.

Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. PC Current flow related to RUN signal Inverter AX80 Current STF RUN 1 R R R STR SE DC24V 9 R • When using an external power supply for transistor output. Do not short terminals PC-SD.1A permissible current Note that the wiring length should be within 30m. a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal. 57 "coasting time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure". 0. Inverter AY-80 9 PC DC24V (SD) 1 STF 2 DC24V 10 STR SD (4) How to use terminals "STOP". <Example: Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure in sink logic> Connect terminals CS-SD and set a value other than "9999" in Pr. Forward rotation Reverse rotation STOP MRS Stop RES SD STF STR CS SD (Short) 3) Using the "PC" terminal This terminal can be used as 24VDC power output using SD as a common terminal. 21 . leakage current from transistor output cannot be prevented. When terminal PC is used as a 24V power supply. use terminal SD as a common to prevent misoperation caused by leakage current. "CS" and "PC" 1) Using the "STOP" terminal A connection example (for sink logic) for self-holding the start signal (forward rotation. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals. reverse rotation) is shown on the right.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5) Source logic type • In this logic. Specifications: 18V to 26VDC. 2) Using the "CS" terminal This terminal is used to perform automatic restart after instantaneous power failure and commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation.

10BASE-T cable) Example: SGLPEV 0.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. Tyco Electronics Corporation • Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (e. 22 . FA or other computer by a communication cable.2. the PU connector can be used for communication operation from a personal computer etc. Connector: RJ45 connector Example: 5-554720-3. Otherwise. Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as 10BASE-T cable) Example: SGLPEV 0. Note: 1.4 Connection to the PU connector (1) When connecting the operation panel or parameter unit using a connection cable <Recommended cable connector> • Parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2) (option) or the following connector and cable. 2. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication. the product may be damaged due to electrical specification differences. 2. Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board. <PU connector pin-outs> Viewed from the inverter (receptacle side) front 1) SG 2) P5S 3) RDA 4) SDB 5) SDA 6) RDB 7) SG 8) P5S 2 8) 1) Note: 1.g. LTD. FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector.5mm×4P (Twisted pair cable. Ltd. Tyco Electronics Corporation. When the PU connector is connected with a personal. a user program allows the inverter to be run and monitored and the parameter values to be read and written.62 feet). Note: The maximum wiring length is 20m (65. 4 pairs). 4 pairs). Pins 2) and 8) (P5S) provide power to the operation unit or parameter unit.5mm×4P (Twisted pair cable. MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES. • Connector: RJ45 connector Example: 5-554720-3. <System configuration example> 1) When a computer having a RS-485 interface is used with several inverters Computer Station 1 Inverter PU connector (Note 1) Station 2 Inverter PU connector (Note 1) Station n Inverter PU connector (Note 1) RS-485 interface/terminal Computer 10BASE-T cable (Note 2) Termination resistor Distribution terminal Use the connector and cables which are available on the market. Mitsubishi Cable Industries. (2) For RS-485 communication With the operation panel disconnected.

Connect the terminal resistor only to the inverter remotest from the computer. Make connections in accordance with the instruction manual of the computer used. 3. cables and converter which are available on the market. (Terminal resistor: 100 Ω) 23 SDA RSB . 15m *Converter PU connector (Note 1) Station 2 Inverter PU connector (Note 1) Station n Inverter PU connector (Note 1) RS-485 terminal Distribution terminal 10BASE-T cable (Note 2) *Converter available on the market is required. <Wiring method> 1) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter Computer Side Terminals Signal name RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG Description Receive data Receive data Send data Send data Request to send Request to send Clear to send Clear to send Signal ground Frame ground Cable connection and signal direction Computer RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RDB RDA RDB RDA RDB RDA SDB SDA SDB SDA SDB (Note 1) Cable connection and signal direction 10BASE-T Cable Inverter PU connector SDA SDB RDA RDB (Note 1) 0. Mitsubishi Cable Industries.5mm×4P (Twisted pair cable. If this reflection hinders communication. If the PU connector is used to make a connection. use a distributor as a terminal resistor cannot be fitted. *Commercially available converter examples Model: FA-T-RS40 Converter Nagoya Sales Office.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2) When a computer having a RS-232C interface is used with inverters Computer Station 1 Inverter RS-232C connector RS-232C cable Max. Tyco Electronics Corporation. Connector: RJ45 connector Example: 5-554720-3.. (Note 3) Termination resistor Use the connector. Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co. There may be the influence of reflection depending on the transmission speed and/or transmission distance. Ltd. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer as they differ between models. 4 pairs). Note: 1. Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as 10BASE-T cable) Example: SGLPEV 0. 2. 2. provide a terminal resistor.3mm2 or more SG 2) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" inverters (several inverters) 10BASE-T Cable Termination resistor (Note 2) CSA CSB SG FG SG Station 1 Inverter SG Station 2 Inverter SG Station n Inverter Note: 1. Ltd.

FR-A540-0.4K to 3.5K....5K.5K.5K to 3..4K to 3.. refer to the terminal block arrangement (page14 and 15). The brake resistor connected should only be the dedicated brake resistor..7K 2 Terminal P Terminal PR Terminal PR Terminal P Terminal PR Jumper Terminal PX • Model.. (1) Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (option) The built-in brake resistor is connected across terminals P 〈+〉 and PR..) Removal of jumper FR-A520-5. 7.. (The jumper should remain disconnected.5K FR-A540-5. The jumper across terminals PR-PX must be disconnected before connecting the dedicated brake resistor. 2.5K...5K Terminal PR Terminal PR Terminal PR Jumper Terminal PX 24 ..4K to 3. FR-A520-5.. 0.) Removal of jumper FR-A520-0.4K.......7K 1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. Remove the jumper from across terminals PR-PX and connect the dedicated brake resistor (option) across terminals P-PR 〈+ -PR〉.. Fit the external dedicated brake resistor (option) instead when the built-in brake resistor does not have enough thermal capability for high-duty operation.5 Connection of stand-alone option units The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required. 7. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.5K 1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P-PR 〈+ -PR〉.75K FR-A520-1. (For the positions of terminals P and PR.) Note: 1.. 7. FR-A540-5. FR-A520-0....5K.7K FR-A540-0. A failure to do so may damage the inverter... 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P-PR 〈+ -PR〉.7K. (The jumper should remain disconnected. 7.2. • Model.

) For model 7. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. PX P/+ N/– PR P/+ N/HA HB HC PR P TH1 THS TH2 Resistor unit FR-BR-(H) Brake unit FR-BU-(H) Note: 1.5K or less. the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed. N) 〈+. If twisted wires are used. 4. 2.8 feet). brake unit and resistor unit should be within 5m (16. install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off a current in case of failure. T (Note 4) MC R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 U V W Motor IM ON MC OFF MC Inverter PR Remove jumper. install a voltage-reducing transformer. Therefore. The wiring distance between the inverter. Connect the inverter terminals (P.40 feet). When the transistor in the brake unit fails. 3.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (2) Connection of the FR-BU brake unit (option) Connect the optional FR-BU brake unit as shown below to improve the braking capability during deceleration. −〉 and FR-BU brake unit terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. the brake transistor bacomes extremely hot and it has a chance to get fire. the distance should be within 10m (32. 25 . For the power supply of 400V class.

set "2" in Pr. 3. Wrong connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter.5K or less. When the transistor in the brake unit fails. install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off current in case of failure.56 feet). install a voltage-reducing transformer. After making sure that the wiring is correct. (4) Connection of the FR-HC high power factor converter (option) When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics. the brake transistor bacomes extremely hot and it has a chance to get fire. For models 7. 30 "regenerative function selection". Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. U V W Motor IM Remove jumper P PC HA HB HC TB OCR PR OCR Constant-voltage power supply + Comparator BU brake unit N Brake unit HC HB OFF ON MC MC 2 Note: 1.40 feet). the distance should be within 5m (16. If twisted wires are used. The wiring distance between the inverter. wire as shown below.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (3) Connection of the conventional BU brake unit (option) Connect the BU brake unit correctly as shown below. NFB MC Inverter R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 PR PX P/+ T (Note 4) Discharge resistor N/– Remove jumpers. 2. For the power supply of 400V class. brake unit and discharge resistor should be within 2m (6. High power factor converter (FR-HC) Inverter R S T MC1 MC2 R4 S4 T4 N P Y1 or Y2 RDY RSO SE R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 (Note 1) R4 S4 T4 T 〈L3〉 SD RES X10 (Note 3) X11 (Note 3) N/– P/+ T R1 〈L11〉 S1 〈L21〉 (Note 1) From FR-HCL02 R3 S3 T3 MC2 External box MC1 R2 NFB Power supply S2 T2 FR-HCL01 R S 26 . 4. remove the jumper across terminals PR-PX. Therefore.

S4. L2. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. 180 to Pr. The voltage phases of terminals R.40 feet). 〈+〉 FR-BEL P Note: 1. resulting in overcurrent alarm of the other inverters. 30 "regenerative function selection". 2. 3. S. the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed. (6) Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (option) Connect the FR-BEL power factor improving DC <Connection method> reactor between terminals P1-P 〈P1. set "0" in Pr.) (5) Connection of the FR-RC power regeneration converter (option) (For power coordination. Use Pr. L2. install a power factor improving AC reactor on the power supply side for all the inverters. small impedance between the inverters will cause a regenerative current from the power return converter to leak into the other inverters. the reactor Remove the jumper. How to connect the FR-BAL power factor improving AC reactor (option) When using two or more inverters in the same system. 186 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used with the X10 and X11 signals. In this P1 case.) When connecting the FR-RC power regeneration converter. Reverse polarity of terminals N (−). 2. After making sure that the wiring is correct. (Refer to page 80) 4.INSTALLATION AND WIRING Note: 1. Remove the jumpers across the R-R1 and S-S1 〈L1-R1 and L2-S1〉 terminals of the inverter. use sink logic (factory setting). 2. Inverter R 〈 L 1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 N/– P/+ FR-RC power regeneration converter N/− P/+ NFB Power supply FR-BAL R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 Note: 1. Use the X11 signal when using the computer link plug-in option (FR-A5NR). T 〈L1. N/-) and FR-RC power regeneration converter terminals as shown below so that their signals match with each other. and connect the control circuit power supply across the R1-S1 〈L11-L21〉 terminals. the FR-HC cannot be connected. For source logic. L2. Otherwise. select the sink logic. L3〉 and terminals R4. For models 7. The power input terminals R. will not function.5K or less. T4 must be matched before connection. L3〉 must be open. P (+) will damage the inverter. the jumper connected across terminals P1-P 〈P1. 27 . For details. T) 〈L1. T 〈L1. To prevent this.+〉. refer to the FR-RC power regeneration converter manual. (For the EC version. The wiring distance should be within 5m (16. S. always install the power factor improving reactor (FR-BAL).+〉 must be removed. L3〉. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R. connect the inverter terminals (P/+. When the FR-HC is connected. S.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. lamp. When there is a commercial power supply-inverter switch-over circuit as shown below. use two parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact for contact inputs to prevent a contact fault. C). 3) When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit. 1) Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over MC1 Interlock Power supply R <L1> U S <L2> V T <L3> W Inverter IM MC2 Leakage current Low-level signal contacts Twin contact 2 4) Low-level signal contacts 28 . 6) Do not apply a voltage directly to the alarm output signal terminals (A.2. If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure. L2. make up a circuit which will switch off the main circuit power supply terminals R. 5) Do not apply a large voltage to the contact input terminals (e. B. L21〉 for the control circuit are switched off. 2) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure. the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored. STF) of the control circuit. etc. the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to arcs generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error. 4) Since the input signals to the control circuit are on a low level. Always apply a voltage to these terminals via a relay coil. T 〈L1. 7) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.6 Design information 1) For commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation. provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.g. L3〉 when the power supply terminals R1. S1 〈L11. provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2 designed for commercial power supply-inverter switch-over. S.

the overcurrent protection is activated. According to current fluctuation rate (larger with faster switching) Differs according to maker’s device specifications. • The differences between harmonics and RF noise are indicated below: Item Frequency Environment Quantitative understanding Generated amount Immunity of affected device Example of safeguard Harmonics Normally 40th to 50th degrees or less. whether a power factor improving reactor is used or not. (up to 3kHz or less) To wire paths. power capacitors.3. power impedance Logical computation is possible Approximately proportional to load capacity Specified in standards for each device.3 Other wiring 2. For the output frequency and output current. when the motor is driven by the inverter. when an overcurrent flows in the inverter. and output frequency and output current on the load side. laying paths Occurs randomly. frequency and transmission path from radio frequency (RF) noise and leakage currents. insert a power factor improving reactor in the inverter’s input or DC circuit. Also. Increase the distance. do not install a capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter’s output. Install a reactor RF Noise High frequency (several 10kHz to MHz order) Across spaces. etc.2. Hence. affecting power supply equipment. • Safeguard The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the power supply differs according to various conditions such as the wiring impedance. distance.3 Other wiring INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. 29 . Take the following measures. quantitative understanding is difficult. NFB Power factor improving DC reactor Motor Inverter IM Power factor improving AC reactor Do not insert power factor improving capacitor Note: A power factor improving capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter’s output may overheat or be damaged due to the harmonics of the inverter output. Power harmonics are different in generation source. To improve the power factor. the adequate method is to obtain them under rated load at the maximum operating frequency.1 Power harmonics Power harmonics may be generated from the converter section of the inverter.

7kW (5HP) or less inverter.53 0.3 0.3. If any of the maximum values are exceeded.2 7th 2.6 0.9 0.55 13th 1.24 (1) Application of the harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers New installation/addition/renewal of equipment 2 Calculation of equivalent capacity sum Not more than reference capacity Sum of equivalent capacities Over reference capacity Calculation of outgoing harmomic current Is outgoing harmonic current equal to or lower than maximum value ? Not more than maximum value Over maximum value Harmomic suppression technique is required.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. 3. Table 2 Conversion Factors for FR-A500 Series Class 3 5 Circuit Type Without reactor With reactor (AC side) 3-phase bridge (Capacitor-smoothed) With reactor (DC side) With reactors (AC.3 0. 2) "Harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers" This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high-voltage consumer who will install.26 Over 23rd 0. Harmomic suppression technique is not required.2 Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer.5 1.8 K33 = 1.76 0. 1) "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" This guideline was issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industries in September.5 1. The harmonic suppression guidelines were established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents.7kW (5HP) and less.69 0. this guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures. add or renew harmonic generating equipment.4 K32 = 1. inverters comply with the "harmonic suppression techniques for transistorized inverters (input current 20A or less)" established by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association.6kV 22kV 33kV 5th 3.39 0.4 K5 = 0 30 .35 19th 0.46 17th 1.70 0.8 1. Therefore install the optional reactor for the 200V class. By installing the FR-BEL or FR-BAL power factor improving reactor. DC sides) Self-exciting 3-phase bridge When high power factor converter is used Conversion Factor Ki K31 = 3.8 K34 = 1.86 11th 1.0 0.32 23rd 0.36 0.47 0. Table 1 Maximum Values of Outgoing Harmonic Currents per 1kW Contract Power Received Power Voltage 6. 1994 and applies to 200V class inverters of 3.82 0.

86 18.03 68.66 68.37 48.77 9.2 4.1 188.6 21.75 86.7kW.5 (10) 11 (15) 15 (20) 18.42 13.1 17th 4.274 2.24 48.82 92.95 108.55 12.81 1.3 2.4 1) Calculation of equivalent capacity (P0) of harmonic generating equipment The “equivalent capacity” is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of consumer’s harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the following equation.9 228.7kW or less motor is driven by a 5.6kV 22/33kV 66kV or more Reference Capacity 50kVA 300kVA 2000kVA Table 4 Harmonic Content (Values at the fundamental current of 100%) Reactor Not used Used (AC side) Used (DC side) Used (AC.9 1209 1443 1931 2379 2893 3543 Fundamental Wave Current Converted from 6.773 6.1 1.6 618.3 158.74 (Note) 5.1 25.22 95.75 3.5 138.10 Note: When a motor of 3.95 2.2 1.6 49. harmonics must be calculated with the following procedure: *: Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity P0 = Σ (Ki × Pi) [kVA] of the applied motor and found in Table 5.320 7.391 12.5 (25) 22 (30) 30 (40) 37 (50) 45 (60) 55 (75) Rated Current [A] 200V 1. Table 5 Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Inverter Drive Applied Motor (kW (HP)) 0.0 257.107 3.0 23rd 1.092 10.50 (Note) 7.15 39.0 (Note) 19.48 30.85 53.2 459.46 65. when a 3.3 3.49 49.6kV (No reactor.0 60.7 281.97 1.05 20.07 113.4 728. For example.20 64.177 7.4 (0.7 252.7 3.98 95.3 463.5) 0.5 89.569 7. but the fundamental wave input currents are indicated because they must be included in the calculation of the harmonic current of the guideline.181 10.75 46. 100% operation ratio) 7th 20.06 34.0 1.7 141.2 143.88 80.1 63.006 4.0 121 147 180 400V 0.1 378.9 30.57 0.882 1.32 116.2 (3) 3.16 115.07 13.4 5.5 237.7 (5) 5.5 (7.4 318.72 77.240 10.2 1218 1501 1825 2235 11th 4.61 (Note) 2.4 7.6 910.7 3.7 3.75 (1) 1.2 2.5kW transistorized inverter.7 419.2 170.1 376.09 34.7 5th 31.5 311.40 33. the transistorized inverter is not the target of the household appliances/general-purpose products guideline.22 65.7 762.24 15.055 14.9 49.36 57.5 24.0 169.95 24.0 4.78 57.10 98.6kV (mA) 49 83 167 240 394 579 776 1121 1509 1860 2220 2970 3660 4450 5450 Rated Capacity (kVA) 0.573 5.21 17.7 25th 0.6 36.89 79.4 73.5 7.8 342.5) 7.8 25.20 20.7 17th 2.7 980.519 2.3 13th 3.9 Fundamental Wave Current Converted from 6.6 1.6 156.INSTALLATION AND WIRING Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits Received Power Voltage 6.4 19th 1. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit in Table 3.342 6.93 (Note) 13.1 98.494 3.96 53.97 20. 31 . DC sides) 5th 65 38 30 28 7th 41 14.61 6.32 16.40 161.18 29.158 4.37 2.1 11th 8.5 (2) 2.90 33.46 127.94 24.50 9.7kW or less capacity is driven by a transistorized inverter of more than 3.9 3.2 19th 3.1 504. 2) Calculation of outgoing harmonic current Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) × operation ratio × harmonic content • Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor × operation time ratio during 30 minutes • Harmonic content: Found in Table 4.48 39.6 25th 1.7 36.8 18. It Ki: Conversion factor (refer to Table 2) should be noted that the rated capacity Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment* [kVA] used here is used to calculate generated i : Number indicating the conversion circuit type harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive.96 6.29 128.165 7.7 157.16 33.47 98.8 1.4 73.4 8.7 42.8 52.4 23rd 2.5 13 9.9 34.81 4.58 59.4 234.96 95.1 17.34 44.2 13th 7.18 27.8 61.440 12.4 191.

4) Harmonic suppression techniques No. the power factor improving capacitor has an effect of absorbing harmonic currents. maximum value per 1kW (contract power) × contract power. DCL) High power factor converter (FR-HC) Installation of power factor improving capacitor Transformer multiphase operation AC filter Description Install a reactor (ACL) in the AC side of the inverter or a reactor (DCL) in its DC side or both to suppress outgoing harmonic currents. reducing low-degree harmonic currents. When used with a series reactor. This filter detects the current of a circuit generating a harmonic current and generates a harmonic current equivalent to a difference between that current and a fundamental wave current to suppress a harmonic current at a detection point.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 3) Harmonic suppression technique requirement If the outgoing harmonic current is higher than. The high power factor converter (FR-HC) is used with the standard accessory. 3 4 5 6 Active filter 2 32 . producing a great effect of absorbing harmonic currents. providing a great effect of absorbing harmonic currents. -∆. a harmonic suppression technique is required. The converter circuit is switched on-off to convert an input current waveform into a sine wave. ∆-∆ combination to Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30° as in provide an effect corresponding to 12 pulses. A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedance at specific frequencies. suppressing harmonic currents substantially. 1 2 Item Reactor installation (ACL.

• Use twisted shielded cables for the detector connection and control signal cables and connect the sheathes of the shielded cables to terminal SD. Though the inverter is designed to be insusceptible to noise. those electromagnetically and electrostatically inducted to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the main circuit power supply. measures should be taken to suppress the noise. 2) Measures against noises which enter and cause misoperation of the inverter When devices which generate many noises (which use magnetic contactors. many relays. The measures differ slightly depending on noise propagation paths. 3) Measures against noise which is radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. it could generate noise. at one point. for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be effected by noise. and those transmitted through the power supply cables. the following measures must be taken: • Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate noise to suppress noise. since the inverter chops the output at a high carrier frequency. • Fit data line filters (refer to page 35) to signal cables. so it requires the following basic measures to be taken. • Ground the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal. Inverter-generated noise Air-propagated noise Noise directly radiated by inverter Noise radiated by power cables Noise radiated by motor cables """ Path 1) """Path 2) """Path 3) Magnetic induction """Path 4). • Ground the inverter. Also. etc. it handles low-level signals.5) noise Static induction noise Cable-propagated noise """Path 6) Noise propagated through power cables """Path 7) Noise from ground cable due to """Path 8) leakage current 33 . motor. Inverter-generated noise is largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter and inverter main circuit (I/O). 1) Basic measures • Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.3.3 Inverter-generated noises and reduction techniques Some noises enter the inverter causing it to misoperate and others are radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. If these noises cause peripheral devices to misoperate. magnetic brakes.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5) Telephone 7) 2) 1) Instrument Receiver 7) In3) verter 6) 4) Motor IM 2) Sensor power supply 8) 3) Sensor Noise Path 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Measures When devices which handle low-level signals and are susceptible to misoperation due to noise (such as instruments. (5) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to reduce further effects. (4) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to reduce further effects. receivers and sensors) are installed near the inverter and their signal cables are contained in the same panel as the inverter or are run near the inverter. In such a case. (4) Inset line noise filters into I/O and radio noise filters into input side to suppress cable-radiated noises. (2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter. When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter. When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter within the same line. (2) Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF. FR-BSF01) to the power cables (I/O cables) of the inverter. inverter-generated noise may flow back through the power supply cables to misoperate the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) to the power cables (input cables) of the inverter. When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables. (3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. disconnection of the ground cable of the device may cause the device to operate properly. (2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible form the inverter. (3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. 2 34 . magnetic and static induction noise may be propagated to the signal cables to effect the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. leakage current may flow through the ground cable of the inverter to affect the device. the devices may be affected by air-propagated noises and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.

81 inches) or more (at least 10cm (3. Noise Terminal Voltage of Inverter and Example of Its Reduction by Noise Filters Conditions " Motor:3.5kHz) Noise terminal voltage (dB) Noise frequency (MHz) By decreasing the carrier frequency.7kHz fc=14.7K Conditions " Inverter: FR-A520-3.7K (fc=0. d (cm) 3 5 10 30 0 10 20 30 Noise frequency (MHz) *Noise terminal voltage: Represents the magnitude of noise propagated from the inverter to the power supply. Differences between Noise Terminal Voltages at Different Carrier Frequencies Conditions " Motor: 3. Install filter (FR-BLF. 72 to set the carrier frequency to a low value (1kHz). Do not ground control cable. Noise Induced to Signal Cables by Inverter Output Cables 100 Induction voltage (dB) Parallel cable 80 Twisted pair cable 60 Noise terminal voltage (dB) 120 100 80 60 FR-Z220-3.1 0. induction noise to the signal cables can be reduced. • Data examples By decreasing the carrier frequency. Though motor noise increases at a low carrier frequency.3 0.5kHz FR-A520-3.INSTALLATION AND WIRING • Data line filter Noise entry can be prevented by providing a data line filter for the detector cable etc. (Separation of 30cm (11.7k fc=(14. Use twisted pair shielded cable. Induction noise can also be reduced by moving the signal cables away from the inverter output cables. FRBLF Reduce carrier frequency. Use Pr. Sensor Do not ground shield but connect it to signal common cable.0kHz Soft-PWM(Factory setting) 20 0 0. Inverter power supply Install filter FR-BIF to inverter input side.5 1 3 5 10 30 fc=0.7K FR-A220E-3.7K " Motor: FR-JR 4P 3. Inverter FRBLF Motor FRBIF Use 4-core cable for motor power cable and use one cable as ground cable.5 1 FR-A520-3.1 0.FR-BSF01) to inverter output side. 35 . 240 will make it unoffending. selection of Soft-PWM in Pr.3 0. the noise terminal voltage* can be reduced.7kW (5HP) " Average terminal voltage 0dB=1µV 120dB=1V 120 100 80 60 fc=2.94 inches)) from sensor circuit. Control power supply Power supply for sensor Do not ground control box directly.81 inches) reduces noise to 1/2-1/3.7kW (5HP) " Output frequency: 30Hz " Noise form: Normal mode 5cm d(cm) Inverter 40 20 Coaxial cable Motor 20 0 0.) By fitting the FR-BSF01 or BLF on the inverter output side. Separate inverter and power line 30cm (11.1/100). ! Example of counter measures against noise Control box Install filter (FR-BLF.7kHz) FR-BLF Terminal FR-BSF01 (4T) Measuring instrument 40 50 Line-to-line distance. induction noise can be reduced greatly (to 1/10 .7kW (5HP) " Average terminal voltage 0dB=1µV 120dB=1V By using shielded cables as signal cables.FRBSF01) to inverter input side. noise will be about as low as that of our conventional FR-Z200 series.

leakage currents flow through them.8 8. Larger leakage currents occur in 400V class than in 200V class. Since their values depend on the static capacitance. etc.4 Leakage currents and countermeasures Due to the static capacitance existing in the inverter I/O wiring and motor. 240) will make it unoffending.6 Leakage Current (mA) Wiring length 50m Wiring length 100m (164.08 feet) 310 500 340 530 370 560 400 590 440 630 490 680 535 725 Motor: SF-JR 4P Carrier frequency: 14. NFB Power supply Thermal relay Motor Inverter Line static capacitances IM Line-to-Line Leakage Current Path • Countermeasures Use the electronic overcurrent protection (Pr.5 (7. it is recommended to use a temperature sensor to directly detect motor temperature. Note that motor noise increases.5) 7. • Countermeasures Decrease the carrier frequency (Pr.4 25. take counter measures using the following methods. operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise). the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases. 72) of the inverter. etc.75 (1) 1. Higher motor capacity leads to larger leakage currents. • Line-to-Line Leakage Current Data Example (200V class) Motor Capacity (kW (HP)) 0. Mitsubishi's Progressive Super Series) in the inverter's own line and other line.8 3.5 (2) 2.2 (3) 3. These leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily. 9) of the inverter.2 5.3. By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression (e. carrier frequency. Decrease the carrier frequency.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. 2 (2) Line-to-line leakage currents Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacities between the inverter output cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50m (164.1 12. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr..7 (5) 5. (1) To-ground leakage currents Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other line through the ground cable.5kW (10HP) or less).5kHz 2 Cable used: 2mm 4-core cable * Leakage current of the 400V class is about twice larger. Decrease the carrier frequency of the inverter to reduce leakage currents.04 feet) (328. Note that motor noise increases. ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ • To-ground leakage current Note that a long wiring length will increase leakage currents. To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents.4 (1/2) 0.04 feet) or more) for the 400V class small-capacity model (7. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr.5 (10) Rated Motor Current (A) 1.g. ⋅ ⋅ 36 .8 19. 240) will make it unoffending.

Especially for a 400V class motor. Specifically.3. (2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side On the secondary side of the inverter. use an insulation-rectified motor. use the “inverterdriven. a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals. When the 400V class motor is driven by the inverter. insulation-rectified motor”. dedicated motor”. 1) Specify the “400V class inverter-driven. 2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor. consider the following measures: • Measures It is recommended to take either of the following measures: (1) Rectifying the motor insulation For the 400V class motor.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. connect the optional surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H).5 Inverter-driven 400V class motor In the PWM type inverter. 37 . the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation.

5 (25) 22 (30) 30 (40) 37 (50) 45 (60) 55 (75) Power Supply Capacity (kVA) 1. the circuit breaker must be inverse time or instantaneous trip type.5 (10) 11 (15) 15 (20) 18.3.N12 S-N20 S-N25 S-N35 S-N50 S-N65 S-N80 S-N95 S-N125 S-N150 S-N180 S-N220 2 2) 400V class Inverter Type FR-A540-0.5 4.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100 Rated current of Circuit Breaker (Note) With power factor Standard improving reactor 30AF 5A 30AF 5A 30AF 10A 30AF 10A 30AF 15A 30AF 15A 30AF 20A 30AF 15A 30AF 30A 30AF 30A 50AF 50A 50AF 40A 100AF 60A 50AF 50A 100AF 75A 100AF 75A 225AF 125A 100AF 100A 225AF 150A 225AF 125A 225AF 175A 225AF 150A 225AF 225A 225AF 175A 400AF 250A 225AF 225A 400AF 300A 400AF 300A 400AF 400A 400AF 350A Magnetic Contactor S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N11.5) 7.7K FR-A540-5.5K FR-A540-22K FR-A540-30K FR-A540-37K FR-A540-45K FR-A540-55K Motor Output (kW (HP)) 0.7 (5) 5.5K FR-A520-11K FR-A520-15K FR-A520-18.5K FR-A520-7.2 (3) 3.5 4.2 (3) 3.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100 Rated current of Circuit Breaker (Note) With power factor Standard improving reactor 30AF 5A 30AF 5A 30AF 5A 30AF 5A 30AF 10A 30AF 10A 30AF 15A 30AF 10A 30AF 20A 30AF 15A 30AF 30A 30AF 20A 30AF 30A 30AF 30A 50AF 50A 50AF 40A 100AF 60A 50AF 50A 100AF 75A 100AF 60A 100AF 100A 100AF 75A 225AF 125A 100AF 100A 225AF 150A 225AF 125A 225AF 175A 225AF 150A 225AF 200A 225AF 175A Magnetic Contactor S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N11.5 5.5 (2) 2.4K FR-A540-0.4 (1/2) 0.5 (10) 11 (15) 15 (20) 18.5 5.5 2.5 (25) 22 (30) 30 (40) 37 (50) 45 (60) 55 (75) Power Supply Capacity (kVA) 1.75 (1) 1.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.75K FR-A520-1.75K FR-A540-1.7K FR-A520-5.7 (5) 5. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices: 1) 200V class Inverter Type FR-A520-0.5K FR-A520-22K FR-A520-30K FR-A520-37K FR-A520-45K FR-A520-55K Motor Output (kW (HP)) 0. 38 .S-N12 S-N20 S-N20 S-N20 S-N20 S-N25 S-N35 S-N50 S-N65 S-N80 S-N80 S-N125 Note: For installations in the United States or Canada.4K FR-A520-0.4 (1/2) 0.2K FR-A540-3.5 (7. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity.5K FR-A540-7.5 (2) 2.6 Peripheral devices (1) Selection of peripheral devices Check the capacity of the motor to be used with the inverter you purchased.75 (1) 1.5 (7.5K FR-A540-2.5 2.2K FR-A520-3.5) 7.5K FR-A540-11K FR-A540-15K FR-A540-18.5K FR-A520-2.

independent of the carrier frequency setting: • Progressive Super Series (Type SP.3 40 0.18 2. In the connection neutral point grounded system. SS cable is routed in metal (200V 60Hz) conduit (200V 60Hz) produced prior to '91) Rated sensitivity current: 2. 39 .5mm2×5m (16.40 feet) 1000m (3280.40 feet) NV Noise filter Inverter Ig1 Ign Ig2 IM 5. 2.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (2) Selection the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit breaker When using the earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit.5 3045 2 Cable size (mm ) Motor capacity (kW) commercial power supply operation Leakage current (mA) <Example> 5. SS) CP) Leakage current Ig1 (mA) Leakage current Ign (mA) Leakage current Ig2 (mA) Motor leakage current Igm (mA) Total leakage current (mA) Reted sensitivity current (mA) ( ≥Ig × 10) 33 × 33 × 5m (16. Hence.66 30 7. In this case.1 2 3.64 100 4.5 11 18. Ground fault in the secondary side of the inverter can be detected at the running frequency of 120Hz or lower.5 3.17 0 (without noise filter) 70m (229.0 lg1.5mm2×70m (229.80 feet) = 0.7 7.5 15 22 37 55 lgm : leakage current of motor during 5.5 30 60 100 2. When the breaker is installed on the secondary side of the inverter. select its rated sensitivity current as follows.80 feet) = 2.2 lgn* : leakage current of noise filter on 20 inverter input side 0 0. CF. the sensitivity current becomes worse for ground faults in the inverter secondary side.0 120 l∆n ≥ 10 × {lg1 + lgn + 3 × (lg2+lgm)} 100 1. Progressive Super Series Conventional NV (Type SP. lg2 : leakage currents of cable path 80 0. SF. CS. * Be careful of the leakage current value of the noise filter installed on the inverter input side.31 Leakage current (mA) 0. do not install it since the eddy current and hysteresis loss increase and the temperature rises. The NV should be installed to the primary (power supply) side of the inverter.7 during commercial power supply 0.66 feet) 3φ 200V 2. 3.2 5. SF. the protective grounding of the load equipment should be 10Ω or less. CP) Example of leakage current Leakage current example per 1km in cable path during of 3-phase induction motor Rated sensitivity current: commercial power supply during commercial power l∆n ≥ 10 × (lg1 + lgn + lg2 + lgm) operation when the CV supply operation • Conventional NV series (Type CA.5 8 14 22 38 80 150 1.66 feet) 1000m (3280.2kW (3HP) Igm Note 1. it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics if the effective value is less than the rating. (Type CA.5 60 operation 0. CF. CS.

V. 500 Volts Maximum. (Refer to page 206) 2 (2) Branch circuit protection For installation in United States.6     External Cooling Fan (The following number of fans of 100cfm wind pressure are installed 10cm above the inverter top) 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 • 400V class Design the enclosure so that the ambient temperature. 75° or higher rated copper wires and round crimping terminals.S. 40 .5 1.3. in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes.5K FR-A520-11K FR-A520-15K FR-A520-18.7K FR-A520-5.5 1.5K FR-A520-22K FR-A520-30K FR-A520-37K FR-A520-45K FR-A520-55K 150 150 245 245 245 245 245 245 370 370 370     Air Vent Area (Ratio of air vent area in enclosure top and bottom to enclosure surface area) 5. branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.5K FR-A520-7.4K FR-A520-0. • 200V class Minimum Enclosure Volume Inverter Model (Ratio of enclosure volume to inverter volume) FR-A520-0.75K FR-A520-1. • 400V class Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable of Delivering Not More Than 10kA rms Symmetrical Amperes. S. For installation in Canada.7 Instructions for compliance with U. (3) Short circuit ratings • 200V class Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable of Delivering Not More Than 5 or 10kA rms Symmetrical Amperes. 230 or 500 Volts Maximum.6 2. branch circuit protection must be provided.5 1.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2.2K FR-A520-3.5K FR-A520-2. T) <L1.8 1. (4) Wiring of the power supply and motor Screw the cables wired to the input (R.8 5. L2. W) terminals and control circuit of the inverter to the specified tightening torque using UL-recognized. L3> and output (U. humidity and ambience of the inverter will satisfy the above specifications.5 1.6 2. Crimp the crimping terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the terminal maker. and Canadian Electrical Codes (Standard to comply with: UL 508C) (1) Installation The above types have been approved as products for use in enclosure and approval tests were conducted under the following conditions.5 1.5 2.

use shielded cables or run them in a metal piping and ground the cables on the inverter and motor sides with the shortest possible distance.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (5) Motor overload protection When using the electronic overcurrent protection function as motor overload protection. When connecting two or more motors to the inverter. we understand that the EMC Directive does not apply directly to transistorized inverters.) (1) EMC Directive 1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the EMC Directive A transistorized inverter is a component designed for installation in a control box and for use with the other equipment to control the equipment/device. Reference: Motor overload protection characteristics 50% setting (Note 1.3. (Note 3) This characteristic curve will be described even under operation of 6Hz or higher when you set the electronic overcurrent protection dedicated to the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor. 2) Compliance We understand that the transistorized inverters are not covered directly by the EMC Directive.8 Instructions for compliance with the European standards (The products conforming to the Low Voltage Directive carry the CE mark. install external thermal relays for individual motors.) The European power drive manufacturers' organization (CEMEP) also holds this point of view. we prepared the technical information "EMC Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-A21041-202) so that machines and equipment incorporating transistorized inverters may conform to the EMC Directive more easily. For this reason. Operation time (s) 180 120 60 0 50 100 150 180200 Inverter output current (%) (% to rated inverter output current) 2. (Note 2) The % value denotes the percentage of the current value to the rated inverter output current. Therefore. not to the rated motor current. * Insert a line noise filter and ferrite core into the power and control lines as required. but the machines/equipment into which they have been incorporated are covered by the EMC Directive and must carry the CE marks. 2) 100% setting (Note 2) 30Hz or higher (Note 3) 20Hz 10Hz Electronic overcurrent protection for transistor protection 240 Protection activating range Range on the right of characteristic curve Normal operating range Range on the left of characteristic curve (Note 1) When you set the 50% value (current value) of the rated inverter output current. set the rated motor current in Pr. 3) Outline of installation method Install an inverter using the following methods: * Use the inverter with an European Standard-compliant noise filter. Hence. (The CE mark is placed on inverters in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive. Please contact your sales representative. we do not place the CE mark on the transistorized inverters. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay. Full information including the European Standard-compliant noise filter specifications are written in the technical information "EMC Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-A21041-202). 41 . * For wiring between the inverter and motor.

(b) To meet the contamination level 2.) * The wire size on pages 13 and 16 are shown for following conditions • Ambient Temp :40°C maximum • Wire installation :On wall without ducts or conduits If conditions are different from above.000 m 2 Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive Conformance Guide" (information number BCN-A21041-203). etc. 3) Outline of instructions * In the 400V class inverters. only RCD of Type B is allowed on the supply side of this Electronic Equipment (EE). B. select appropriate wire according to EN60204 ANNEX C TABLE 5. (a) To meet the overvoltage category II. (IP54 or higher). carbon. * Use the no-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard.000 m During transportation -20°C to +65°C 90% RH or less 10. 42 . * Wire the earth terminal independently. (Extract from EN51078) * Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II and contamination level 2 or less set forth in IEC664. 0. * Connect the equipment to the earth securely. C) should be 30VDC. dust. (Do not connect two or more cables to one terminal.INSTALLATION AND WIRING (2) Low Voltage Directive 1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the Low Voltage Directive Transistorized inverters are covered by the Low Voltage Directive (compliant with Standard DIN VDE0160).000 m In storage -20°C to +65°C 90% RH or less 1. * In the input and output of the inverter. 2) Compliance We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive and place the CE mark on the inverters. * Environment Ambient Temperature Ambient Humidity Maximum Altitude During operation -10°C to +50°C 90% RH or less 1. the rated input voltage range is three-phase. Otherwise another protective measure shall be applied such as separation of the EE from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation of EE and supply system by a transformer. Do not use an earth leakage circuit breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth. Design notice :Where residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact. (The relay outputs are basically isolated from the inverter's internal circuitry.3A. use cables of the type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix C.) * The terminals indicated as the input and output terminals for control circuit on page 9 are isolated safely from the main circuit. 380V to 415V. insert an EN or IEC standard-compliant isolation transformer or surge suppressor in the input of the inverter. oil. * The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A. Please contact your sales representative. install the inverter in a control box protected against ingress of water. 50Hz/60Hz.

(b) Points to remember when Earthing As detailed above there are two entirely different types of earthing and to attempt to use the same earth for both will lead to problems. The inverter output voltage does not take the form of a sine wave but of a modulated pulse wave form causing “noisy” leakage current due to the capacitance of the insulation.Special class 3. If independent earthing is not possible. 10Ω or less For 200V duty . sensors. transducers. To solve this problem it is necessary to use separate “dirty” earthing for inverter and motor installations an “clean” earting for equipment such as sensors. this must be connected to earth before using equipment. (2) Earthing methods Two main types of earth 1-To prevent electrical shocks Yellow and green cable 2-To prevent RFI induced malfunction Braided strap It is important to make a clear distinction between these two.INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2. However it is impossible to manufacture insulating materials that prevent all current from leaking across them. Independent earthing should always be used between sensitive equipment and inverters. This trend becomes more pronounced with higher carrier frequencies. which is to prevent equipment that uses very weak signals (Audio equipment. a) When possible earth the inverter independently of other equipment. computers and audio equipment. Avoid connecting earthing wires together particularly on high power equipment such as motors and inverters.) or micro processors from being affected by Radio Frequency Interference. 100Ω or less 43 .. It is necessary to separate the “safety” earthing (a yellow/green wire to prevent electric shocks) from the “FRI” earthing (a braided wire strap to counter radio noise). For 400V duty . The same type of leakage current will occur in the motor due to the charging and discharging of the insulation from the high frequency wave form. another important earthing function. Inverter Other equipment Inverter Other equipment Inverter Other equipment (a) Independent grounding (b) common grounding (c) Grounding wire of other equipment b) Safety earths should be. (RFI) from external sources. For protection. There is however. etc.3. therefore it is the function of the earth (safety earth) to prevent electric shocks when touching the case. and to keep them separate by following the measures below..9 Earthing (EC version) (1) Earthing and Earth Leakage Current (a) Purpose of Earthing Electrical equipment usually has an Earthing Terminal.Class 3. use a common earthing point. electric circuits are normally housed inside an insulated case.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING c) The safety earth should be as thick as possible.7kW or less 5. and the wire as short as possible.5kW.5kW to 37kW 45kW. d) The earthing point should be as close to the inverter as possible. (Unit: mm ) Motor Size 3. 55kW Earth Wire Size 400V Class 2 3. minimum thickness as stated in below table. and any distance where they are parallel should be kept to a minimum.5kW 11kW to 15kW 18. 7. f) The earths should be as far away from input and output cables (particularly to equipment sensitive to RFI) as possible.5 8 14 22 2 2 44 . 2 e) The RFI earth should be a braided strap with a 10mm minimum cross sectional area. and as short as possible. g) Design in RFI prevention before installation.

.3 Operation ........................ Chapter 1 3.............................................. 54 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 3 ......1 Pre-Operation Information........... 45 3..2 Operation Panel ....................... 48 3................................. Always read this chapter before using the equipment...............CHAPTER 3 OPERATION/CONTROL This chapter provides the basic "operation/control" for use of this product.....

. Inverter PU PU Potentiometer Start switch 45 ......... switch on the start signal (STF. etc. etc........ "PU operation mode"....) connected to the terminal block. This mode does not require the operation signals to be connected and is useful for an immediate start of operation... "combined operation mode" and "communication operation mode"...... Prepare required instruments and parts according to the operation mode....g. (1) External operation mode (factory setting) The inverter is operated under the control of external operation signals (frequency setting potentiometer........ or 2) The start signal is set with the run command key of the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) and the frequency setting signal set with the external frequency setting potentiometer......... start switch.Operation panel (FR-DU04)........... parameter unit (FR-PU04) • Connection cable .... (2) PU operation mode The inverter is operated from the keypad of the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04)......1 Pre-Operation Information OPERATION/CONTROL 3 OPERATION/CONTROL 3.......To be prepared for use of the operation unit away from the inverter. With input power on.Switch..3. Both the start signal and frequency setting signal are required to run the inverter......1 Devices and parts to be prepared for operation The inverter can be operated in any of the "external operation mode".. 10BASE-T cable) Inverter DU04 PU04 (3) External/PU combined operation mode The inverter is operated with the external operation and PU operation modes combined in any of the following ways: 1) The start signal is set with the external signal and the frequency setting signal set from the PU... Preparation • Operation unit . FR-CB2 (option) or the following connector and cable available on the market: Connector : RJ45 connector Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.. relay.0 to 5V. • Frequency setting signal ...1.. Preparation Start switch Potentiometer Inverter DU04 PU04 • Start signal.......1 Pre-Operation Information 3.. 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC signals or multiple speeds from a potentiometer or outside the inverter Note: 1...... STR) to start operation........

Pr.............. 10BASE-T cable) 3 <Inverter setup software operating environment> OS .......... 15) key setting.............. etc........ parameter unit (FR-PU04) • Connection cable .....Switch..... 232 to Pr........0 to 5V.........OPERATION/CONTROL Preparation • Start signal.................... 4 to Pr....... Windows 98 RAM.g......... 10BASE-T cable) 3) Combined operation mode Change the setting of Pr............. Start signal Terminal signal • STF • STR Parameter unit • • FWD 3 key key 4 REV (4) Communication operation mode Communication operation can be performed by connecting a personal computer and the PU connector with the RS-485 communication cable.................. 24 to Pr.Windows 95..................... Preparation • Connection cable .Operation panel (FR-DU04)....... 239) • Jog frequency (Pr....................... Pr......... (for 1) • Frequency setting signal .To be prepared for use of the operation unit away from the inverter FR-CB2 (option) or the following connector and cable available on the market: Connector : RJ45 connector Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568 (e....One or more CD-ROM drives Mouse........ 6......... relay..1MB or more CD-ROM drive .Mouse connectable to the personal computer 46 ........ 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC signals from a potentiometer or outside the inverter (for 2) • Operation unit ..........................g... 27.................... 79 "operation mode selection" as follows: Setting Description Running frequency setting PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) • Direct setting and Multi-speed setting Terminal signal • 0 to 5VDC across 2-5 • 0 to 10VDC across 2-5 • 4 to 20mADC across 4-5 • Multi-speed selection (Pr...................... The inverter setup software is available as an FR-A500 inverter start-up support software package...........Connector Cable • Personal computer : RJ45 connector : Cable conforming to EIA568 (e..

OPERATION/CONTROL 3. Make sure that the options and peripheral devices are selected and connected correctly.) • Switch power on.2 Power on Before switching power on.) • Wiring check Make sure that the main and control circuits are wired correctly. Power-on is complete when the POWER lamp is lit correctly and the operation panel (FR-DU04) displays correct data. (Refer to page 9.1. 47 . check the following: • Installation check Make sure that the inverter is installed correctly in a proper location. (Refer to page 7.

Description 48 . • Press this key in the setting mode to change the parameter setting consecutively. operating status indications Indication Hz A V MON PU EXT FWD REV Lit to indicate the frequency.1 Names and functions of the operation panel (FR-DU04) FR-DU04 Display LED ×4 digits MON EXT REV PU FWD CONTROL PANEL Hz A V Unit indication ! Hz (frequency) ! A (current) ! V (voltage) Operation status indication Mode key MODE REV FWD Forward rotation key SET STOP RESET Reverse rotation key Set key Up down key Stop and reset key • Key indications Key MODE Description You can select the operation mode or setting mode. Used to give a forward rotation command. Lit in the PU operation mode. key key key SET • Used to increase or decrease the running frequency consecutively. monitor the operation command display. Flickers to indicate forward rotation. Flickers to indicate reverse rotation. FWD key key REV STOP RESET 3 • Unit indications.2 Operation Panel With the operation panel (FR-DU04). Lit to indicate the voltage.2 Operation Panel OPERATION/CONTROL 3. Hold down this key to change the frequency. Lit to indicate the current. 3.3. • Used to reset the inverter when its output is stopped by the protective function activated (major fault). Used to give a reverse rotation command. set parameters. Lit in the external operation mode. you can set the running frequency. and copy parameters. key • Used to stop operation. Lit in the monitor display mode.2. display an error. You can determine the frequency and parameter setting.

OPERATION/CONTROL 3.4 Frequency setting (Note 3) Note: 1.2. Both EXT and PU are lit to indicate PU/external combined operation mode. To frequency monitor MODE "Frequency setting mode "Set frequency change "Set frequency write Flicker FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FWD Press MODE to change the set frequency. "Frequency monitor "Current monitor "Voltage monitor "Alarm monitor Alarm present SET FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD SET SET SET *1 *1 Alarm absent SET *1 SET MODE *2 To 3. 3.2. PU is lit to indicate PU operation.3 Monitoring • Operation command indications in the monitoring EXT is lit to indicate external operation. • The monitor display can also be changed during operation. 3.2.2 Monitor display changed by pressing the "Monitoring mode "Frequency setting mode (Note) "Parameter setting mode MODE key "Help mode CONTROL PANEL "Operation mode FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 MODE CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 MODE CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 MODE FR-DU04 MODE CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MODE Note: The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode.2. To 3.2. 3. Hold down the SET key marked *1 for more than 1.5 seconds to display four errors including the power-on monitor. Hold down the 2. SET most recent one.5 Parameter setting method 49 . Shifts to the parameter setting mode when in the external operation mode.5 seconds to change the current monitor to the key marked *2 for more than 1.4 Frequency setting • Used to set the running frequency in the PU operation mode.

5 seconds when writing the value.5 Parameter setting method • A parameter value may either be set by updating its parameter number or setting the value digit-by-digit using the key. 2) You cannot set any value that is outside the parameter setting range. • To write the setting. "Parameter setting mode FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Most significant digit flickers SET SET Middle digit flickers Least significant digit flickers MODE To 3.2. "1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. stop operation by pressing the key or turning off the forward rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal connected Flicker to the control terminal. Example: To change the Pr. 79. change it and press the SET key 1. refer to page 105. If the value and do not flicker but SET 3 appears. Press the key once.2.) Press the MODE key. press the SET key key. 79. Write a value within the setting range.5 seconds. you did not press the for 1. to choose the parameter setting mode.5 s SET "Setting write MON EXT REV PU FWD When appears STOP RESET 1) When the [FWD] or [REV] indication is lit. and restart the setting from the beginning.OPERATION/CONTROL 3.6 Operation mode ×7 times or ×3 times ×9 times or ×1 times SET 0 to 9 "Current setting SET 0 to 9 "Setting change Press for 1. 50 . 79 "operation mode selection" setting from "2" (external operation mode) to "1" (PU operation mode) (For details of Pr.

E.OPERATION/CONTROL 3.2. 3. " Most recent alarm FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL key._ _0 is displayed. FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V MON EXT REV PU Hz A V MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FWD FWD SET At alarm occurrence "Frequency FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL " Current FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL " Voltage FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL " Energization time FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V MON EXT REV PU Hz A V MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FWD FWD 51 .) When no alarm exists.2.7 Help mode "Alarm history FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL "Alarm history clear "Parameter clear "All clear "User clear "Software version read Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MODE To 3.2.3 Monitoring (1) Alarm history Four past alarms can be displayed with the ("." is appended to the most recent alarm. refer to page 194.7 Help mode Note: If the operation mode cannot be changed.2.6 Operation mode "External operation "PU operation "PU jog operation CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FWD MODE MODE MODE To 3.

900 to Pr. 75. 190 to Pr. 195 values are not initialized. 52 . Flicker FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD FWD SET Cancel (3) Parameter clear Initialises the parameter values to the factory settings. The calibration values are not initialized. 190 to Pr. 180 to Pr.OPERATION/CONTROL (2) Alarm history clear Clears all alarm history. 186. (4) All clear Initialises the parameter values and calibration values to the factory settings. (5) User clear Initialises the user-set parameters. Pr. and Pr. 75. 905 values are not initialized. 195. Pr. The other parameters are initialized to the factory settings. 77 "parameter write disable selection". 180 to Pr. 186. Flicker FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD FWD SET Cancel REMARKS The Pr. 75 value is not initialized. Flicker FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD 3 FWD SET Cancel REMARKS The Pr.) Flicker FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD FWD SET Cancel REMARKS The Pr. and Pr. Pr. (Parameter values are not cleared by setting "1" in Pr.

switch power off once.) By writing the parameter values from the operation panel fitted to a new inverter after inverter replacement. before starting operation. connect the operation panel to the copy destination inverter.rE4)" is displayed. and write the parameter values. always reset the inverter before operation.rE3)" flickers. 3. the monitor display flickers.OPERATION/CONTROL 3. If a data discrepancy occurs during parameter verify. Reference: It is recommended to read the parameter values after completion of parameter setting. Note: 1. "verify error (E.5 s SET (Note 1) Press for 1. "read error (E. After writing the parameters to the inverter of copy destination. "Parameter verify Connect to copy destination inverter. When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-A500 series.5 s SET (Note 1) Press for 1. e.8 Copy mode By using the operation panel (FR-DU04). the corresponding parameter number and "verify error (E. To ignore this display and continue verify. The display returns to the lit-up state on completion of the copy function. If a read error occurs during parameter read. "model error (E. "write error (E. 4.rE2)" is displayed. (When performing auto tuning. always reset the inverter. If a write error occurs during parameter write. 1) Operation procedure After reading the parameter values from the copy source inverter.5 s SET (Note 1) FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FWD "Parameter read "Parameter write After writing the parameters. it is recommended to perform parameter read after completion of auto tuning. 5. press the SET key. 2. parameter setup can be completed. "Parameter setting mode FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FWD Press for 1.rE1)" is displayed.rE3)" are displayed alternately. If the direct frequency setting or jog frequency setting is discrepant. 53 . While the copy function is being activated. the parameter values can be copied to another inverter (only the FR-A500 series).g.2.

3 54 . check the following: • Safety Perform test operation after making sure that safety is ensured if the machine should become out of control.3 Operation OPERATION/CONTROL 3. • Machine Make sure that the machine is free of damage.3. start operation. After that.3.1 Pre-operation checks Before starting operation. • Parameters Set the parameter values to match the operating machine system environment. • Test operation Perform test operation and make sure that the machine operates safely under light load at a low frequency.3 Operation 3.

The motor stops running.OPERATION/CONTROL 3.2 External operation mode (Operation using external input signals) (1) Operation at 60Hz Step Description Power-on → Operation mode check Switch power on and make sure that the operation command indication "EXT" is lit. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 2) Select the external operation mode.3. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration". 3) Switch on the jog signal.00Hz. 180 to Pr. Acceleration → Constant speed Slowly turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) full clockwise. The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually to 0. Stop Turn off the start switch (STF or STR). The operation status indication "FWD" or "REV" flickers. 2 Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and reverse rotation switches are turned on.00Hz.) Start Turn on the start switch (STF or STR). If both switches are turned on during operation. Forward rotation Reverse rotation REV FWD 5 OFF Stop (2) External jog operation Keep the start switch (STF or STR) on to perform operation. (If it is not lit. and switch it off to stop. the motor decelerates to a stop. 186 "input terminal function selection" to assign the terminal used for the jog signal. Keep the start switch (STF or STR) on to perform operation. 1) Set Pr. Use any of Pr. press the MODE key to choose the operation mode and press the key to switch to external operation. Image ON 1 FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Forward rotation Reverse rotation FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD 3 FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD 4 Deceleration Slowly turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) full counterclockwise. 55 . The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to 60.

Start Press the 3 FWD FWD or REV key. MON EXT REV PU Hz A V 3 FWD (2) PU jog operation Hold down the FWD or REV key to perform operation.) 3) Hold down the FWD or REV key to perform operation. check Pr. Then.OPERATION/CONTROL 3. The motor will not start if its setting is lower than the starting frequency. 2) Select the PU jog operation.3.) Running frequency setting Set the running frequency to 60Hz.3 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel (FR-DU04)) (1) Operation at 60Hz While the motor is running. (If the motor remains stopped. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration". (If it is not lit. FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Stop Press the 4 STOP RESET key. key 1) Set Pr. and press the SET key MON EXT REV PU Hz A V to write the frequency. FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL key to change the setting. The monitoring mode is automatically selected and the output frequency is displayed. press the press the MODE (or) key to select the frequency setting mode. press the press the MODE Image ON 1 FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL key to choose the operation mode and MON EXT REV Hz A V PU FWD key to switch to PU operation. repeat the following steps 2 and 3 to vary the speed: Step Description Power-on → Operation mode check Switch power on and make sure that the operation command indication "PU" is lit. 13 "starting frequency". 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. and release it to stop. FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL The motor is decelerated to a stop. (Press the MODE key to choose the operation mode and press the to switch to PU JOG operation.) 56 . 2 First. FWD (or) REV The motor starts running.

57 . Forward rotation Reverse rotation FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL 3 ON MON EXT REV Hz A V PU FWD <Step setting> 5 Stop Turn off the start switch (STF or STR). (Note) Step Power-on Switch power on. Flicker Start Turn on the start switch (STF or STR). If both switches are turned on during operation. 79 "operation mode selection". REV and STOP keys are not accepted. The combined operation mode is selected and the operation status indication "EXT" and "PU" are lit. 250 = "9999") to a stop. set the running frequency to 60Hz. FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Note: The stop key is made valid when the Pr. • Select the frequency setting mode and make step setting. The motor stops running. the motor decelerates (when Pr.OPERATION/CONTROL 3. The operation command indication "REV" or "FWD" is lit. key to change the frequency. 4 Note: Step setting is the way of changing the frequency consecutively by pressing the Hold down the key.4 Combined operation mode (Operation using the external input signals and PU) When entering the start signal from outside the inverter and setting the running frequency from the PU (Pr. 1 Description Image ON 2 Operation mode selection Set "3" in Pr. Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and reverse rotation switches are turned on. 79 = 3) The external frequency setting signals and the PU's FWD.75 "PU stop selection" value is set to any of 14 to 17.3. Running frequency setting Using the parameter unit.

..... RH. Note that they are not terminal names.. you can change the functions of contact input terminals RL. OL... RM..... signal names corresponding to the functions are used in the description of this chapter (except in the wiring examples)....... JOG... Set the necessary parameters according to the load and operation specifications....................... AU.. The inverter is designed to perform simple variable-speed operation with the factory settings of the parameters. Note: The settings in brackets refer to the “EC” version default settings......... FU....2 Parameter Function Details. 58 4.CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS This chapter explains the "parameters" of this product.... SU.......... Always read the instructions before using the equipment..... Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 4 . Chapter 1 Chapter 2 4...... RT...1 Parameter List . Therefore. CS and open collector output terminals RUN..... 66 Chapter 3 Note: By making parameter settings..... IPF.........

4.1 Parameter List
PARAMETERS
4 PARAMETERS 4.1 Parameter List

4.1.1 Parameter list
Function Parameter Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Standard operation functions 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 41 42 43 44 Second functions 45 46 47 48 49 50 Name Torque boost (Note 1) Maximum frequency Minimum frequency Base frequency Multi-speed setting (high speed) Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Multi-speed setting (low speed) Acceleration time Deceleration time Electronic thermal O/L relay DC injection brake operation frequency DC injection brake operation time DC injection brake voltage Starting frequency Load pattern selection (Note 1) Jog frequency Jog acceleration/deceleration time MRS input selection High-speed maximum frequency Base frequency voltage (Note 1) Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency Acceleration/deceleration time increments Stall prevention operation level Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed Multi-speed setting (speed 4) Multi-speed setting (speed 5) Multi-speed setting (speed 6) Multi-speed setting (speed 7) Multi-speed input compensation Acceleration/deceleration pattern Regenerative function selection Frequency jump 1A Frequency jump 1B Frequency jump 2A Frequency jump 2B Frequency jump 3A Frequency jump 3B Speed display Up-to-frequency sensitivity Output frequency detection Output frequency detection for reverse rotation Second acceleration/deceleration time Second deceleration time Second torque boost (Note 1) Second V/F (base frequency) (Note 1) Second stall prevention operation current Second stall prevention operation frequency Second output frequency detection Setting Range 0 to 30% 0 to 120Hz 0 to 120Hz 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s 0 to 500A 0 to 120Hz, 9999 0 to 10 s, 8888 0 to 30% 0 to 60Hz 0 to 5 0 to 400Hz 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s 0,2 120 to 400Hz 0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999 1 to 400Hz 0,1 0 to 200%, 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0, 1 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0,1 to 9998 0 to 100% 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 0 to 30%, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 200% 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz Minimum Setting Increments 0.1% 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.1 s/ 0.01 s 0.1 s/ 0.01 s 0.01A 0.01Hz 0.1 s 0.1% 0.01Hz 1 0.01Hz 0.1 s/ 0.01 s 1 0.01Hz 0.1V 0.01Hz 1 0.1% 0.1% 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 1 1 1 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 1 0.1% 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.1 s/0.01 s 0.1 s/0.01 s 0.1% 0.01Hz 0.1% 0.01 0.01Hz Factory Setting 〈 EC Version〉 6%/4%/3%/2% (Note 9) 120Hz 0Hz 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 60Hz 30Hz 10Hz 5 s/15 s (Note 6) 5 s/15 s (Note 6) Rated output current 3Hz 0.5 s 4%/2% (Note 6) 0.5Hz 0 5Hz 0.5 s 0 120Hz 9999 〈 8888〉 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 0 150% 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 0 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 10% 6Hz 9999 5s 9999 9999 9999 150% 0 30Hz Refer To Page: 66 67 67 68 69 69 69 70 70 71 72 72 72 73 74 75 75 76 67 68 70 70 77 77 69 69 69 69 78 79 80 81 81 81 81 81 81 82 83 83 83 70 70 66 68 84 84 83

Parameter List

Output terminal functions

Basic functions

58

PARAMETERS
Function Display functions Parameter Number 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Minimum Setting Increments 1 1 1 0.01Hz 0.01A 0.1 s 0.1 s Factory Setting 〈 EC Version〉 0 1 1 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 Rated output current 9999 1.0 s Refer To Page: 85 85 85 88 88 89 89

Name DU/PU main display data selection PU level display data selection FM terminal function selection Frequency monitoring reference Current monitoring reference Restart coasting time Restart cushion time

Setting Range 0 to 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 100 0 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21 0 to 400Hz 0 to 500A 0, 0.1 to 5 s, 9999 0 to 60 s

Additional function

Automatic restart functions

59

Remote setting function selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

91

60 61 62 63 64 65 Operation selection functions 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 100 101 102 103 104 105 106

Intelligent mode selection Reference I for intelligent mode Ref. I for intelligent mode accel. Ref. I for intelligent mode decel. Starting frequency for elevator mode Retry selection Stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency Number of retries at alarm occurrence Retry waiting time Retry count display erasure Special regenerative brake duty Applied motor PWM frequency selection 0-5V/0-10V selection Filter time constant Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection Alarm code output selection Parameter write disable selection Reverse rotation prevention selection Operation mode selection Motor capacity Number of motor poles Motor exciting current (Note 4) Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency Speed control gain Motor constant (R1) (Note 4) Motor constant (R2) (Note 4) Motor constant (L1) (Note 4) Motor constant (L2) (Note 4) Motor constant (X) (Note 4) Online auto tuning selection Auto tuning setting/status V/F1 (first frequency) (Note 1) V/F1 (first frequency voltage) (Note 1) V/F2 (second frequency) (Note 1) V/F2 (second frequency voltage) (Note 1) V/F3 (third frequency) (Note 1) V/F3 (third frequency voltage) (Note 1) V/F4 (fourth frequency) (Note 1)

0 to 8 0 to 500A, 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 0 to 10Hz, 9999 0 to 5 0 to 400Hz 0 to 10,101 to 110 0 to 10 s 0 0 to 15%/0 to 30%/0% (Note 10) 0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24 0 to 15 0 to 5, 10 to 15 0 to 8 0 to 3, 14 to 17 0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 0 to 8 0.4 to 55kW, 9999 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 9999 0 to , 9999 0 to 1000V 50 to 120Hz 0 to 200.0% 0 to, 9999 0 to, 9999 0 to, 9999 0 to, 9999 0 to, 9999 0, 1 0, 1, 101 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 1000V 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 1000V 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 1000V 0 to 400Hz, 9999

1 0.01A 0.1% 0.1% 0.01Hz 1 0.01Hz 1 0.1 s  0.1% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01kW 1 1 0.1V 0.01Hz 0.1%

0 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 0 1s 0 0% 0 2 1 1 14 0 0 0 0 9999 9999 9999 200/400V (Note 2) 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 100% 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999

92 94 94 94 94 95 77 95 95 95 80 97 98 99 100 100 102 103 104 105 108 108 109 109 109 108 109 109 109 109 109 116 109 118 118 118 118 118 118 118

Advanced magnetic flux vectorcontrol

1 1 0.01Hz 0.1V 0.01Hz 0.1V 0.01Hz 0.1V 0.01Hz

5-point flexible V/F characteristics

59

Parameter List

4

PARAMETERS
Function 5-point flexible V/F characteristics Parameter Number 107 108 109 110 Third functions 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 Backlash 141 142 143 Minimum Setting Increments 0.1V 0.01Hz 0.1V 0.1 s/0.01 s 0.1 s/0.01 s 0.1% 0.01Hz 0.1% 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 s 1ms 1  0.1% 0.1 s 0.1% 0.1% 0.01% 0.01 s 1 0.1 s 0.1 s 1 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.1 s 0.01Hz 0.1 s Factory Setting 〈 EC Version〉 0 9999 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 150% 0 9999 0 192 1 2 1 0 〈 9999〉 9999 1 10 100% 1s 9999 9999 0% 9999 0 1.0 s 0.5 s 0 9999 1.00Hz 0.5 s 1.00Hz 0.5 s Refer To Page: 118 118 118 70 70 66 68 84 84 83 119 119 119 119 119 119 119 119 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 137 137 137 137 137 79 79 79 79

Parameter List

Name V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) (Note 1) V/F5 (fifth frequency) (Note 1) V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) (Note 1) Third acceleration/deceleration time Third deceleration time Third torque boost (Note 1) Third V/F (base frequency) (Note 1) Third stall prevention operation current Third stall prevention operation frequency Third output frequency detection Station number Communication speed Stop bit length Parity check presence/absence Number of communication retries Communication check time interval Waiting time setting CR LF presence/absence selection PID action selection PID proportional band PID integral time Upper limit Lower limit PID action set point for PU operation PID differential time Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence output terminal selection MC switch-over interlock time Start waiting time Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence Automatic inverter-commercial power supply switch-over frequency Backlash acceleration stopping frequency (Note 7) Backlash acceleration stopping time (Note 7) Backlash deceleration stopping frequency (Note 7) Backlash deceleration stopping time (Note 7)

Setting Range

0 to 1000V 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 1000V 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 0 to 30.0%, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 200% 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 31 48, 96, 192 0, 1 (data length 8) 10, 11 (data length 7) 0, 1, 2 0 to 10, 9999 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0 to 150ms, 9999 0,1,2 10, 11, 20, 21 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 0 to 100% 0.01 to 10.00 s, 9999 0, 1 0 to 100.0 s 0 to 100.0 s 0, 1 0 to 60.00Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz 0 to 360 s 0 to 400Hz 0 to 360 s

Display

Commercial power supplyinverter switch-over

PID control

Communication functions

144

Speed setting switch-over

0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110

1

4

82

145 Additional functions 148 149

Parameter for option (FR-PU04). Stall prevention operation level at 0V input Stall prevention operation level at 10V input 0 to 200% 0 to 200% 0.1% 0.1% 150% 200% 77 77

60

PARAMETERS
Function Current detection Parameter Number 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 Additional function Minimum Setting Increments 0.1% 0.1 s 0.1% 0.01 s 1 1 1 0.1 s 1 Factory Setting 〈 EC Version〉 150% 0 5.0% 0.5 s 1 0 0 0 1 Refer To Page: 141 141 142 142 77 143 143 145 85

Name Output current detection level Output current detection period Zero current detection level Zero current detection period Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation RT signal activated condition Stall prevention operation selection OL signal waiting time AM terminal function selection

Setting Range 0 to 200% 0 to 10 s 0 to 200.0% 0 to 1 s 0, 1 0, 10 0 to 31, 100, 101 0 to 25 s, 9999 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21

Sub functions

160

User group read selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

146

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure

162 163 164 165 168

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection First cushion time for restart First cushion voltage for restart Restart stall prevention operation level

0, 1 0 to 20 s 0 to 100% 0 to 200%

1 0.1 s 0.1% 0.1%

0 0s 0% 150%

89 89 89 89

Additional functions

Parameters set by the manufacturer. Do not set. 169 170 171 Watt-hour meter clear Actual operation hour meter clear User group 1 registration User group 1 deletion User group 2 registration User group 2 deletion RL terminal function selection RM terminal function selection RH terminal function selection RT terminal function selection AU terminal function selection JOG terminal function selection CS terminal function selection RUN terminal function selection SU terminal function selection IPF terminal function selection OL terminal function selection FU terminal function selection A, B, C terminal function selection User's initial value setting 0 0 0 to 999 0 to 999, 9999 0 to 999 0 to 999, 9999 0 to 99, 9999 0 to 99, 9999 0 to 99, 9999 0 to 99, 9999 0 to 99, 9999 0 to 99, 9999 0 to 99, 9999 0 to 199, 9999 0 to 199, 9999 0 to 199, 9999 0 to 199, 9999 0 to 199, 9999 0 to 199, 9999 0 to 999, 9999   0 0 147 147 146 146 146 146 147 147 147 147 147 147 147 150 150 150 150 150 150 152

User functions

Initial monitor

173 174 175 176 180 181 182 183 184 185 186
190

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0 1 2 3 4 99 0

Terminal assignment functions

191 192 193 194 195 199

Additional function

61

Parameter List

4

1% 1 0.1 s/0.01 s 0.01Hz 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 0.59: Time 0-2: Rotation direction 0-400.01Hz 0.01Hz 0. 1 200 Programmed operation 201 153 211 Program set 2 11 to 20 153 221 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 244 Program set 3 21 to 30 Timer setting Multi-speed setting (speed 8) Multi-speed setting (speed 9) Multi-speed setting (speed 10) Multi-speed setting (speed 11) Multi-speed setting (speed 12) Multi-speed setting (speed 13) Multi-speed setting (speed 14) Multi-speed setting (speed 15) Soft-PWM setting Cooling fan operation selection 153 153 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 98 157 Selection Additional Stop selection Power failure stop function Sub functions Multi-speed operation function function function 250 Stop selection 0 to 100 s. 2. 9999: Frequency 0-99. 9999 1 0. 9999 1 to 4000 0 to 1000%. 3 0 to 200% 0 to 200% 0 to 400Hz. 9999 0 to 400Hz.01Hz 0.1 0 to 200% 0 to 200% 0. 1 0. 9999 0 to 400Hz. 9999 0 to 400Hz.1Hz Minute or second  0.01Hz 0. minute 0-2: Rotation direction 0-400.1% 0. 9999 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s. 9999: Frequency 0-99. 3: Hour.01Hz 1 1 Factory Setting 〈 EC Version〉 0 0 9999 0 0 9999 0 0 9999 0 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 1 0 Refer To Page: 153 Parameter List Name Programmed operation minute/second selection Program set 1 1 to 10 Setting Range 0.59: Time 0 to 99.01 s 1 50% 150% 0 3Hz 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 5s 159 159 159 160 160 160 160 160 160 9999 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 0.1Hz Minute or second 1 0. 1.1% 0.01Hz 0.1 s/0.01Hz 1 1% 1 0 50% 100% 9999 16 9999 (Note 5) 9999 (Note 5) 161 162 162 162 162 166 166 Stop on contact High-speed frequency control 62 . 9999 0 to 400Hz 1 0. second 1.01Hz 0.01Hz 0. 9999 0 to 400Hz. 9999: Frequency 0-99. 9999 0 to 400Hz.1% 0. 9999 0. 2: Minute. 9999 0 to 400Hz.01Hz 0.59 0 to 400Hz.59: Time 0-2: Rotation direction 0-400. 9999 0 to 15.PARAMETERS Function Parameter Number Minimum Setting Increments 1 1 0.1 s 9999 158 251 252 253 261 262 263 264 265 266 Output phase failure protection selection Override bias Override gain Power failure stop selection Subtracted frequency at deceleration start Subtraction starting frequency Power-failure deceleration time 1 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Power-failure deceleration time switchover frequency Stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection High-speed setting maximum current Mid-speed setting minimum current Current averaging range Current averaging filter constant Stop-on-contact exciting current lowspeed multiplying factor Stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency 0.1Hz Minute or second 1 0. 1 0 to 20Hz 0 to 120Hz. 9999 0 to 400Hz.01Hz 0. 9999 0.

01Hz 0.5K to 3.01Hz 0   0V 5V 4mA 20mA 0Hz 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 0Hz 60Hz 〈 50Hz〉 119 Calibration functions FM terminal calibration AM terminal calibration Frequency setting voltage bias Frequency setting voltage gain Frequency setting current bias Frequency setting current gain 174 174 176 176 176 176 Additional function 990 991 Buzzer control 0. 80. 1 1 1 181 Parameter for option (FR-PU04). 81 ≠ 9999.3 s 0. The half-tone screened parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation if 0 (factory setting) has been set in Pr.5K)/(2. Can be accessed when Pr.5K)/(11K).00 s Brake sequence functions 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 342 900 901 902 903 904 905 Additional function E PROM write selection 0.4K to 1. 10. 5.01s Factory Setting 〈 EC Version〉 3Hz 130% 0. 80. Pr. 81 ≠ 9999. Pr. 7. 2. Pr. Can be accessed when Pr.3s Refer To Page: 169 169 169 169 169 169 169 169 173 173 Name Brake opening frequency (Note 3) Brake opening current (Note 3) Brake opening current detection time (Note 3) Brake operation time at start (Note 3) Brake operation frequency (Note 3) Brake operation time at stop (Note 3) Deceleration detection function selection (Note 3) Overspeed detection frequency Droop gain Droop filter constant 2 Setting Range 0 to 30Hz 0 to 200% 0 to 2 s 0 to 5 s 0 to 30Hz 0 to 5 s 0. Pr. Can be accessed when Pr. 9999 0 to 100% 0. Indicates the parameter settings which are ignored when the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode is selected. 8.01Hz 0. 0.2K to 7. 1   0 to 10V 0 to 60Hz 1 to 0 to 10V 400Hz 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz 1 to 0 to 20mA 400Hz 1   0. 60 = 7 or 8. 80. 1 0 to 30Hz. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.1% 0. (Note that the Pr. Pr.1 s 1 0. Can be set when Pr. 7. 240 settings cannot be changed during external operation.00 to 1.1% 0. 81 ≠ 9999.5K)/(11K or more). The factory setting of the FR-A540 (400V class) is 400V.75K)/(1. 72 and Pr. 270 = 1 or 3.5K.01Hz 0. 77. 63 Parameter List 4 .01Hz 0. The setting depends on the inverter capacity. Note: 1.3 s 6Hz 0. 3. 29 = 3.1 s 0.) 9. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.PARAMETERS Function Parameter Number Minimum Setting Increments 0. 77 = 801.01Hz 0. Pr.4K.1 s 0.7K)/(5.3 s 0 9999 0% 0. 4. 6.01Hz 0.

Pr. Pr. 150 to Pr. 153 Pr. 42 Pr. 37. Pr. Pr. Pr. 60 Pr. 5. 266 Assignment of input terminal functions Assignment of output terminal functions To increase cooling fan life Motor overheat protection Automatic restart after alarm stop Selection of key beep Inverter reset selection Pr. 128 to Pr. 171 Pr. Pr. 274 Pr. 76 Pr. 233. Pr. 24. Pr. 65. 56. Pr. 139 Pr. 235.1. 143 Pr. 72. 110. 286. 261 to Pr. 0.Pr. Pr. Pr. 7. 100 to Pr. 81 Pr. 231 Pr. 32. Pr. The following list indicates purpose of use and corresponding parameters. 47. Pr. 54. Pr. 28. 73. 73 Pr. Pr. 78 Pr. 11. 31. 135 to Pr. 26. 199 Related to operation Related to application operation Related to monitoring Related to incorrect operation prevention Timing of magnetic brake operation Reversible operation according to analog signal polarity Advanced magnetic flux vector control operation Sub-motor operation To make desired output characteristics (V/F pattern) Operation via communication with personal computer Operation under PID control To make backlash compensation To detect current Programmed operation High-speed frequency control operation To exercise stop-on-contact control To exercise droop control To suppress noise Calibration of frequency meter Adjustment of digital frequency meter Display of speed. 190 to Pr. Pr. 902. 238. 904. Pr. 6. Pr. 200 to Pr. 903. 77 Pr. Pr. Pr. Pr. 195 Pr. Pr. 36 Pr. 239 Pr. 68. 53 Pr. 12 Pr. 7. 81 Pr. 80. 27. Clearing of inverter’s actual operation time Alarm code output selection Function rewrite prevention Reverse rotation prevention To group parameters To set initial values for parameters To decelerate inverter to a stop at power failure Pr. 276 Pr. Pr. 905 Pr. 117 to Pr. 75 Others 64 . 57. Pr. Pr. 158. Pr. 236. Pr. 124. 244 Pr. Pr. Pr. 109 Pr. 134 Pr. 3 Pr. 20. 54. 237.2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. 55. Pr. Pr. 173 to Pr. 232. Pr. 80. 46. 342 Pr. Pr. Pr. 180 to Pr. Pr. 140 to Pr. Pr. Pr. 160. Pr. Pr. 34. Pr. Pr. 56. 901 Pr. Pr.PARAMETERS 4. Pr. 990 Pr. 33. Pr. 1. 4. 15. 240 Pr. Pr 25. 18 Pr. Pr. Pr. 2 Pr. 8. 275. 52. 3. 111. 9 Pr.Pr. 10. Purpose of Use Adjustment of acceleration/deceleration time and pattern Selection of optimum output characteristic for load characteristic Limit of output frequency Operation over 60Hz Adjustment of frequency setting signal and output Adjustment of motor output torque Adjustment of brake operation Multi-speed operation Jog operation Frequency jump operation Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Optimum acceleration/deceleration within continuous rating range To perform commercial switch-over operation power supply-inverter Parameter Numbers Parameter numbers which must be set Pr. 55. Pr. Pr. Pr. 8. etc. 21 Pr. Pr. 16 Pr. 287 Pr. 234. 112. 186 Pr. 35. Pr. 905 Pr. 69 Pr. 113 Pr. 900. 271 to Pr. Pr. Pr. 176 Pr. 900 Pr. Pr. 67. Pr. Pr. Pr. Pr. Pr. 0. Pr. 44. 903. Pr. Pr. 45. 58 Pr.

Used to set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency relative to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5V. 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC) as desired. Set them according to the operation specifications. load. Used to select the specifications of the frequency setting signal entered across terminal 2-5 to perform operation with the voltage input signal. Used to set the thermal characteristics of the electronic overcurrent protection according to the motor used. Used to set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect the motor from overheat. Parameter Number 1 2 7 8 44 45 110 111 9 14 71 73 900 901 902 903 904 905 Name Maximum frequency Minimum frequency Acceleration time Deceleration time Second acceleration/deceleration time Second deceleration time Third acceleration/deceleration time Third deceleration time Electronic thermal O/L relay Load pattern selection Applied motor 0-5V/0-10V selection FM terminal calibration AM terminal calibration Frequency setting voltage bias Frequency setting voltage gain Frequency setting current bias Frequency setting current gain Application Used to set the maximum and minimum output frequencies.3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user We recommend the following parameters to be set by the user.1. Used to set the acceleration and deceleration times. etc.PARAMETERS 4. Used to calibrate the meters connected across terminals FM-SD and AM-5. Used to select the optimum output characteristics which match the application and load characteristics. 4 65 .

# A large setting will cause the motor to overheat. 23. When the Pr. change the setting of this parameter as follows: 0.. 46. 81 have been set to select the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode. 4%. 5.7K 0 5. 2 to 8.0 Pr. 3 "base frequency" Pr. 112) Pr. for example.5K to 3.5K 11K or more 46 112 Factory Setting 6% 4% 3% 2% 9999 9999 Setting Range Remarks 100% Output voltage Pr. The guideline for maximum value is about 10%. (Note 5) Note: 1. 71 setting is changed from [general-purpose motor selection value (0.1 Torque boost (Pr.2% 2.5K. 71 "applied motor" Pr.2 Parameter Function Details 4. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 3. 2 to 8. it is automatically changed when the Pr. 13 to 18)]. 0 setting is changed to 2% automatically when the Pr. The RX (X9) signal acts the second (third) function select signal and the other second (third) functions are also made valid.. Refer to page 147 for Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. A too large setting may result in an overcurrent trip. 20. 186 (input terminal function selection). 0.46 Setting range Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low frequency range to improve motor torque reduction in the low speed range.2. Pr.75K 1.71 setting is changed: (1) When Pr. 4. 46 "second torque boost" is made valid when the RT signal turns on. 0 setting is either of the following values for 5. 112 "third torque boost" Related parameters Pr. " Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque. 0 "torque boost" Pr.5K and 7.112 0 Output frequency (Hz) Base frequency 0 to 30% 0 to 30%.5K or more. 0. Parameter Number 0. 13 to 18)] to [general-purpose motor selection value (0. 46 "second torque boost" Pr.. 24)] to [constant-torque motor selection value (1. 180 to Pr. set the 0Hz voltage in %. 9999 0 to 30%.5K. 186 to assign the terminal used for X9 signal input. 0 setting is 2% The Pr.2 Parameter Function Details PARAMETERS 4. 180 to Pr.5K to 3. 71 setting is changed from [constant-torque motor selection value (1.75K. 0 setting is changed to 3% (factory setting) automatically when the Pr. This parameter setting is ignored when Pr.4.. Pr.7k. " You can select any of the three different starting torque boosts by terminal switching. 80 and Pr. 24)]. 0 setting is 3% (factory setting) The Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage" Pr. Pr. 20.4K. (2) When Pr. 0. Increase the setting when the inverter-to-motor distance is long or motor torque in the low-speed range is insufficient. 66 . # Pr. When using a constant-torque motor. Use any of Pr. 7. 5. 23. 112 "third torque boost" is made valid when the X9 signal turns on.6%. 9999  9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid <Setting> # Assuming that the base frequency voltage is 100%.4K. 180 to Pr. 1.

18.) • Use Pr. note that the motor will run at the set frequency by merely switching the start signal on.PARAMETERS 4. " Can be used to set the upper and lower limits of motor speed. 2. 18 value to the frequency in Pr. Also. Pr.1 Pr. (When the Pr. Parameter Number 1 2 18 Factory Setting 120Hz 0Hz 120Hz Setting Range 0 to 120Hz 0 to 120Hz 120 to 400Hz Output frequency (Hz) Pr. 13 "starting frequency" value. Pr.10V (20mA) <Setting> • Use Pr. set the upper limit of the output frequency in Pr.2 0 (4mA) Frequency setting 5. 18 value is set. 1. 1 automatically changes to the frequency in Pr. Note: When the frequency setting analog signal is used to run the motor beyond 60Hz. 2 "minimum frequency" Pr.18 Pr. If Pr. the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency. 18 "high-speed maximum frequency" Related parameters Pr. 1 to set the upper limit of the output frequency. 1 or Pr.2 Output frequency range (Pr. 905 values. without entering the command frequency. 18 is only changed. CAUTION When the Pr. If the frequency of the frequency command entered is higher than the setting. 4 67 . setting the Pr. 18) Pr. 1 value automatically changes the Pr. 1.2. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain" Used to clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency. 1 "maximum frequency" Pr. 2 to set the lower limit of the output frequency. Pr. 18. Used for high-speed operation at or over 120Hz. the motor cannot run beyond 60Hz. To perform operation over 120Hz. 903 and Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain" Pr. 13 "starting frequency" Pr. change the Pr.

113 <Setting> • Use Pr. 83 are made valid. 71. Pr. Note: 1. When "2" (5-point flexible V/F characteristics) is set in Pr. 8888. 113 and Pr. 180 to Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. Pr. 14 "load pattern selection" Pr. 9999 0 to 400Hz. frequency) to the motor rating. generally set the rated motor frequency. Pr. 47 "second V/F (base frequency) Pr. Parameter Number 3 19 47 113 Factory Setting 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 9999 〈8888〉 9999 9999 Output voltage Setting Range 0 to 400Hz 0 to 1000V. 47 and Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage. Pr. 9999 0 to 400Hz.47 Pr. 47.19 Output frequency (Hz) Pr. However. 3. set Pr. 47 and Pr. Pr.3 Pr. " Always set this frequency to "50Hz" if the frequency indicated in the motor rating plate is "50Hz" only. 4.g. the voltage may become too low and torque less. set the base frequency to the same value as the power supply frequency. 19. • Pr. 47. 83 "rated motor voltage" Pr. 3. Especially. 186 to assign the terminal used for X9 signal input. 9999 Remarks 8888: 95% of power supply voltage 9999: Same as power supply voltage 9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid Pr. and Pr. 81. Pr. 3. 19 are made invalid and Pr. Pr. 14 "load pattern selection" = 1. 3 "base frequency" to 60Hz. 113 settings are made invalid. Pr. Use any of Pr. When the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode has been selected using Pr. resulting an overload trip. the Pr. 68 . 3. The RT (X9) signal acts the second (third) function select signal and the other second (third) functions are also made valid. 84 and Pr. 180 to Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 113 is made valid for the S-shaped inflection pattern point of Pr. 113) Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection). 71 "applied motor" Pr. When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor.2. " When running a standard motor. 2. rated motor voltage). 29. When running the motor using the commercial power supply-inverter switch-over. If the setting remains unchanged from "60Hz". base frequency voltage (Pr. 19 to set the base voltage (e. Refer to page 147 for Pr. 47 or Pr.3 Base frequency. 180 to Pr. 47 "second V/F (base frequency)" is made valid when the RT signal turns on. 84 "rated motor frequency" Pr. 3 "base frequency" Pr. Three different base frequencies can be set and the required frequency can be selected from among them. 3. 113 "third V/F (base frequency)" is made valid when the X9 signal turns on.PARAMETERS 4. care must be taken when Pr. 113 to set the base frequency (rated motor frequency). 80 and Pr. Pr. (Note 4) • Use Pr. 113 "third V/F (base frequency) Related parameters Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage" Pr.

(In this case.) • Use any of Pr. RL or REX signal). 180 to Pr. 186. Pr. " By using these functions with jog frequency (Pr.4 Multi-speed operation (Pr. press the WRITE key. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. • Each speed (frequency) can be set as desired between 0 and 400Hz during inverter operation. the other functions may be affected.2. 232 to Pr. 4 to Pr. 239) Pr. 3. 239 "multi-speed setting (speeds 8 to 15)" Related parameters Pr. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode. RM. 180 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 5. 69 . 2 "minimum frequency" Pr. 15). 4. After the required multi-speed setting parameter has been read. priority is given to the frequency setting of the lower signal. the setting can be changed by pressing the key. press the SET key to store the set frequency. 24 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Used to preset the running speeds in parameters and switch between them using terminals. 28 "multi-speed input compensation" Pr. " Valid in the external operation mode or PU/external combined operation mode (Pr. 24 to Pr. 5 "multi -speed setting (middle speed)" Pr. 2). 6. 232 to Pr. 9999 0 to 400Hz. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern" Pr. When using the FR-PU04 (option). When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. Parameter Number 4 5 6 24 to 27 232 to 239 Factory Setting 60Hz 30Hz 10Hz 9999 9999 Output frequency (Hz) Speed 1 (high speed) Speed 5 Speed 2 (middle speed) Speed 6 Speed 4 Speed 3 (low speed) Speed 7 Setting Range 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the REX signal. 6. 79 "operation mode selection" Pr. 15 "jog frequency" Pr. 9999 Remarks 9999: Not selected 9999: Not selected Output frequency (Hz) Speed 10 Speed 11 Speed 9 Speed 8 Speed 12 Speed 13 Speed 14 Speed 15 Time ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Time ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON RH RM RL RH RM RL REX ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 4 <Setting> • Set the running frequencies in the corresponding parameters. " Any speed can be selected by switching on-off the contact signal (RH. For 3-speed setting. 27 "multi-speed setting (speeds 4 to 7)" Pr. 180 to Pr. Note: 1. up to 18 speeds can be set. if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected. 79 = 3 or 4). 232 to Pr. The parameter values can be changed during operation. 239 settings have no priority between them. 1 "maximum frequency" Pr.27. when you release the key. The multi-speed settings override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5. Pr. 6 "multi -speed setting (low speed)" Pr. 24 to Pr. maximum frequency (Pr. 4-5).PARAMETERS 4. 1) and minimum frequency (Pr. 2. Pr. 4 "multi-speed setting (high speed)" Pr.

111 "third deceleration time" Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time. 111 to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from the frequency set in Pr.110 Pr.5K or less 11K or more Factory Setting 5s 15 s 5s 15 s 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 0 5s 9999 9999 9999 Setting Range 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s 1 to 400Hz 0. Pr. 7. Pr... 44.. 0 to 3600s (minimum setting increments: 0. 44 and Pr. and Pr. 21. 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s.. 110 and Pr.PARAMETERS 4... Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease..20 Running frequency Related Relatedparameters parameters Pr.. • Use any of Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on.5K or less 11K or more 7. Pr. 180 to Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 20 from 0Hz.2. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting increments: Set value "0" (factory setting) . • When "9999" is set in Pr... 45 and Pr. • Set "9999" in Pr. 110 "third acceleration/deceleration time" Pr..5 Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s.. 110)..45 Pr. 44. 45.. 180 to Pr. 70 . 110 and Pr.. 44 and Pr.. 111 are valid. 7. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" Pr.... Pr. 110. 20. 111 to make the deceleration time equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 8.7 Deceleration Pr.01s) • Use Pr.111 <Setting> • Use Pr. 8. • Pr. Pr. Pr. 45 and Pr.. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" Pr... 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments" Pr. Parameter Number 7 8 7.... Pr. 111 are valid when the X9 signal is on.. 110 to set the acceleration time required to reach the frequency set in Pr. • Use Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern" Pr. the function is made invalid.. Pr.. When both RT and X9 are on.8 time Pr.. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X9 signal..5K or less 11K or more 7.. 3 "base frequency" Pr. 1: 0 to 360 s 44 45 110 111 9999: Acceleration time = deceleration time 9999: Function invalid 9999: Acceleration time = deceleration time Time Acceleration Pr..1s) Set value "1" .5K or less 11K or more 7. 9999 Output frequency (Hz) Pr. 20. 0 to 360s (minimum setting increments: 0.. 111) Pr.. 45 "second deceleration time" Pr.5K or less 11K or more 20 21 7. 110. 1 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s. 8 "deceleration time" Pr..5K or less 11K or more 7..44 time Pr.. 186 (input terminal function selection) Remarks 0: 0 to 3600 s... Pr. Pr.. Pr.

110 or Pr. At this time. use an external thermal relay. 71 "applied motor" Set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect the motor from overheat. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics. Then. 3. • Acceleration/deceleration time calculation expression when the set frequency is the base frequency or higher 4 T 5 2 t = 9 × (Pr. 9. set 120Hz or less in Pr. To adjust the gains. 7.6 Electronic overcurrent protection (Pr. 3. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay" Related parameter Pr. 71 to select the 100% continuous torque characteristic in the low speed range.) • Setting of "0" makes the electronic overcurrent protection (motor protective function) invalid.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current. 3. set "1" or any of "13" to "18" in Pr. the settings of calibration functions Pr.04 seconds. A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. adjust calibration functions Pr. When the RT (X9) signal is on.) • When Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor is used. Parameter Number 9 Factory Setting Rated output current* Setting Range 0 to 500A 4 *0. <Setting> • Set the rated current [A] of the motor. Use an external thermal relay. In this case. the protective characteristics of the electronic overcurrent protection will be deteriorated. 8. 905 (frequency setting signal gains) remain unchanged. Pr. 9) Pr. the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system's J (inertia moment) and motor torque.3)2 × f + 9 T T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting(s) f: Set frequency (Hz) • Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the base frequency of 60Hz (0Hz to set frequency) Frequency setting (Hz) Acceleration/ decelerationtime (s) 5 15 60 5 15 120 12 35 200 27 82 400 102 305 2. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 79). 2. (Normally set the rated current value at 50Hz if the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated current. 20. the other second (third) functions such as second (third) torque boost are also selected. at low speed.PARAMETERS Note: 1. When a difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small. 905.2. 45. set the rated motor current in Pr. they cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. the set time is a period required to reach the base frequency set in Pr. 111 is "0". Pr. the acceleration/deceleration time is 0. 71 . 903 and Pr. When two or more motors are connected to the inverter. 44. including reduced motor cooling capability. Pr. 4. 903 and Pr. If the shortest acceleration/deceleration time is set. Install an external thermal relay to each motor. Pr. 5. When the setting of Pr. If the Pr. 4.4K and 0. (The inverter's output transistor protective function is valid. Note: 1. 20 setting is changed.

71 setting is changed: (1) When Pr.5K or more. 8888 0 to 30% Pr. (2) When Pr. 71 setting is changed from [constant-torque motor selection value (1. 12. DC dynamic brake operation cannot be performed. • Use any of Pr. • Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage of the power supply voltage. 13 to 18)]. No holding torque is provided. 12 setting is changed to 2% automatically when the Pr.5K and 7. 8888: Operated when X13 signal switches on. 20. 71 setting is changed from [general-purpose motor selection value (0. 12 setting as follows: 3. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X13 signal.. Pr. etc. Install a mechanical brake. 10. 10 to set the frequency at which the DC dynamic brake application is started. 11 to set the period during when the brake is operated. • Use Pr.2% (Note 1) Note: 1. CAUTION For orientation operation. 12 "DC injection brake voltage" By setting the stopping DC dynamic brake voltage (torque).5 s 4% 2% 0 to 10 s..10 Operation frequency Time DC dynamic brake voltage Pr.2.12 Operation voltage Time Pr.5K. Pr. 71 "applied motor" 11 12 7. 12 setting is 2% The Pr. 12) Pr.. By setting “8888” in Pr.7K or less. By setting "9999" in Pr. 11 "DC injection brake operation time" Pr. 180 to Pr. 12 setting is either of the following values for 5. 2 to 8. do not set "0" or "8888" in Pr. The motor may not be stopped in the correct position. 11. 5. 20. 10. 12 setting is changed to 4% (factory setting) automatically when the Pr. 9999 Remarks 9999: Operated at or below Pr. change the Pr. 12 setting is 4% (factory setting) The Pr.4%.11 Operation time <Setting> • Use Pr. 11 and "0" in Pr. 24)]. 13 to 18)] to [general-purpose motor selection value (0. operation time and operation starting frequency. 23. 2.5K or less 11K or more 0.PARAMETERS 4. it is automatically changed when the Pr. or the timing of operating the DC dynamic brake to stop the motor is adjusted according to the load. When the Pr. 13 value.7 DC injection brake (Pr.. the motor is decelerated to the frequency set in Pr. • When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant-torque motor). 12 = "0". 24)] to [constant-torque motor selection value (1. Parameter Number 10 Factory Setting 3Hz Setting Range 0 to 120Hz. Output frequency (Hz) Related parameters Pr. 11 = "0" or Pr. 13 "starting frequency" Pr. 72 . the DC dynamic brake is operated while the X13 signal is on. 11. 2 to 8. 10 "DC injection brake operation frequency" Pr. the stopping accuracy of positioning operation. 23. When Pr. 13 and braked.

13 setting is less than the Pr. 13 "starting frequency". For example. 13) Pr. Parameter Number 13 Factory Setting 0. when 5Hz is set in Pr. " Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is switched on.5Hz Setting Range 0 to 60Hz Output frequency (Hz) 60 Setting range Pr. merely turning on the start signal will start the motor running at the set frequency if the command frequency is not input. CAUTION Note that when the Pr.13 0 Frequency setting signal (V) Forward rotation ON Time Note: The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 4 73 . the motor will start running when the frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz. 13. 2 value. 13 "starting frequency" Related parameters Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" You can set the starting frequency between 0 and 60Hz.PARAMETERS 4.8 Starting frequency (Pr.2.

9 Load pattern selection (Pr. 0 setting Boost for forward rotation 0% Boost for reverse rotation. 0 setting 100% Output voltage 100% Output voltage 100% Output voltage Forward rotation 100% Output voltage Reverse rotation Pr. 81 have been set to select the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode...0 Forward rotation Base frequency Output frequency (Hz) Setting 0 1 2 3 4 For constanttorque lift RT signal 5 RT signal Output Characteristics For constant-torque load For variable-torque load Boost for reverse rotation 0% Boost for forward rotation..For constant-torque load (same as in setting = 0) OFF. 74 . Use any of Pr.. X17 signal may be used instead of the RT signal. conveyor. boost for forward rotation 0% (same as in setting = 3) Application Conveyor.14=0 For constant-torque loads (e. 2. 3.0% Boost for reverse rotation. cart.2. This parameter setting is ignored when Pr...Pr. Fan.For constant-torque lift. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X17 signal. 186 (input terminal function selection) You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application and load characteristics.. pump) Pr. Parameter Number 14 Pr.Pr...For constant-torque load (same as in setting = 0) OFF... 60 "intelligent mode selection". " The output voltage changes when "4" (energy-saving mode) is set in Pr. 0 "torque boost" Pr.. boost for reverse rotation 0% (same as in setting = 2) ON... 80 and Pr..PARAMETERS 4..14=2 For lift Boost for forward rotation. 60 "intelligent mode selection" Pr.14=3 For lift Boost for forward rotation. cart) Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 to 5 Pr. 14) Pr. When the setting is 4 or 5.g. 0 setting Boost for reverse rotation. 80 "motor capacity" Pr.0 Base frequency Output frequency (Hz) Base frequency Output frequency (Hz) Reverse rotation Base frequency Output frequency (Hz) Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. etc.. 0 setting ON. When the RT signal is on. 180 to Pr. 180 to Pr. 14 "load pattern selection" Related parameters Pr. pump For lift load Load pattern selection switching function using RT signal Note: 1.Pr.0% Pr..14=1 For variable-torque loads (Fan. the other second functions such as second acceleration/deceleration time and second torque boost are also selected..Pr.For constant-torque lift..

21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments" Pr. the set time is a period of time required to reach Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" Pr.15 "jog frequency" should be equal to or greater than the Pr. 3. " Set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation Parameter Number 15 16 Factory Setting 5Hz 0. 3 "base frequency". 79 "operation mode selection" Pr. The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog operation. The value set in Pr.10 Jog operation (Pr.16 Time JOG signal Forward rotation STF Reverse rotation STR ON ON ON Note: 1.2. jog operation can be started and stopped by the start signal (STF.5 s Setting Range 0 to 400Hz 0 to 3600 s 0 to 360 s Remarks When Pr. In the PU operation mode. 2. 21 = 0 When Pr. after selection of the jog operation function using the input terminal function selection. 4 75 . 21 = 1 Output frequency (Hz) Pr. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A. jog operation can also be performed using the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04). 16) Pr.20 Jog frequency Pr. 15. 186 (input terminal function selection) In the external operation mode.13 "starting frequency" setting. 15 "jog frequency" Pr. Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time" Related parameters Pr.15 setting range Forward rotation Reverse rotation Pr.PARAMETERS 4. 180 to Pr. STR) with the jog signal ON.

Pr. Pr. Pr.2. 3. 17 "MRS input selection" Used to select the logic of the MRS signal. 19 $ Refer to Pr. 8. 2 <Setting> Pr. Parameter Number 17 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0. 21 $ Refer to Pr. Pr. 17 Setting 0 2 Specifications of MRS Signal Normally open input Normally closed input (N/C contact input specifications) <Wiring example> • For sink logic Setting 0 (Factory setting) Inverter Output stop MRS SD Output stop MRS SD Setting 2 Inverter Pr.11 MRS input selection (Pr.PARAMETERS 4. 7. Pr. 1. When the MRS signal switches on. 20. 76 . 17) Pr. 2. the inverter shuts off the output. 18 $ Refer to Pr.

66 and 100% in Pr. Pr.149 Pr. 154 is factory-set not to reduce the output voltage. 149 "stall prevention operation level at 10V input" Pr.2. 9999 0 to 400Hz 0 to 200% 0 to 200% 0. 66. set 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 in Pr. 23.66=60Hz) Stall prevention operation level (%) 150 Related parameters Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation" " Set the output current level at which the output frequency will be adjusted to prevent the inverter from stopping due to overcurrent etc. 115 "third stall prevention operation frequency" Pr.12 Stall prevention (Pr. " For high-speed operation at or over the more base frequency. 48 "second stall prevention operation current" Pr. the current in the locked motor state is smaller than the rated output current of the inverter and the inverter does not result in an alarm (protective function is not activated) if the motor is at a stop.22=150%. To improve this and activate the alarm. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" Pr. To improve the operation characteristics of the motor in such a case. acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not increase. 22 "stall prevention operation level" Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (%) Pr. Pr. Pr. the stall prevention level in the high-frequency range can be reduced. 156 "stall prevention operation selection" Factory Setting 150% 9999 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 150% 200% 1 Setting Range 0 to 200%. This is effective for operation of a centrifugal separator up to the high-speed range. 9999 0 to 200%. 22. 149. Parameter Number 22 23 66 148 149 154 Pr. 23. Normally. 148. 22 (Bias) (Gain) 0: Output voltage reduced 1: Output voltage not reduced 4 Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency" Pr. 23 = 9999 Setting example (Pr. " For operation in the high-frequency range.148 0% 0V 10(5)V Input voltage (V) (across frequency setting terminals 1-5) 77 . 154) Pr. Pr. 1 Remarks 9999: Analog variable 9999: Constant according to Pr. Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation current" Pr. 148 "stall prevention operation level at 0V input" Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed" Pr. Pr. Pr. the stall prevention level can be reduced.PARAMETERS 4. Pr.23=100%.23 Reduction ratio compensation factor (%) 90 60 45 30 22. 49 "second stall prevention operation frequency" Pr. The setting of reducing the output voltage further decreases the probability of overcurrent trip occurrence.5 0 60 100 200 300 400 Pr. " In order to provide torque during stall prevention. " The stall prevention operation level can be varied by entering the analog signal into terminal 1.66 Stall prevention operation level (%) 400Hz Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz) (170%) (130%) Pr.

terminal 1 is exclusively used for setting the stall prevention operation level. 6. 154 to reduce the output voltage during stall prevention operation. 27 $ Refer to Pr. Parameter Number 28 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0.13 Multi-speed input compensation (Pr. 2. 22 to disable the stall prevention operation. 66 and the reduction ratio compensation factor in Pr. B = 400Hz By setting "9999" (factory setting) in Pr. set the stall prevention operation level.22(%) where.22-B ] × [ 100 ] Pr.22-A Pr. torque generated will reduce. 73. increasing the deceleration distance. 28) Pr. The auxiliary input and override functions are not activated. Note: 1.23-100 Stall prevention operation level (%) = A + B × [ Pr.) Use Pr.PARAMETERS <Setting> • In Pr. 1: Compensated Note: 1. the compensation signal is entered into terminal 2. 22. When any of "4. Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz. Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. 23. (Override functions) 78 . Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration time. 148 and Pr. 2. set the reduction starting frequency in Pr. Otherwise. (Use Pr. 24 to Pr. torque will not be developed. 73 to select between 10V and 5V. 59 "remote setting function selection" Pr. Normally set it to 150% (factory setting). the speeds (frequencies) of multi-speed settings or the speed setting made by remote setting function can be compensated for. A = output frequency (Hz) . When Pr. do not set the Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation" Related parameters Pr.66 (Hz) × Pr. 5. If such setting is made. 22 = "9999". the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr. 73 to select the compensation input voltage between 0 to ±5V and 0 to ±10V. Set "0" in Pr. 4. When fast-response current limit is set in Pr.2. 149 to adjust the gain and bias of the analog signal. 156 (factory setting). Use Pr. Stall prevention operation during constant speed may change the speed suddenly.66 (Hz) × Pr. Test operation must be performed. 23.22 (%) Pr. 22 value to 170% or higher. Calculation expression for stall prevention operation level Pr. Set "9999" in Pr. Set "0" in Pr. • To reduce the stall prevention operation level in the high-frequency range. 14 and 15" is set in Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" By entering a compensation signal into the frequency setting auxiliary input terminal 1 (Note 2). • • • • CAUTION Do not set a too small value as the stall prevention operation current. 4 to Pr. 22 to vary the stall prevention operation level using the analog signal (0-5V/0-10V) entered to the frequency setting auxiliary input terminal [1]. 1 Remarks 0: Not compensated.

4 1 2 3 Note: 1. Use Pr. 29 = 3. Also. and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time according to the reduction in motor torque in the 60Hz or higher constant-output operation range. etc. not the "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" in Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" Pr. 111 "third deceleration time" Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern. 29.141 Pr. Parameter Number 29 140 141 142 143 Set value 0 [Linear acceleration/deceleration] Output frequency (Hz) Factory Setting 0 1. Valid when Pr. 142 "backlash deceleration stopping frequency" Pr.00Hz 0. 1. 2. 143 to set the stopping times and stopping frequencies in accordance with the above diagrams. refer to Pr. 143 is accessible when "3" is set in Pr. set the time required to reach the "base frequency" in Pr. 29 Setting 0 Function Linear acceleration/ deceleration S-shaped acceleration/ deceleration A (Note 1) S-shaped acceleration/ deceleration B Backlash compensation (Note 2. The acceleration/deceleration time is increased by the stopping time. Set value 2 [S-shaped acceleration/deceleration B] Output frequency (Hz) f1 Output frequency (Hz) Set value 3 [Backlash compensation function] Set value 1 [S-shaped acceleration/deceleration A] Output frequency (Hz) f2 Pr. Valid when Pr. etc. 8. This function stops the speed change temporarily during acceleration/deceleration. In this acceleration/deceleration pattern.2. 143 "backlash deceleration stopping time" Related parameters Pr. 140 "backlash acceleration stopping frequency" Pr. 29 = 3. 29 = 3. easing an acceleration/deceleration shock. 110 "third acceleration/ deceleration time" Pr.142 fb Time f2 Time f1 t1 Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 3) Description Linear acceleration/deceleration is made up/down to the preset frequency (factory setting). Pr. 29 = 3. 44 "second acceleration/ deceleration time" Pr. 143) Pr. fb (base frequency) is always the inflection point of an S shape. 2.5 s 1. Backlash compensation for reduction gear. 140 to Pr. 140 to Pr. etc. Valid when Pr. 140 to Pr.00Hz 0.140 Time t2 Pr. For details. 79 . 7 and Pr. This pattern has an effect on the prevention of cargo collapse.PARAMETERS 4. 141 "backlash acceleration stopping time" Pr. Pr. 3 "base frequency" Pr.14 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. This setting provides S-shaped acceleration/deceleration from f2 (current frequency) to f1 (target frequency). For machine tool spindles This setting is used when it is necessary to make acceleration/deceleration in a short time up to the 60Hz or higher speed range. 20. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern" Pr. you can suspend acceleration/deceleration at set frequencies and for the time period set in the parameters. 3. 29. 3 0 to 400Hz 0 to 360 s 0 to 400Hz 0 to 360 s Remarks 3: Backlash compensation Valid when Pr.5 s Setting Range 0. 3. reducing a shock generated when a reduction gear backlash is eliminated suddenly. Prevention of cargo collapse on conveyor. For the acceleration/deceleration time. 45 "second deceleration time" Pr.143 Time <Setting> Pr.

3% *FR-A520-5... * Set "10" and "11" in any of Pr..5K 2. 182 "RH terminal function selection" Pr. 70... brake unit. 30. Parameter Number 30 70 Factory Setting 0 0% Setting Range 0 to 2 0 to 15% 0 to 30% 0% Remarks 0... 70 "special regenerative brake duty" Related parameters Pr. Enter the RDY signal of the high power factor converter. 186 "CS terminal function selection" " When making frequent starts/stops with a 7. • X11: FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection signal) When the computer link inboard option (FR-A5NR) is used and the setting is made to hold the preinstantaneous power failure mode.... Pr. use this signal to hold that mode.5K to 7. The Pr. 30.... 185 "JOG terminal function selection" Pr. • Set "10%" in Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection" Pr. or continue the regenerative mode. 3) The Pr. Enter the instantaneous power failure detection signal of the high power factor converter. " Use the optional "high power factor converter (FR-HC)" to reduce harmonics. 30..2% *FR-A540-0. 186 to allocate the terminals used to input the X10 and X11 signals.... use the optional "high-duty brake resistor" (FR-ABR) to increase the regenerative brake duty. (3) When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) 1) Set "2" in Pr.....2. 180 to Pr.7K . At this time. use the inverter operation enable signal to shut off the inverter output... 183 "RT terminal function selection" Pr.4K to 1.. power return converter • Set "0" in Pr. 70 setting is made invalid.4K to 7..15 Regenerative brake duty (Pr.5K ... 30.4K to 3..2K to 7... • X10: FR-HC connection (inverter operation enable signal) (Note 3) To make protective coordination with the high power factor converter (FR-HC). 70 setting is made invalid.. 30 "regenerative function selection" Pr.. 180 to Pr.. the regenerative brake duty is as follows: *FR-A520-0.. 184 "AU terminal function selection" Pr.5K or less inverter. 186 to assign the following signals to the contact input terminals. 2) Use any of Pr.PARAMETERS 4.... 70) Pr.2% (2) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) • Set "1" in Pr. improve the power factor.5K 11K or more <Setting> (1) When using the built-in brake resistor. 80 ..5K ..... 181 "RM terminal function selection" Pr.

33:35Hz Pr. 34 and 30Hz in Pr. the running frequency within the set area is valid. 4. 180 to Pr. Pr. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 33 and Pr. Up to three areas may be set. 9999 0 to 400Hz. 70 setting is invalid for the inverter of 11K or more. WARNING The Pr. 186.31 4 <Setting> • To fix the frequency at 30Hz between Pr.34:30Hz Note: 1. 32 "frequency jump 1B" Pr. 34. 70 "regenerative brake duty" indicates the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation. Parameter Number 31 32 33 34 35 36 Factory Setting 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 Setting Range 0 to 400Hz.32 Pr. these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. 9999 0 to 400Hz. Otherwise. Pr. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. During acceleration/deceleration.34:35Hz Pr. The Pr. 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this frequency. 9999 0 to 400Hz. 2.16 Frequency jump (Pr. 9999 Remarks 9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid Frequency jump Running frequency (Hz) Pr.34 Pr.2. Its setting should not be higher than the setting of the brake resistor used. 9999 0 to 400Hz. set 35Hz in Pr.33:30Hz Pr. set 35Hz in Pr. 3. 4. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. Otherwise. • To jump to 35Hz between 30 and 35Hz. ! The value set to 1A. 31 to Pr. with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area. 36) Pr. 36 "frequency jump 3B" ! When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system.33 Pr. 81 . The X10 signal may be replaced by the MRS signal. 70 setting must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used.PARAMETERS Note: 1. the brake resistor can overheat. 34 "frequency jump 2B" Pr.35 Pr. the other functions may be affected. the brake resistor can overheat.36 Pr. 33. 34 (30Hz and 35Hz). 35 "frequency jump 3A" Pr. 31 "frequency jump 1A" Pr. 33 "frequency jump 2A" Pr. 9999 0 to 400Hz.

81 "number of motor poles" The units of the running speed monitor display of the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04). 37. 2. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" Pr. refer to Pr. 144. 10. 37 and "0" in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation. 52 and Pr. • When values have been set in both Pr. 110) in Pr. damaging the machine. To change the PU main monitor (PU main display) or PU level meter (PU level display). the motor might run at extremely high speed. 6. 37 and Pr. 37 "speed display" Pr. 6. 144 = 102 to 110 > Pr. 144. set the number of motor poles (2. In the V/F control mode. CAUTION Make sure that the running speed and number of poles set are correct. During PLG feedback control. • To display the motor speed. Otherwise. 8. 37 Setting 0 0 1 to 9998 0 1 to 9998 1 to 9998 Pr. When the running speed display has been selected with "0" set in Pr.2. 37 = 1 to 9998 > Pr. 53. 102. Parameter Number 37 144 Factory Setting 0 4 Setting Range 0. this display shows the calculated speed (estimated value found by motor slippage calculation). 10) or the number of motor poles plus 100 (102. When the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode has been selected in Pr. 8. 3. 2. 4. the data displayed is the same as in advanced magnetic flux vector control. Pr. 5.PARAMETERS 4. 144) Pr. 144 settings as indicated below: Running Speed Monitor Display Speed of 4-pole motor (r/min) Motor speed (r/min) Machine speed r/min Hz r/min Parameter Setting Unit Running Speed Setting Unit Hz Pr. the running speed setting in the PU operation mode. the parameter setting unit and the running speed setting unit in the PU operation mode depend on the combination of the Pr. 144 = 2 to 10 Hence. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. the motor speed is converted from the output frequency and does not match the actual speed. 4. 104. 108. 1 to 9998 0. the half-tone screened settings in the following list become valid. priority is as follows: Pr. the monitor display shows the speed reference for a 4-pole motor (1800r/min is displayed at 60Hz). 104. "----" is displayed when the monitored value exceeds "9999". 37 and Pr. 110 Remarks 0: Frequency setting added <Setting> • To display the machine speed. Note that the speed displayed is the actual speed from the PLG. 108. 144 "speed setting switch-over" Related parameters Pr. and the parameter setting used for frequency setting can be changed from the frequency to the motor speed or machine speed. 144. 53 "PU level display data selection" Pr. As the operation panel display is 4 digits. • When the running speed monitoring has been selected. 80 and 81. 82 .17 Speed display (Pr. 4. 106. set in Pr. 144 Setting 0 2 to 10 102 to 110 102 to 110 0 2 to 10 Note: 1. 106.

etc. for related equipment. 42 "output frequency detection" Pr.41 Time Output signal SU OFF ON OFF 4. 190 "RUN terminal function selection" Pr.2. open signal. 9999 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz.2. 191 "SU terminal function selection" Pr. 195 "A. FU3) is output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the setting. 42. 193 "OL terminal function selection" Pr. 9999 9999: Same as Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection" Pr. 43. 116 "third output frequency detection" The output frequency signal (FU. ! You can also set the detection of the frequency used exclusively for reverse rotation. 41 "up-to-frequency sensitivity" Related parameters Pr. 50. 116) Pr. Pr. This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached or used as the operation start signal etc. 41) Pr. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation. C terminal function selection" The ON range of the up-to-frequency signal (SU) output when the output frequency reaches the running frequency can be adjusted between 0 and ±100% of the running frequency. Parameter Number 42 43 50 116 Factory Setting 6Hz 9999 30Hz 9999 Setting Range 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz.PARAMETERS 4. FU2. Pr. Pr. 42 setting 9999: Function invalid Remarks 4 83 . 192 "IPF terminal function selection" Pr. B. etc. This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation. Parameter Number 41 Factory Setting 10% Setting Range 0 to 100% Output frequency (Hz) Running frequency Adjustable range Pr. 50 "second output frequency detection" Pr.19 Output frequency detection (Pr.18 Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 43 "output frequency detection for reverse rotation" Pr.

46 " Refer to Pr.48 Pr. 47 " Refer to Pr. Note: 1. Pr.20 Second/third stall prevention (Pr. Pr. 45 " Refer to Pr. Pr. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr.43 Pr. 49 or Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation current" Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed" Pr. 7. 42 setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation frequency" Related parameters Pr.) 2. 115) Pr. 114. 190 to Pr. 190 to Pr. 0. 49 "second stall prevention operation frequency" Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency" Pr. the brake may not be opened. 48. 195 to assign the terminals used to output the FU2 and FU3 signals.50 Pr.49 Running frequency Pr. Output frequency (Hz) Pr. use the RUN (running) signal. Pr.50 Pr.2. 180 to Pr. 9999 0 to 200% 0 to 400Hz Stall prevention operation current Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level" Pr. 43 ≠ 9999. 3.114 Acceleration Deceleration/constant speed Pr.PARAMETERS <Setting> Refer to the figure below and set the corresponding parameters: • When Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) ! The stall prevention operation level can be changed within the range from 0Hz to the frequency set in Pr. 48 "second stall prevention operation current" Pr. Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation" Pr.116 Time Reverse rotation ON OFF ON OFF Pr.116 Output signal OFF FU. When the inboard option unit is used to exercise PLG feedback control. 49. Pr. 43 setting applies to reverse rotation. the Pr.FU2.FU3 Output Signal Parameter Number 42 43 50 116 Output Signal FU FU2 FU3 Use Pr. 4. the other functions may be affected. Parameter Number 48 49 114 115 Factory Setting 150% 0 150% 0 Setting Range 0 to 200% 0 to 400Hz. (If the FU. Pr. 44. FU2 or FU3 signal is used. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.42 Forward rotation Pr. 195. 115.115 84 . ! The stall prevention operation level can be changed by switching the external input signal on-off.

56 "current monitoring reference" Pr.. 180 to Pr. When the stall prevention operation level signal input function is selected (Pr. 170 "watt-hour meter clear" Pr. When Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration" Pr. 4.. CAUTION Do not set a too small value to the second (third) stall prevention operation current.. Pr. 50 " Refer to Pr. 49... 48 RT signal OFF . 115 Setting 0 0. • Refer to the following list to set values in Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference" Pr. AM terminal function selection (Pr. 49 and Pr. 21 1 to 3. 22 = 9999).PARAMETERS <Setting> • Set the stall prevention operation level in Pr. 114. 48 disables the stall prevention function when the RT signal switches on. 114 and Pr. 48 when the RT signal switches on... Select the signals using Pr. 5. 180 to Pr. 5 to 14. RT signal ON.. Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter clear" Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection" Related parameters Pr. 49 changes the stall prevention operation level from the value of the stall prevention operation level signal (terminal 1 input) to the value set in Pr. ! There are two different signal outputs: FM pulse train output terminal and AM analog output terminal. 186. Stall level Pr. 186 to allocate the terminal used to input the X9 signal. 18. 54 "FM terminal function selection" Pr. Set "9" in any of Pr. setting "9999" in Pr. 5 to 14. 21 85 . 3. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" Pr. 49 Setting Pr. When the RT (X9) signal is on. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr.. 48 and Pr. setting "0" in Pr. 22 to 25.01Hz to 400Hz 9999 Cannot be set. 22 Note: 1. 115 are made valid by switching on the X9 signal. 17. Operation Second (third) stall prevention function is not activated. 158) Pr. When Pr. Second stall prevention function is activated according to the RT signal. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. the stall prevention operation level is 0% when the frequency is equal to or less than the value set in Pr. 18 1 to 3. Stall level Pr. torque generated will decrease. 115. 52 to Pr. Second (third) stall prevention function is activated according to the frequency. 42. 158. 37 "speed display" Pr. 2. • Pr... 901 "AM terminal calibration" 4 ! You can select the signals shown on the operation panel (FR-DU04)/parameter unit (FR-PU04) main display screen and on the parameter unit (FR-PU04) level meter and signals output to the FM and AM terminals. the other functions may be affected. 49 ≠ "9999" and Pr. 5 to 14.. Pr. 4. 18. the third stall prevention function is selected...2. 17. 17.21 Monitor display/FM. 53 "PU level display data selection" Pr. 49 = "9999". 48 = "0". Parameter Number 52 53 54 158 Factory Setting 0 1 1 1 Setting Range 0 to 20. 100 0 to 3. When both the RT and X9 signals are on... the second (third) functions such as second (third) acceleration/deceleration time are also selected. 54. Otherwise. 54 and Pr.

54 and Pr. 55 Pr. 70 Protection operation level Pr. 86 . AM. the output frequency at error occurrence is displayed.) Pr.53 Pr. 56   1440Hz is output to FM terminal.158 AM terminal × 1 2 3 × 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 × × 17 18 × × 21 × × × × Full-Scale Value of FM. 55 Pr. During offline auto tuning. the tuning status monitor has priority. 52. 158 in accordance with the following table: Display Unit  Hz A V  Hz r/min % V % % A V kW kW   % A  h   h % kW Pr. During MRS. 2. 52 to Pr. the monitored values during stop and during operation differ as indicated below: (The LED on the left of Hz flickers during a stop and is lit during running. Level Meter  Pr. During an error. 56 400V or 800V  Pr. 52 0 During operation/during stop Output frequency 100 During stop Set frequency Output current Output voltage Alarm display During operation Output frequency Output frequency Output current Output voltage Alarm display Note: 1.54 PU level meter 0 1 2 3 × 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 × × 17 18 × × × × × × × FM terminal × 1 2 3 × 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 × × 17 18 × × 21 × × × × Pr.52 DU LED × 0/100 0/100 0/100 0/100 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 × × 17 18 19 20 × 22 23 24 25 Parameter Setting Pr.PARAMETERS <Setting> Set Pr.   Rated inverter current × 2  Signal Type PU main monitor No display Output frequency Output current Output voltage Alarm display Frequency setting Running speed Motor torque Converter output voltage Regenerative brake duty Electronic overcurrent protection load factor Output current peak value Converter output voltage peak value Input power Output power Input terminal status Output terminal status Load meter ** Motor exciting current Position pulse Cumulative operation time Reference voltage output Orientation status Actual operation time Motor load factor Cumulative power × 0/100 0/100 0/100 0/100 * * * * * * * * * * * * 17 18 19 20 × 22 23 24 25 When 100 is set in Pr. the values are the same as during a stop. 56 Pr. 56 400V or 800V Rated power of inverter rating × 2 Rated power of inverter rating × 2   Pr. 55 value converted into Pr. 37 value Rated torque of applied motor × 2 400V or 800V Pr. Full-scale voltage is output to AM terminal.

V or A only. the display shows "----" after 9999 or more hours have elapsed. 8. the full-scale value can be set in Pr. 5. 17 or 18" in Pr.PARAMETERS Note: 1. "22" may be set in Pr. The motor torque display is valid only in the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode. 56 regarded as 100%. 56. 52 is calculated using the inverter operation time. The monitoring of items marked × cannot be selected. 11. and recalculated from 0. 2. When Pr. 6. the level meter display of the parameter unit can be erased. **The load meter is displayed in %. the monitoring of "output frequency to alarm display" can be selected in sequence by the SHIFT key. 18. 2. 24" monitor SET Third monitor Output current monitor 3) For the set value "19 to 23. its display position depends on the set value. 12. The cumulative operation time and actual operation time are calculated from 0 to 65535 hours. By setting "1. *"Frequency setting to output terminal status" on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04). 171 to clear it. 10. Factory setting First monitor (It is shown at power-on) FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Second monitor FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Third monitor FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL Alarm monitor With alarm FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD SET Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD 1) Output frequency monitor Output current monitor 2) 1) Output voltage monitor SET 4 1) 3) 1) For the set value "5 to 14" (displayed at the third monitor position) First monitor SET Second monitor SET Third monitor Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Set value "5 to 14" monitor 2) For the set value "17. By setting "0" in Pr. The actual operation time is not calculated unless the inverter has operated for longer than one hour continuously. 53. 25" monitor 87 . 5. REMARKS For the monitor set in Pr. The actual operation time displayed by setting "23" in Pr. 4. 11. 7. (Inverter stop time is not included. 24" (displayed instead of output current monitor) First monitor SET Second monitor Output frequency monitor Set value "17. The orientation status functions when the FR-A5AP option is used.) Set "0" in Pr. 52 and the value displayed remains "0" and the function is invalid. 3. 18. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used. 52. the display unit is Hz. 55 or Pr. then cleared. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used. 25" (displayed instead of output voltage monitor) First monitor SET Second monitor SET Third monitor Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Set value "19 to 32. Whether 9999 or more hours have elapsed or not can be confirmed on the parameter unit (FR-PU04). 9. If the option is not used. 52. 6. with the current set in Pr. 53 = "0".

901 "AM terminal calibration" Set the frequency or current which is referenced for display when the frequency or current is selected for the FM and AM terminals and PU level meter display. 55 Monitored Data Selection Output frequency (Hz) Frequency setting (Hz) Running speed (Pr.2. the output of terminal FM will be filled to capacity. 56 Note: 1. 55. Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection" Pr. 2. 37 "speed display" Pr. FM Terminal Function Selection Pr.PARAMETERS 4. 53 "PU level display data selection" Pr. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s. Therefore. 56 "current monitoring reference" Related parameters Pr. 88 . Parameter Number 55 56 Factory Setting 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 Rated output current Setting Range 0 to 400Hz 0 to 500A 1440 pulses/s (terminal FM) 10VDC (terminal AM) Full scale (PU level monitor) Output or display Output or display Output frequency Pr. 55 is not adjusted. set Pr. 55. 53 Setting 1 5 6 2 11 17 18 Set to make the PU level meter indication to be in full-scale. 37) Output current (A) Output current peak value (A) Load meter (A) Motor exciting current (A) PU Level Display Selection Pr. 55 and Pr. Pr. 55. 900 "FM terminal calibration" Pr. 56) Pr. If Pr. 54 Setting 1 5 6 2 11 17 18 Set to make the terminal FM pulse train output to be 1440 pulses/s. Current monitoring reference Pr.55 Frequency setting Running speed Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection" Pr.56 Output current Output current peak value Load meter 1440 pulses/s (terminal FM) 10VDC (terminal AM) Full scale (PU level monitor) <Setting> Referring to the above figures and following table. 56: Monitoring Reference Setting Parameter Frequency monitoring reference Pr. adjust Pr. 56 Setting using Pr. 158 Setting 1 5 6 2 11 17 18 Set to make the terminal AM output voltage to be 10V. AM Terminal Function Selection Pr. The maximum output voltage of terminal AM is 10VDC. 55 "frequency monitoring reference" Pr.22 Monitoring reference (Pr.

162=0 (with frequency search) Instantaneous power failure time When Pr. 162=1 (without frequency search) Instantaneous power failure time Power supply (R. S.2. 1 0 to 20 s 0 to 100% 0 to 200% Remarks 9999: No restart 0: Frequency search 1: No frequency search NFB MC1 R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 R1 〈L11〉 S1 〈L21〉 STF CS SD U V W IM × MC3 MC2 MC switching sequence Connect CS-SD for use of only automatic restart after instantaneous power failure. 162 to Pr. UVT and IPF among the alarm output signals will not be output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. Pr. 9999 0 to 60 s 0.) Parameter Number 57 58 162 163 164 165 Factory Setting 9999 1. 58. 57 setting. 57 "restart coasting time" Pr.0 s 0 0s 0% 150% Setting Range 0. (When automatic restart operation is set to be enabled.162 "Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection" Pr.1 to 5 s. 58) Coasting speed + time detection time Pr. 58 "restart cushion time" Pr. 89 . Pr. 57. 5s Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency f (Hz) Inverter output voltage E (V) Cushion voltage time Pr. CS SD When Pr.165 "Restart stall prevention operation level" ! You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting) when the commercial power supply is switched to the inverter operation or when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure. 165) Pr.164 "First cushion voltage for restart" Pr.PARAMETERS 4. 0. T) Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency f (Hz) Inverter output voltage E (V) Cushion voltage time (value set in Pr. 57 setting Approx. T) 4 Power supply (R. 58 setting Coasting time Pr.163 "First cushion time for restart" Pr. S.23 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.

2K to 7. an overcurrent (OCT) alarm may take place.5 s coasting time Generally use this setting. the output frequency before an instantaneous power failure is stored and output at the time of restart. When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected. the output voltage is gradually increased with the frequency kept as preset. 57 ≠ 9999.1 to 5 s 0 57 9999 58 163 164 165 0 to 60 s 0 to 20 s 0 to 100% 0 to 200% Note: 1. When Pr. These values are adjustable to the load (inertia moment. When Pr. 2. UVT and IPF among the alarm output signals are not output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. 1. Stay away from the motor and machine. The SU and FU signals are not output during restart but are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed. CAUTION Provide mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2.) No restart Normally the motor may be run with the factory settings. If the power of the inverter control circuit is lost. if the inertia moment (J) of the load is small. the inverter will not run if the CS signal remain off.1 s and 5 s according to the inertia moment (J) and torque of the load.0 s coasting time Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after power is restored from an instantaneous power failure. disabling the motor from starting.4K to 1. When restart operation is selected. Therefore. When Pr. the DC dynamic brake is operated instantly on detection of restarting speed. and set the parameters: Parameter Number Setting Description Frequency search made Frequency search is made after detection of an instantaneous power failure. 90 . 4. 7. the speed may reduce. 0 162 1 0. 162 = "1". 0. 6. the frequency before an instantaneous power failure cannot be stored and the inverter will start at 0Hz. 3. No frequency search Independently of the motor coasting speed. (The inverter will not start properly.PARAMETERS <Setting> Refer to the above figures and following table. the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.5K 2. connection of two or more motors to one inverter will make the inverter function improperly.0 s coasting time 3. When Pr.) 5. When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure. (Set this time between 0. The inverter will be damaged if power is entered into the inverter output section. apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places. 162 = "0". 162 = "0".5K 11K or more 0. torque). If the inverter capacity is more than one rank higher than the motor capacity.

deceleration and setting clear functions of the motorized speed setter (FR-FK). 18 "high-speed maximum frequency" Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether the frequency setting storage function* is used or not.PARAMETERS 4. you can use the acceleration. the functions of terminals RH. the output frequency of the inverter can be compensated for as follows: External operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus external running frequency other than multi-speeds PU operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus PU running frequency Parameter Number 59 Factory Setting 0 Output frequency (Hz) Setting Range 0. 59=1 (Note) When Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection" Related parameters Pr. 2 When Pr. then on again.2.24 Remote setting function selection (Pr.yes" is selected. operation is resumed at this setting of the output frequency. ! When the remote function is used. 45 "second deceleration time" If the operator panel is located away from the control box. 59=1) <Frequency setting storage condition> • Frequency at the time when the start signal (STF or STR) has switched off • Frequency at the time when the RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) signals have remained off for more than 1 minute 91 . RM and RL are changed to acceleration (RH). 8 "deceleration time" Pr. ! By merely setting this parameter. without using analog signals. (Pr. deceleration (RM) and clear (RL). When "remote setting function . 1 "maximum frequency" Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation" Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" Pr. * Frequency setting storage function The remote setting frequency (frequency set by RH. 59=2 0Hz ON Acceleration (RH) Deceleration (RM) Clear (RL) Forward rotation (STF) Power supply ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Note: External operation frequency or PU operation frequency other than multi-speed Pr. 59 Setting 0 1 2 Operation Frequency setting Remote setting function storage function (E2PROM)  No Yes Yes Yes No 4 • Use Pr. When power is switched off once. RM operation) is stored into memory. you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation. 1. 59) Pr.

2. After a start in the intelligent operation mode. The output frequency acceleration/deceleration times are as set in Pr. respectively. If the start signal (STF or STR) is off. 7 and Pr. 285 (brake sequence functions) The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for operation. Parameter Number 60 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 to 8 92 . 18 setting). 81 (advanced magnetic flux vector control) Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. ! If you do not set the acceleration and deceleration times and V/F pattern. This operation mode is useful to start operation immediately without making fine parameter settings. 0 "torque boost" Pr. 1 or Pr. neither the JOG signal nor the RT signal is accepted.PARAMETERS Note: 1. the set frequency varies according to the slope set in Pr. you can run the inverter as if appropriate values had been set in the corresponding parameters. Therefore. make a restart (turn on the STF signal) more than 1 minute after that. 60) Pr. REMARKS After the clear signal (RL) has turned on. Output frequency (Hz) (*2) (*1) Acceleration (RH) Clear (RL) Forward rotation (STF) Power supply ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON More than 1 minute 1 minute or less (*1) External operation frequency or PU operation frequency except multi-speed (*2) Multi-speed frequency CAUTION When selecting this function. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 44 or Pr. The frequency can be varied by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) between 0 and the maximum frequency (Pr. re-set the maximum frequency according to the machine. then off.25 Intelligent mode selection (Pr. 80. 60 "intelligent mode selection" Related parameters Pr. with priority given to jog operation or second function selection. entry of the jog signal or RT (second function selection) signal during an inverter stop starts ordinary operation. ! If the intelligent operation mode has been selected. 45. The output frequency at a restart made within 1 minute will be the output frequency (multispeed frequency) after the clear signal (RL) has turned off. When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on. 4. switching on the acceleration (RH) or deceleration (RM) signal varies the set frequency. 3. 13 "starting frequency" Pr. 2. 19 "base frequency voltage" Pr. 278 to Pr. 8. the longer preset times are used to vary the actual output frequency. Pr.

PARAMETERS <Setting> Pr. 2 Pr. (Advanced magnetic flux vector control has higher priority. 3. completion signal not input  1. 8 "deceleration time" to a larger value and restart operation in this mode. 7. 6 Elevator mode (Note 3) Pr. 5. 4) Energy-saving mode (Note 3. 19 7 Brake sequence mode  8 Note: 1. set the other parameters as appropriate. 0. the settings of the energy-saving mode and elevator mode are ignored. Because of the learning system. 0. Pr. overvoltage is more likely to occur in this mode as compared to the constant-torque load characteristics. "1": Stall prevention operation level 150% "2": Stall prevention operation level 180% Optimum operation can be carried out by fully utilizing the inverter capabilities in the continuous rating range. Mechanical For function details and related parameter setting. re-set Pr. 5) Pr. 7. 285 (brake sequence functions). Self-learning automatically sets the corresponding parameters so that the average current during acceleration/deceleration is equal to the rated current. 81. "5": Stall prevention operation level 150% "6": Stall prevention operation level 180% Mechanical brake opening This function causes the inverter to output the completion signal mechanical brake operation timing signal for elevating input application. 8 4 Output voltage 5. Pr. Pr. 278 to Pr. Also. Automatically controls the inverter output voltage to deliver the maximum torque in both the driving and regenerative modes. If an overvoltage (OV3) trip has occurred during operation in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode (setting "3"). Also.01Hz or more. the deceleration time may be longer than the preset value. Appropriate for applications where the load will not vary by a large amount.) 4. an insufficient brake capability may cause the regenerative overvoltage alarm (E. 8 3 Optimum acceleration/ deceleration mode (Note 2. Pr. Appropriate for energy-saving applications such as fan and pump. Pr. 80 and Pr. When the "energy-saving mode" (setting "4") is used to decelerate the motor to a stop. When the advanced magnetic flux vector control has been selected using Pr. The inverter makes acceleration/deceleration in the shortest time using its full capabilities. this control is not valid at the first time in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode. Tunes the inverter output voltage online to minimize the inverter output voltage during constant-speed operation. this mode is only valid for frequency setting of 30. 4 93 . 13. 2. refer brake opening to Pr. 60 Setting Operation Mode Ordinary operation mode Shortest acceleration/ deceleration mode Description Automatically Set Parameters 0  Set to accelerate/decelerate the motor in the shortest time. therefore set the deceleration time to a longer value.OV3). Appropriate for a counterbalanced elevator. When more accurate control is required for your application. During deceleration.

Note: Pr. I for intelligent mode decel. 9999 0 to 200%.2. 9999 0 to 200%. Related parameter Pr. Parameter Number 61 62 63 64 Factory Setting 9999 9999 9999 9999 Setting Range 0 to 500A. 100% is the optimum value. The setting of 0 to 10Hz is the starting frequency. 100% is the optimum value. 9999 Remarks 9999: Referenced from rated inverter current. Remarks Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode (3) Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 "ref. I for intelligent mode decel.) The reference current setting can be changed. The setting of 0 to 200% is the optimum value. The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value. 63 "ref. I for intelligent mode accel. The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value. 64 "starting frequency for elevator mode" ! Set these parameters to improve performance in the intelligent mode. 64 are only valid when any of "1 to 6" is selected for Pr. I for intelligent mode accel. The setting of 0 to 200% is the optimum value. 60. 62 "ref.) The reference current setting can be changed." Pr. 64 "starting frequency for elevator mode" Setting 9999 (factory setting) 0 to 10Hz Reference Current 2Hz is the starting frequency. 62 "ref." Pr. 61 "reference I for intelligent mode" Setting 9999 (factory setting) 0 to 500A Reference Current Referenced from rated inverter current Referenced from setting (rated motor current) (2) Pr. 61 "reference I for intelligent mode" Pr.PARAMETERS 4." (The reference value differs between the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode." (The reference value differs between the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode. Remarks Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode (4) Pr. 94 . 60 "intelligent mode selection" <Setting> (1) Pr. Setting 9999 (factory setting) 0 to 200% Reference Current 150% (180%) is the limit value. 64) Pr. Setting 9999 (factory setting) 0 to 200% Reference Current 150% (180%) is the limit value. 61 to Pr.26 Acceleration/deceleration reference current/lift mode starting frequency (Pr. 9999 0 to 200%.

PARAMETERS

4.2.27 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
Pr. 65 "retry selection" Pr. 67 "number of retries at alarm occurrence" Pr. 68 "retry waiting time" Pr. 69 "retry count display erasure"
When an alarm occurs, the retry function causes the inverter to automatically reset itself to make a restart and continue operation. You can select whether retry is made or not, alarms reset for retry, number of retries made, and waiting time.
Parameter Number 65 67 68 69 Factory Setting 0 0 1s 0 Setting Range 0 to 5 0 to 10, 101 to 110 0 to 10 s 0

<Setting>
Use Pr. 65 to select alarms to be reset for retry.
Errors Reset for Retry Display E.OC1 E.OC2 E.OC3 E.OV1 E.OV2 E.OV3 E.THM E.THT E.IPF E.UVT E.FIN E. BE E. GF E. LF E.OHT E.OLT E.OPT E.OP1 E.OP2 E.OP3 E. PE E.PUE E.RET E.CPU E. 1 E. 2 E. 3 E. 6 E. 7 E.MB1 E.MB2 E.MB3 E.MB4 E.MB5 E.MB6 E.MB7 E.P24 E.CTE E.ECT E.OSD Setting 2 3

! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

0

! ! !

1

! ! !

! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

4

! !

5

4

! ! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! ! ! ! !

!

!

Note: ! indicates the errors selected for retry.

95

PARAMETERS
• Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.
Pr. 67 Setting 0 1 to 10 101 to 110 Number of Retries Retry is not made. 1 to 10 times 1 to 10 times Alarm Signal Output  Not output. Output.

• Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a restart in the range 0 to 10 seconds. • Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retry. The setting of "0" erases the cumulative number of times. Note: 1. The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "1" when retry operation is regarded as successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without any alarm occurring during a period more than four times longer than the time set in Pr. 68. 2. If alarms occur consecutively within a period four times longer than the above waiting time, the operation panel (FR-DU04) may show data different from the most recent data or the parameter unit (FR-PU04) may show data different from the first retry data. The data stored as the error reset for retry is only that of the alarm which occurred the first time. 3. When an inverter alarm is reset at the restart time, the stored data of the electronic overcurrent protection, regenerative brake duty, etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-on reset.)

CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm. When you have selected the retry function, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places.

Pr. 66 " Refer to Pr. 22. Pr. 70 " Refer to Pr. 30.

96

PARAMETERS

4.2.28 Applied motor (Pr. 71)
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Related parameters Pr. 0 "torque boost" Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage" Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage" Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status" Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 (V/F frequency/voltage)

Set the motor used.
Parameter Number 71 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24

<Setting>
• Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Pr. 71 Setting 0 1 2 20 3 13 23 4 14 24 5 15 6 16 7 17 8 18 Thermal Characteristics of Electronic Overcurrent Protection Thermal characteristics matching a standard motor Thermal characteristics matching the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor Thermal characteristics matching a standard motor 5-point flexible V/F characteristics Thermal characteristics for advanced magnetic flux vector control of the Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR4P (1.5kW (2HP) or less) Standard motor Constant-torque motor Select "offline auto tuning setting". Mitsubishi general-purpose motor SF-JR4P (1.5kW (2HP) or less) Standard motor Auto tuning data can be read or set anew. Constant-torque motor Mitsubishi general-purpose motor SF-JR4P (1.5kW (2HP) or less) Standard motor Star connection Constant-torque motor Motor constants can be entered directly. Standard motor Delta connection Constant-torque motor Standard motor Star connection Direct motor Constant-torque motor constant entry and Standard motor offline auto tuning Delta connection Constant-torque motor Motor Constant Standard Torque # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #

4

• For the 5.5K and 7.5K, the Pr. 0 and Pr. 12 settings are automatically changed depending on the Pr. 71 setting.
Pr. 71 Pr. 0 Pr. 12 0, 2, 3 to 8, 20, 23, 24 3% 4% 1, 13 to 18 2% 2%

Note: 1. When "9999" is set in Pr. 19, "2" cannot be set in Pr. 71. To set "2" in Pr. 71, set the appropriate value (other than "9999") in Pr. 19. 2. When "2" is set in Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 are displayed on the parameter unit (FR-PU04). In other settings, if any of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 settings is changed, the new setting is not displayed in the "Default parameter list" and "Set parameter list". 3. Refer to Pr. 96 for offline auto tuning. 4. Set any of "3, 7, 8, 13, 17 and 18" to perform offline auto tuning.

CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.

97

PARAMETERS

4.2.29 PWM carrier frequency (Pr. 72, Pr. 240)
Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting"

You can change the motor tone.
! By parameter setting, you can select Soft-PWM control which changes the motor tone. ! Soft-PWM control changes motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending complex tone.
Parameter Number 72 240 Factory Setting 2 1 Setting Range 0 to 15 0, 1 Remarks 0: 0.7kHz, 15: 14.5kHz 1: Soft-PWM valid

<Setting>
• Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter Number Factory Setting Description PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The setting displayed is in [kHz]. Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15 indicates 14.5kHz. Soft-PWM invalid When any of "0 to 5" is set in Pr. 72, Soft-PWM is made valid.

72 240

0 to 15 0 1

Note: 1. A reduced PWM carrier frequency will decrease inverter-generated noise and leakage current but increase motor noise.

98

10 to 15 <Setting> Pr. The value of terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the main speed setting signal of terminal 2 or 4. 73 Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 Terminal AU Signal Terminal 2 Input Voltage ∗0 to 10V ∗0 to 5V ∗0 to 10V ∗0 to 5V 0 to 10V 0 to 5V ∗0 to 10V ∗0 to 5V ∗0 to 10V ∗0 to 5V 0 to 10V 0 to 5V Invalid 0 to 10V 0 to 5V Invalid 0 to 10V 0 to 5V Terminal 1 Input Voltage 0 to ±10V 0 to ±10V 0 to ±5V 0 to ±5V ∗0 to ±10V ∗0 to ±5V 0 to ±10V 0 to ±10V 0 to ±5V 0 to ±5V ∗0 to ±10V ∗0 to ±5V 0 to ±10V 0 to ±10V 0 to ±5V 0 to ±5V Invalid 0 to ±10V 0 to ±10V 0 to ±5V 0 to ±5V Invalid Terminal 4 Input. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain" Pr. 73) Pr. 4 to 20mA Override Function Polarity Reversible × # Invalid No (Note 3) OFF (No) × Valid # × Yes # No (Note 3) ON (Yes) ∗ × Valid # 4 Note: 1. is not affected by the change in Pr.30 Voltage input (Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level" Pr. compensation made by terminal 2 is made invalid. which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency. 99 .) 3. Parameter Number 73 Factory Setting 1 Setting Range 0 to 5. Pr.PARAMETERS 4. When the Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain" You can select the analog input terminal specifications.2. terminal 1 or 4 is for the main speed setting and terminal 2 is for the override signal (50 to 150% at 0-5V or 0-10V). 903 (Pr. ∗ indicates the main speed setting. 6. the override function and the function to switch between forward and reverse rotation depending on the input signal polarity. Also. the value of terminal 1 is for the stall prevention operation level setting. (If the main speed of terminal 1 or 4 is not input. To change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum frequency command voltage (current). the command voltage (current) need not be input. the acceleration/deceleration time. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" Related parameters Pr. Indicates that a negative-polarity frequency command signal is not accepted. 905). 22 setting is "9999". use the frequency setting voltage (current) gain. When override has been selected. 5. 73 setting. 2. At this time. 4.

Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated. If the PU is disconnected. Reset selection : You can select the reset function input timing. ! Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit. 74 "filter time constant" You can set the input section's internal filter constant for an external voltage or current frequency setting signal. Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated. you can stop the motor from STOP the PU by pressing the key. When the PU is disconnected. Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated. A larger setting results in lower response.PARAMETERS 4.2. ! Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise. Reset input normally enabled. Reset input normally enabled. RESET • • • Parameter Number 75 Factory Setting 14 Setting Range 0 to 3. the inverter output is shut off. Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated. PU stop selection : When an alarm occurs in any operation mode. of the PU.2.31 Input filter time constant (Pr. PU Disconnection Detection If the PU is disconnected.) Parameter Number 74 Factory Setting 1 Setting Range 0 to 8 4. PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) connector disconnection detection function and PU stop function. (The time constant can be set between approximately 1ms to 1s. PU disconnection detection : When it is detected that the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) connector is disconnected from the inverter for more than 1 second.PUE) and comes to an alarm stop. operation will be continued. operation will be continued. 75) Pr. A larger setting results in a larger filter time constant. Reset input normally enabled. PU Stop Selection STOP RESET 0 1 2 3 14 15 16 17 Pressing the key decelerates the motor to a stop only in the PU operation mode.32 Reset selection/PU disconnection detection/PU stop selection (Pr. Pressing the STOP RESET key decelerates the motor to a stop in any When the PU is disconnected. 75 Setting Reset Selection Reset input normally enabled. with the setting of 0 to 8. the inverter output is shut off. 74) Pr. the inverter outputs an alarm code (E. 14 to 17 <Setting> Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection" You can select the reset input acceptance. external and communication operation modes. 100 .

reset the inverter after confirming that the PU is connected securely. Time SET key Operation panel STF ON (STR) OFF STOP RESET key Stop and restart example for external operation The other way of making a restart other than the above method is to perform a power-reset or to make a reset with the inverter reset terminal. The motor will not stop if a PU disconnection alarm occurs. To resume operation. if parameter (all) clear is executed. (2) Parameter unit (FR-PU04) 1) After completion of deceleration to a stop. independent of the Pr. The reset key of the PU is only valid when the protective function is activated. PS is displayed but an alarm is not output. which may lead to hazardous conditions. 101 .. 75 value can be set any time. then press the key and Note: When Pr. 4. (Note 8) . The PU disconnection detection function judges that the PU connector is disconnected when it is removed from the inverter for more than 1 second. and the motor coasts. Note: 1. When PU disconnection detection is set and the PU is then disconnected during PU jog operation. When the motor is stopped by the PU stop function. Refer to page 48 for the monitor display provided by pressing the 3) Press the SET key. 75 setting. 4) Turn on the STF or STR signal. 6. 3. the motor decelerates to a stop. switch off the STF or STR signal. this setting will not return to the initial value..PARAMETERS How to make a restart after a stop made by the external operation STOP RESET key from the PU during (1) Operation panel (FR-DU04) 1) After completion of deceleration to a stop. If the PU had been disconnected before power-on. When the PU connector is used for RS-485 communication operation. Speed MODE key. the inverter shuts off output while it is reset. 3) Switch on the STF or STR signal. press the proceed to step 3). it is not judged as an alarm. 79 = "3"... 5. Otherwise. the data of the electronic overcurrent protection and regenerative brake duty are reset. 2) Press the MODE key three times* to call the MODE indication. the motor will start instantly after resetting. Also.. 4 CAUTION Do not reset the inverter with the start signal on. By entering the reset signal (RES) during operation. 2) Press the EXT key. 2. the reset selection and PU stop selection functions are valid but the PU disconnection detection function is invalid. 7. key three times to display (*: For monitor screen) . The Pr.. switch off the STF or STR signal.

79 "operation mode selection" Pr. 102 . 190 to Pr. assign the brake opening request signal (BOF) to the RUN terminal by setting "20" in Pr. 195. 200 to Pr. (Output signal is the same as in 0. Therefore. When programmed operation has been selected. these terminals provide the output signals as listed above when any of "1 to 3" is set in Pr. IPF. this parameter also serves to output a group operation signal. 76 setting overrides the Pr. This should be noted when using the functions which use the output signals to exercise control. 195). Parameter Number 76 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 to 3 <Setting> • Alarm code output Pr. its code can be output as a 4-bit digital signal from the open collector output terminals. 190 to Pr. an alarm code signal is output. refer to page 192. OL and FU using Pr. 2. Also you can look at the progress of programmed operation. an operation status signal is output. 190 to Pr. 76 Setting 0 1 2 3 (during programmed operation) Output Terminals IPF OL FU Alarm code is not output. (Depends on Pr. 76.) SU Output at time-out During group 3 operation During group 2 operation During group 1 operation Note: 1. 278 to Pr. 190. 76 "alarm code output selection" Related parameters Pr. 231 (programmed operation) When an alarm occurs. 190 to Pr. (Output signal is the same as in 1. 195 settings. The alarm code can read by a programmable controller etc to show its remedy on a display.PARAMETERS 4.2.33 Alarm code output selection (Pr. 285). if you assign other signals to output terminals SU. Alarm code bit 3 Alarm code bit 2 Alarm code bit 1 Alarm code bit 0 When an alarm occurs. 195 (multi-function outputs) Pr. 76) Pr. The Pr. For alarm code definitions.) When operation is normal. Example: When using the brake sequence functions (Pr.

77. If Pr.2. 77 and Pr. 75. Note: 1. Stop operation when changing their parameter settings. This function is used to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by accident. 22. 1. 79 "operation mode selection" can be written. the values of the following parameters cannot be written during operation. 77 Setting 0 1 2 Function Write enabled during a stop only. B. C terminal function selection 4 3. 2 <Setting> Pr. The values of the parameters half-tone screened in the parameter list can be set at any time.PARAMETERS 4. By setting "1" in Pr. Values of Pr. Parameter Number 77 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0. Pr. 72 and Pr. 77 = "2". 240 values cannot be set during external operation. Pr. Parameter values may only be written during a stop in the PU operation mode. (Note 1) Write disabled. 77) Pr. (Pr.34 Parameter write inhibit selection (Pr. Parameter Number 23 48 49 60 61 66 71 79 80 81 83 84 95 96 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 Name Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed Second stall prevention operation current Second stall prevention operation frequency Intelligent mode selection Reference current Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency Applied motor Operation mode selection Motor capacity Number of motor poles Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency Advanced mode selection Auto tuning setting/status V/F1 (first frequency) V/F1 (first frequency voltage) V/F2 (second frequency) V/F2 (second frequency voltage) V/F3 (third frequency) V/F3 (third frequency voltage) V/F4 (fourth frequency) Parameter Number 107 108 109 135 136 137 138 139 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 190 191 192 193 194 195 Name V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) V/F5 (fifth frequency) V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence output terminal selection MC switch-over interlock time Start waiting time Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence Automatic inverter-commercial power supply switch-over frequency RL terminal function selection RM terminal function selection RH terminal function selection RT terminal function selection AU terminal function selection JOG terminal function selection CS terminal function selection RUN terminal function selection SU terminal function selection IPF terminal function selection OL terminal function selection FU terminal function selection A. 77 "parameter write disable selection" Related parameters Pr. Write enabled even during operation. 79 "operation mode selection" You can select between write-enable and disable for parameters. the following clear operations can be inhibited: • Parameter clear • All clear • User clear 103 .) 2.

e.PARAMETERS 4. 79 "operation mode selection" This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the misoperation of the start signal.2. (The setting of this function is valid for the PU. 78) Pr. external and communication operations. 78 Setting 0 1 2 Function Both forward and reverse rotations allowed Reverse rotation disallowed Forward rotation disallowed 104 . 78 "reverse rotation prevention selection" Related parameters Pr.35 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 2 <Setting> Pr. ! Used for a machine which runs only in one direction.g. 1. fan. pump.) Parameter Number 78 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0.

Pr......232 Pr....... Switched to PU operation mode 4 Note: 1... operation from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) (PU operation)... May be switched to PU operation mode (output stop during external operation) X12 signal OFF. 200 to Pr. Switching to PU operation mode inhibited Switching to other than external operation mode (disallowed during operation) X16 signal ON ... RH...... 186 Pr. 105 ..... External signal input (terminal STF.. 79) Pr. Set from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) (direct setting. RM. 200 to Pr.. 200 to Pr.PARAMETERS 4. 1..... timer reset.232 toto Pr.. STR Group selection .239 Pr..239 (multi-speed operation) "multi-speed operation" Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection" Pr. rotation directions and running frequencies individually for each of selected three groups to perform automatic operation under the control of the internal elapsed time counting timer. . 15 "jog frequency" Pr. Pr.... These settings differ in starting method.. 79 Setting Function External operation mode at power-on PU or external operation can be selected.... 24 27.... Parameter Number 79 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 to 8 <Setting> Pr. Input from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) ( FWD 0 1 2 3 4 key. 231 (programmed operation) "programmed operation" Used to select the operation mode of the inverter........ Pr.. 24 toto 27.... 231........ REV key) 5 6 7 8 Programmed operation mode You can set 10 different operation starting times...... 76 "alarm code output selection" Pr..36 Operation mode selection (Pr..... 6.. STF.. RL Switch-over mode Switch-over between PU operation....... PU operation mode External operation mode External/PU combined operation mode 1 Running frequency......6.... refer to the explanations of Pr. and computer link operation (when the FR-A5NR option is used)....... external operation and computer link operation (when the communication option such as the FR-A5NR is used) modes can be done while running..... External operation mode (PU operation interlock) X12 signal ON... Pr. (1) Programmed operation With this function..... jog......... Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation.... multi-speed selection) Start signal.. 44 toto Pr.. Pr.. key) or external signal input (multi-speed setting only) Start signal ... STR) External/PU combined operation mode 2 Running frequency....2.... Switched to external operation mode X16 signal OFF. 15 "jog frequency" Pr.... rotation directions and running frequencies for each of three groups...... 4. You can choose any of the operation modes: operation using external signals (external operation).. Operation start. 231 Pr. External signal input (terminal 2..... 79 "operation mode selection" Related parameters Pr.. For full information of this function.. 180 Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) (input terminal function selection) Pr.... combination of PU operation and external operation (external/PU combined operation)... you can set 10 different operation starting times... 180 toto Pr.

the other functions may be affected. 186 (input terminal function selection). ON OFF 106 . ! Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal. 180 to Pr. ! Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation. 180 to Pr. Refer to page 147 for Pr. (Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset. 79 (PU operation interlock).) 1) Press the external operation key of the parameter unit. Operation mode can be switched to PU operation mode. 1) The switch-over command to the external mode is sent from the computer.PARAMETERS (2) Switch-over mode You can select between PU operation. 180 to Pr. 2) Function X12 (MRS) Signal Function/Operation Output stopped during external operation. the function of the MRS signal changes from MRS (output stop) to PU external interlock. Switching to PU operation mode inhibited. External operation allowed. • Using any of Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection). the operation mode is forcibly changed to the external operation mode. ! Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of computer link operation. 1) Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit. allocate the terminal used to input X12 (PU external interlock signal). Parameter values can be rewritten in PU operation mode. Forcibly switched to external operation mode. PU operation allowed. ! Set frequency is determined by the external frequency setting signal. ! Set frequency is as set by the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer). ! Set frequency is determined by the external frequency setting signal. This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode. • When the X12 signal is not assigned. external operation and computer link operation (when FR-A5NR option is used).) 1) Mode change command to computer link mode is transmitted from the computer. ! Set frequency is as set by the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer). 1) Mode change command to computer link mode is transmitted from the computer. (Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset. External operation to computer link operation PU operation to external operation PU operation to computer link operation Computer link operation to external operation Computer link operation to PU operation (3) PU operation interlock When the PU operation interlock signal is switched off. 1) Preparation • Set "7" in Pr. Operation Mode Switching External operation to PU operation Switching Operation/Operating Status 1) Select the PU operation mode. ! Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal. ! Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of PU operation. 186. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. ! Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation. Note: When terminal assignment is changed using Pr.

79 setting is 7 and the PU operation interlock signal is OFF. When the Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection). 79. STR) is on or off. 79. X16 Signal 4 ON OFF Operation Mode External operation mode (cannot be changed to the PU operation mode) PU operation mode (cannot be changed to the external operation mode) 107 . When the MRS signal is used as the PU external interlock signal. 17 = 2. 186 (input terminal function selection). (4) Operation mode external signal switching function 1) Preparation Set "8" (switching to other than external operation mode) in Pr. read ON for OFF and OFF for ON in the above explanation. During stop External Disallowed → disallowed During operation → output stop Allowed → disallowed During operation Allowed → disallowed Disallowed During stop External During operation Disallowed → disallowed Disallowed → disallowed Disallowed → disallowed Disallowed → disallowed Allowed Disallowed Disallowed Disallowed Note: 1. 180 to Pr. 5. Also. Using any of Pr.PARAMETERS <Function/operation changed by switching on-off the X12 (MRS) signal> Operating Condition Operation mode Status During stop PU X12 (MRS) Signal ON → OFF (Note 3) ON → OFF (Note 3) OFF → ON ON → OFF OFF → ON ON → OFF External Operation Mode (Note 4) Operating Status Parameter Write Switching to PU Operation Mode Disallowed During stop If external operation frequency setting and start signal are entered. 186. the other functions may be affected. 2) Function When the X16 signal is switched on in the PU operation mode. If the X12 (MRS) signal is on. 6. STOP 4. 180 to Pr. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. When an alarm occurs. 17 setting. When the X16 signal is switched off during network operation such as computer link. Note that this switch-over may only be made while the inverter is at a stop and cannot be made during operation. 3. Refer to page 147 for Pr. the MRS signal acts as a PU interlock signal. the signal logic conforms to the Pr. 2. 180 to Pr. the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode when the start signal (STF. switching the MRS signal on and rewriting the Pr. When Pr. as soon as 7 is set in Pr. the operation mode is changed to the PU operation mode as soon as the switch-over command to the external operation mode is sent from the computer. network operation such as computer link cannot be used. The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF. When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal. allocate the terminal used to input the X16 (PU-external operation switching) signal. Therefore. When the X16 signal is switched off in the external operation mode. STR) is on. Note: When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. the inverter can be reset by pressing the key of the operation RESET panel. the operation mode is changed to the PU operation mode. the motor is run in the external operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal is switched off with either of STF and STR on. operation is performed in that status. the operation mode is forcibly changed to the external operation mode. 79 value to other than 7 in the PU operation mode causes the MRS signal to provide the ordinary MRS function (output stop).

(If the length is over 30m (98. • The wiring length between the inverter and motor is within 30m (98. 14. 186 to assign the terminal used for X18 signal input. 108 . Parameter Number 80 81 89 Factory Setting 9999 9999 100% Setting Range 0.14.37 Motor capacity/number of motor poles/speed control gain (Pr.42 feet). 89 "speed control gain" Pr.4kW (1/2HP) or more) or Mitsubishi constanttorque motor (SF-JRCA 200V class 4-pole motor of 0. 84 "rated motor frequency" Pr. Always perform offline auto tuning for any other motor (e. 90 to Pr. 81.2. 71. 80 and Pr. 4. 94 (motor constants) Pr. 95 "online auto tuning selection" Pr. perform the offline auto tuning . 83 "rated motor voltage" Pr.0% Remarks 9999: V/F control 9999: V/F control If any of the following conditions is not satisfied.) <Setting> (1) Advanced magnetic flux vector control • By setting the capacity.g. 89) Pr. 1.42 feet). Parameter Number 80 Setting 9999 0.4 to 55 9999 2. ! Advanced magnetic flux vector control Provides large starting torque and sufficient low-speed torque. perform offline auto tuning with the cables wired. 89 "speed control gain" Related parameters Pr. <Operating conditions> • The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. 16. In this case. 80. 6.4kW to 45kW(1/2HP to 60HP). V/F control Set the number of motor poles. 12: For 2-pole motor 14: For 4-pole motor 16: For 6-pole motor Advanced magnetic flux vector control Advanced magnetic flux vector control 81 12.4K to 55kW.PARAMETERS 4. set "20" in Pr. • The motor type is the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 0. select V/F control. 180 to Pr. 12. and 6. V/F control is selected when the X18 (magnetic fluxV/F switch-over) signal switches on. Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) You can set the advanced magnetic flux vector control. 4. • The number of motor poles is any of 2. SF-JRC). 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. (This selection is not made during operation. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 71. set "1" in Pr.) Use any of Pr. 81. 9999 2. Pr.5kW or less). 71 "applied motor" Pr. number of poles and type of the motor used in Pr. 9999 0 to 200. Effective for great load fluctuation. (4 poles only for the constant-torque motor) • Single-motor operation (one motor for one inverter) is performed. the advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected.) • When using Mitsubishi's standard motor (SF-JR. 96 "auto tuning setting/status" Pr. 4P. third party's motor. 180 to Pr. 6 Description V/F control Set the motor capacity applied. (When using the SF-JRC. 4. faults such as torque shortage and speed fluctuation may occur.16 • When using Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA).

Speed fluctuation is slightly greater than in the V/F control. 95 "online auto tuning selection" Pr. 90 "motor constant (R1)" Pr.) Load torque Speed 4. Pr. (Advanced magnetic flux vector control may not be suitable for machines which attach importance to little speed fluctuation at low speed. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. output torque may reduce. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status" Related parameters Pr. 91 "motor constant (R2)" Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage" Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. the motor performance is unleashed to perform operation. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency" Pr. 96) Pr.PARAMETERS Note: 1. 93 "motor constant (L2)" Pr.2. (2) Using the auto tuning function improves the operational performance of the motor. 180 to Pr. 82 "motor exciting current" Pr. (4) There are two ways of offline auto tuning: motor-unrotated method and motor-rotated method. grinders. 90 to Pr. Pr. advanced magnetic flux vector control is effective when motor speed does not match. 94 "motor constant (X)" Pr.g. 92 "motor constant (L1)" Pr. (3) There are two ways of auto tuning: offline auto tuning and online auto tuning (Refer to page 116). 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 89 can be used to adjust motor speed fluctuation when the load varies. • For adjustment of motor speed fluctuation due to load variation Pr. 71 "applied motor" Pr. the other functions may be affected. lapping machines.38 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection" 4 What is auto tuning? (1) In the magnetic flux vector control system. 84. 3. When the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is used between the inverter and motor. 186.) 2. 94. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. 82 to Pr. (When you have changed the conventional model FR-A200E series for the FR-A500 series. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay" Pr. e. (5) Speed characteristic accuracy Online>>offline (rotated)>offline (unrotated)>>no tuning 109 .

tuning accuracy is higher. • You can read. • The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04). 9999 0 to .g. 9999 0. 110 .PARAMETERS When you use the advanced magnetic flux vector control. third party's motor.4kW or more) or Mitsubishi's constanttorque motor (SF-JRCA 200V class 4 poles. 9999 0 to . SF-JRC) or if the wiring distance is long. 81 to select the advanced magnetic flux vector control. write and copy the motor constants tuned by the offline auto tuning. • Offline auto tuning can be performed with the load connected. ! Offline auto tuning Automatically measures the motor constants used for advanced magnetic flux vector control. (As the load is smaller. the motor-only rotation mode should be selected. ! The offline tuning data (motor constants) can be copied to another inverter with the PU (FR-DU04/ FR-PU04).) • For the offline auto tuning. Parameter Number 82 83 84 90 91 92 93 94 96 Factory Setting 9999 200V/400V* 60Hz 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 Setting Range 0 to . you can use the offline auto tuning to run the motor with the optimum operation characteristics. 1. you can perform the offline auto tuning operation to calculate motor constants automatically. ! Offline auto tuning is made valid only when other values than "9999" are set in Pr. 80 and Pr. 9999 0 to 1000V 50 to 120Hz 0 to . 9999 0 to . 9999 0 to . you can select either the motor non-rotation mode or rotation mode. Note that when making selection for the online auto tuning. 101 Remarks 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 0: No tuning * The inverter of 400V voltage class is factory-set to 400V. Tuning accuracy does not change if inertia is large. ! If the motor used is not Mitsubishi's standard motor (SF-JR 0.4kW to 55kW) (e. 0.

. • Standard motor.... Tuning without motor running.......... the motor may run slightly....... 81........ Therefore... Remove it before starting tuning. exciting noise is generated..... 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay" value to the rated current at the operating voltage/frequency.. 80 and Pr................. 96... Note: Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed when the reactor or surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is connected between the inverter and motor. note the following: 1) Torque may not be enough during tuning............... 81)......... 71 = "13" • Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1......... Tuning with motor running........ 4) Set the rated motor frequency (Hz) in Pr. • For setting of "1" .... • For setting of "101" .... Pr.. 9.... 96... • Refer to the parameter details list and set the following parameters: 1) Set "1" or "101" in Pr......... When the standard motor has more than one rated value.. 71 = "3" • Constant-torque motor ..... set the values given on the motor plate... 3) The brake is open........ It takes about 25 seconds until tuning completes....... 80.. When "101" (offline auto tuning with motor running) is set in Pr.............. Special motors such as high-slip motor and high-speed motor cannot be tuned. make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs. set 200V/60Hz or 400V/60Hz.......4kW or more) The maximum frequency is 120Hz...PARAMETERS <Operating conditions> • • • • • The motor is connected.... or before tuning... This instruction must be followed especially for vertical lift applications............ At this time..... 71........ After tuning is finished....... Pr.. Pr.... • If "1" (tuning without motor running) is set in Pr..... set the Pr. In these parameters... tuning performance is unaffected... The motor rotates at 60Hz....... 2) Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr. select the advanced magnetic flux vector control. 5) Select the motor using Pr... 4 111 .... 71 = "23" Note: 1..................... 84.. fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake..............5kW (2HP) or less) .......... (0......... Pr......... Pr... The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity..... Note that if the motor runs slightly............. 2....... 83.......... 84 are only displayed when the advanced magnetic flux vector control is selected (Pr. It takes about 40 seconds until tuning completes....... 84 setting) without problem... 83 and Pr... 3) Set the rated motor voltage (V) in Pr.. 2) The motor may be run at nearly its rated frequency (Pr... 96.. <Setting> (1) Parameter setting • Using Pr. 4) No external force is applied to rotate the motor..

) Offline auto tuning is not performed.5kW (2HP) or less) Standard motor Auto tuning read or change setting Constant-torque motor enabled Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P standard motor (1. switch on the run command. Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running. STF. 9999 9999 0 to 100% 0 1 101 Description Set the rated motor current (A). MRS. 112 . 5. When "101" is set in Pr. L3〉) of the inverter. Note: 1. A.5kW (2HP) or less).5kW (2HP) or less) Standard motor Star connection Direct input of Constant-torque motor motor constants Standard motor enabled Delta connection Constant-torque motor Standard motor Direct input of Star connection Constant-torque motor motor constants and offline auto Standard motor Delta connection tuning Constant-torque motor Set the rated motor voltage (V). 2. STR • Output signals RUN. L2. C 4. T 〈L1. The electronic overcurrent protection characteristics are also selected simultaneously. Note: 1. IPF. Offline auto tuning is performed with motor running. AM. 96. Set the rated motor frequency (Hz). Select "101" to increase tuning accuracy. OH. • For external operation. Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for standard motor Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for standard motor 5-point flexible V/F characteristics Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P standard motor (1. OL. To force tuning to end STOP key to end. During offline auto tuning. RT. When executing offline auto tuning. 3. electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics for advanced magnetic flux vector control Standard motor Constant-torque motor Select "offline auto tuning setting" Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P standard motor (1. give the operation command after switching on the main circuit power supply (R. (2) Tuning execution • For PU operation. 83 84 90 91 92 93 94 96 (Note 2) Tuning data (Values measured by offline auto tuning are set automatically. the following I/O signals are only valid: • Input signals STOP. B. 9999 0 to .PARAMETERS $ Parameter details Parameter Number 9 Setting 0 to 500A 0 1 2 20 3 13 23 71 (Note 1) 4 14 24 5 15 6 16 7 17 8 18 0 to 1000V 50 to 120Hz 0 to . press the FWD or REV key. RES. S. 2. 9999 0 to . • Switch on the MRS or RES signal or press the RESET • Switch off the tuning start command or make a forced stop. 9999 0 to . FM. Special caution should be exercised when a sequence has been designed to open the mechanical brake with the RUN signal. guard against hazards because the motor rotates. CS.

For external operation. No connection with motor will result in 93 error. 113 . press the STOP RESET 4 key. Tuning in progress 2 102 3.) 3) When tuning was ended due to an error. (Without this operation. Error Display 9 91 92 93 Error Cause Inverter trip Current limit (stall prevention) function was activated. (Motor constants have not been set. 4) Error display definitions. Setting Displayed value 1 101 2. This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the ordinary indication. Increase acceleration/deceleration time.PARAMETERS (3) Monitoring the offline tuning status When the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used. Calculation error Remedy Re-set. the Pr. 156. Offline auto tuning did not end normally. Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage. "92" or "93" is displayed.. Setting 2. Completion 3 103 4. For PU operation. Error-activated end 9 • Reference: Offline auto tuning time (factory setting) Offline Auto Tuning Setting 1: No-rotation mode Time Approximately 25 seconds Approximately 40 seconds (Offline auto tuning time varies with acceleration and deceleration time settings as indicated below: Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time + deceleration time + approximately 30 seconds) 2: Rotation mode (4) Ending the offline auto tuning 1) Confirm the Pr. • Forced end . Error-activated end 1 STOP 2 PU Display 101 STOP PU TUNE 102 PU STF FWD TUNE 103 COMPLETION STF STOP PU TUNE 9 ERROR STF STOP PU • Operation panel (FR-DU04) display (For inverter trip) 1. • Error-activated end: "9". Completion TUNE 3 COMPLETION STF STOP PU 4. switch off the start signal (STF or STR). 96 value is displayed during tuning on the main monitor as shown below. next operation cannot be done. Check the motor wiring and re-set. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used. Tuning in progress TUNE PU STF FWD 3. only the same numerical value as on the PU is displayed: • Parameter unit (FR-PU04) main monitor (For inverter trip) 1. Set "1" in Pr.) Reset the inverter and start tuning all over again. • Normal end: "3" or "103" is displayed. "91".. "8" is displayed. Inverter output voltage reached 75% of rated value. 96 value. 2) When tuning ended normally.

... 9999 0 to ****. the motor runs in forward (reverse) rotation. 90 to Pr..... 71 = "24" 2. 5.... offline auto tuning was not brought to a normal end.. (Note 1) Parameter Number Name Motor exciting current Motor constant R1 Motor constant R2 Motor constant L1 Motor constant L2 Motor constant X Setting Range Setting Increments Factory Setting 82 90 91 92 93 94 0 to ****......... 90 to Pr. Return the Pr.. When the offline auto tuning is used in vertical lift application.. 71 = "14" • Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1.. 9999 0 to ****... 2. Therefore.... 94) can be displayed.) Reset the inverter and restart tuning. e. Note: 1. 114 ... or the motor constants are set without the offline auto tuning data being used... $ To utilize or change the offline auto tuning data <Operating procedure> 1......... 81 settings are other than "9999". 9999 0 to ****...... Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode.. the tuning is forced to end and the DC dynamic brake is started upon input of the MRS signal. (The motor constants are not yet set. the data measured in the offline auto tuning is read and utilized or changed.PARAMETERS 5) When tuning was forced to end A forced end occurs when tuning is forced to end by pressing the signal (STF or STR) during tuning.... 82) and motor constants (Pr... Though the parameter values of other than Pr. 80 and Pr.... STOP RESET key or turning off the start CAUTION Note that the motor may start running suddenly.... 9999 0 to ****.... they are parameters for manufacturer setting and shall not be changed. When "8888" is set in Pr..... 71: • Standard motor.......g.... 90 to Pr... 9999 0 to ****. it may drop due to insufficient torque............ read the following parameters and set desired values....5kW (2HP) or less) Pr..... 4. Pr........... Pr.... retry is ignored.......... 94) may be set as desired in either of two ways. a lifter... After power is restored.... 11....... In the parameter setting mode.... 94 can be displayed......) 3. Set "801" in Pr.. the parameter values of the motor exciting current (Pr.. 77 setting to the original value.. 71 = "4" • Constant-torque motor .. Set any of the following values in Pr. the inverter goes into the ordinary operation mode..... <Setting the motor constants as desired> The motor constants (Pr... An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error...... The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data is held until the offline auto tuning is performed again.. 77. 82 and Pr.. (Only when the Pr... 3... 9999 1 1 1 1 1 1 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 4. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz...... In this case. when STF (STR) is on. Note that if an error retry has been set..

90 to Pr. 94) can be displayed. As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****). 81 settings are other than "9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected). Though the parameter values of other than Pr. 81 settings are other than "9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected). confirm which motor constant unit is used. 90 value When Pr. 9999 0 to 500Ω. Pr.) $ To set the motor constants without using the offline auto tuning data The Pr. Set "801" in Pr. Set any of the following values in Pr. 90. Set "9999" in Pr. 71 to use the constants measured in the offline auto tuning.8. 14 or 24" in Pr. 84: Parameter Number Name Setting Range Setting Increments Factory Setting 84 Rated motor frequency 50 to 120Hz 0. 93 motor constants in [Ω] <Operating procedure> 1. (Only when the Pr. the parameter values of the motor constants (Pr. 3. 81 settings are other than "9999". 90 is displayed "2516". 94 can be displayed. 3. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor). 90 to Pr. Return the Pr. 77. 9999 0 to 10Ω. 92 and Pr.01Ω 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 4 4. 90 to Pr. 80 and Pr. refer to the following setting example when making setting: Setting example: To slightly increase Pr. 2. 9999 0. 9999 0 to 10Ω. Pr. Set "9999" in Pr.01Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 Note: 1. simple addition of a given value to the displayed value has no significance.001Ω 0. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor). 92 and Pr. 90 to Pr. 80 and Pr. 71 and change the motor constants to change the values measured in the offline auto tuning. advanced magnetic flux vector control cannot be exercised normally.001Ω 0. 94 values may only be read when the Pr. Set "4.e.05=2641. 71.) 3. they are parameters for manufacturer setting and shall not be changed. 4. 5.001Ω 0. 94 values may only be read when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 82 and Pr. 90 to Pr. 9999 0 to 10Ω. Before starting operation. in Pr. 71: Star Connection Motor 5 15 Delta Connection Motor 6 16 Setting Standard motor Constant-torque motor 2. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. i.001Ω 0. "13" (constant-torque motor) or "23" (Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4P (1.5kW (2HP) or less)) in Pr.PARAMETERS Note: 1. 115 . read the following parameters and set desired values: Parameter Number Name Motor constant R1 Motor constant R2 Motor constant X1 Motor constant X2 Motor constant X Setting Range Setting Increments Factory Setting 90 91 92 93 94 0 to 10Ω. In the parameter setting mode. 2. Hence. If "star connection" is mistaken for "delta connection" or vice versa during setting of Pr. 93 motor constants may either be entered in [Ω] or in [mH]. set 2642. Set "3" (standard motor). ! To enter the Pr. 77 setting to the original value. Refer to the following table and set Pr. 2516×1. 90 to Pr.

. 81 settings are other than "9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected)..001Ω 0.. the motor conditions are tuned rapidly at the start. After setting the Pr. 95 "online auto tuning selection" Related parameters Pr... 4. 77 setting to the original value.... Data must be calculated. 90 to Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr.. 84 "rated motor frequency" Pr......... 80 and Pr... (Only when the Pr...... Set "801" in Pr. 95) Pr........ 71 = "20" 2....... 93 motor constants in [mH] <Operating procedure> 1.....1mH 0.... 95... 96 "auto tuning setting/status" By online auto tuning. 2.... Though the parameter values of other than Pr.. 94) can be displayed.90 to Pr. 116 ..39 Online auto tuning selection (Pr......... 81 settings are other than "9999"......... 9999 0 to 1000mH.. 83 "rated motor voltage" Pr. perform the offline auto tuning........ the parameter values of the motor constants (Pr.. 81 values. In the parameter setting mode...... Pr....... 90 to Pr... 9999 0 to 100%...... 5.. 71 = "1" • Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1... 71 = "0" • Constant-torque motor .... 94 can be displayed.... Pr........PARAMETERS ! To enter the Pr... 90 to Pr... 90 to Pr...... 9999 0 to 50Ω... Pr.. Set any of the following values in Pr...2.. 71: • Standard motor.. This enables precise operation unaffected by motor temperatures and steady high-torque operation down to super-low speed. read the following parameters and set desired values: Parameter Number 90 91 92 93 94 Name Motor constant R1 Motor constant R2 Motor constant L1 Motor constant L2 Motor constant X Setting Range 0 to 50Ω. Pr.. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor)....) 3.. 71 "applied motor" Pr.. 80... Return the Pr........... ! Online auto tuning Use this function when steady high-torque operation is required for low-speed operation under advanced magnetic flux vector control. 89 "speed control gain" Pr. they are parameters for manufacturer setting and shall not be changed. 9999 Setting Increments 0.... • Before starting the online auto tuning. 77. 80 and Pr... 94 values may only be read when the Pr.. 92 and Pr. Pr....001Ω 0..01Hz Factory Setting 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 Note: 1.1% Factory Setting 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 4.. 9999 0 to 1000mH.. 84: Parameter Number 84 Name Rated motor frequency Setting Range 50 to 120Hz Setting Increments 0.5kW (2HP) or less) ... select online auto tuning with Pr.. Refer to the following table and set Pr. 94 (motor constants) Pr.... 80 and Pr..1mH 0.. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 89 " Refer to Pr.. Set "9999" in Pr.....

when MRS is input. 4 Pr. 96 value and make sure that its setting is "3 or 103" (offline auto tuning complete). it overrides the online auto tuning. When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected.) <Operating procedure> 1) Read the Pr. 79 = 5). Before starting the operation of this function. examine the use of a brake sequence for brake opening timing at the start. 2. For use in vertical lift application. enough torque is not provided during that period.PARAMETERS Parameter Number 95 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0.4kW and 55kW) Number of motor poles 9 71 80 81 4) Give the run command in the PU or external operation mode. The RUN signal switches on at a start. If the period between inverter stop and restart is within 4 seconds. 13) value. the online auto tuning is not activated. always execute the offline auto tuning once more. • Offline auto tuning should be carried out with "101" (motor running) set in Pr. 4. 9. 8. The online auto tuning is invalid for programmed operation or jog operation. e. 6. if the set frequency is lower than the starting frequency (Pr. 7. 5. Therefore. 96 and with the motor disconnected from the load. (The motor may be connected with inertia load. make sure that the following parameter values have been set: Parameter Number Description (Used as either the rated motor current or electronic overcurrent protection parameter) Applied motor Motor capacity (down to one rank lower. 3. the online auto tuning is not activated. between 0. or during an inverter error. Zero current detection and output current detection are also valid during the online auto tuning. note that the load may drop with gravity. Though the tuning ends in about a maximum of 500ms after a start. 96 " Refer to Pr. Note: 1. 117 . 82. The offline auto tuning is also required for use of the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR) or constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA). 2) Set "1" in Pr. If any of the inverter starting conditions are not satisfied.g. The RUN signal is not output during the online auto tuning. When programmed operation is selected (Pr. 3) Before starting operation. 1 Remarks 1: Online auto tuning <Operating conditions> • Data required for online auto tuning is calculated in offline auto tuning. the online auto tuning is invalid and is not executed. the online auto tuning is executed but operation will not reflect the tuning results. For a restart during deceleration or DC dynamic brake operation. 95 to select the online auto tuning.

9999 0 to 1000V 0 to 400Hz. 19) Related parameters Pr. 71. Set "2" (V/F 5-point flexible characteristic). 19 "base frequency voltage" Pr. 19. 9999 0 to 1000V 0 to 400Hz. 60 "intelligent mode selection" Pr. V/F4 and V/F5 in the corresponding parameters. V/F2. 101 "V/F1 (first frequency voltage)" Pr. 71 "applied motor" Pr. These functions are not activated when any of "1 to 8" is set in Pr. ! Desired V/F characteristics can be set by presetting V/F1 (first frequency voltage/first frequency). Parameter Number 19 60 71 Description Set the rated motor voltage. 47 "second V/F (base frequency)" Pr. This function is not activated if its value is "9999" and "8888" (factory setting). 108 "V/F5 (fifth frequency)" Pr. 106 "V/F4 (fourth frequency)" Pr. 60 and Pr. 19. Pr. Parameter Number 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 Factory Setting 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 Setting Range 0 to 400Hz. 109) Pr. V/F4 V/F5 V/F1 Boost value (Pr.PARAMETERS 4. 107 "V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage)" Pr. 9999 0 to 1000V Voltage Base frequency voltage (Pr.40 V/F control frequency (voltage) (Pr. 105 "V/F3 (third frequency voltage)" Pr. 100 "V/F1 (first frequency)" Pr. V/F3. 71 and a value other than 9999 in Pr. 60. 118 . 104 "V/F3 (third frequency)" Pr. 102 "V/F2 (second frequency)" Pr. 9999 0 to 1000V 0 to 400Hz. 109 "V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage)" You can make a dedicated V/F pattern by using V/F (frequency Voltage/Frequency) control to set V/F characteristics from the start to the basic frequency and basic voltage as desired. Set "0" (ordinary operation mode). 103 "V/F2 (second frequency voltage)" Pr. 100 to Pr. 0) V/F2 V/F3 Frequency Base frequency (Pr. 113 "third V/F (base frequency)" Remarks Set "2" in Pr. 3) 0 V/F characteristic <Setting> (1) Confirm the settings of Pr. 9999 0 to 1000V 0 to 400Hz.2.

100 to Pr. Pr. 115 " Refer to Pr. 121 "number of communication retries" Pr. (When Pr. Pr. CR/LF (presence/absence selectable) Selected between presence (even/odd) or absence Present Selectable between presence or absence 4 Communication specifications 119 . 60 is selected. 71. Pr. 6. 4. Pr. Note: 1. etc. 113 " Refer to Pr. Pr. 114. 3. If "2" is set in Pr. 112 " Refer to Pr. ! The motor can be run from the PU connector of the inverter using RS-485 communication. 117 to Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" Pr. Pr. 124. parameter setting. 42. 19 settings. 117 "station number" Pr. 113 do not function. Pr.) 5. 71 cannot be set to "2" (5-point flexible V/F characteristic). 47 and Pr. Pr. If the set frequencies are the same. 120 "parity check presence/absence" Pr. 118 "communication speed" Pr. 342) Pr. its point is ignored. When "2" is set in Pr. 119 "stop bit length" Pr. can be done efficiently. 111 " Refer to Pr. 19 must be set. 48. 116 " Refer to Pr. 110. 3 and Pr. 109. Pr. Pr. Communication specifications Conforming standard Number of inverters connected Communication speed Control protocol Communication method Character system Stop bit length Terminator Parity check Check system Sumcheck Waiting time setting RS-485 1:N (maximum 32 inverters) Selected between 19200. The frequency voltage setting should be equal to or less than the Pr. It does not function for advanced magnetic flux vector control. 3 "base frequency". 7. 4. • The setting must satisfy the following relationship: F1≠F2≠F3≠F4≠F5≠Pr. 122 "communication check time interval" Pr. the electronic overcurrent protection is calculated for a standard motor. 2. If any frequency setting is "9999". 342 "E2PROM write selection" Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and personal computer.PARAMETERS (2) Set the desired frequencies and voltages in Pr. 124 "CR LF presence/absence selection" Pr. a write error occurs. 9600 and 4800bps Asynchronous Half-duplex ASCII (7 bits/8 bits) selectable Selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits. Using the inverter setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP-WE (or -WJ for Japanese version)). monitoring. The V/F 5-point flexible characteristic functions for V/F control only.41 Computer link operation (Pr. The V/F 5-point flexible characteristic does not function when Pr.2. 0. Pr. 19 = "9999". 71. 3.

set any value other than 0 in Pr. the inverter will come to an alarm stop. 1. Therefore the parameter values available when power is switched on again are those stored 2 previously in E PROM. REMARKS For computer link operation. After you have changed the communication-related parameters. 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps Stop bit length 1 bit Stop bit length 2 bits Stop bit length 1 bit Stop bit length 2 bits Absent Odd parity present Even parity present Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of data receive error. During a communication error (H0 to H5). 1.PARAMETERS ! For the data codes of the parameters. 117 118 119 120 121 Number of communication retries 9999 (65535) 0 0. 9999 0. 122 "communication check time interval". refer to the data code list in the appendices. Without CR • LF With CR With CR • LF When parameter write is performed from the computer. data transfer cannot be made. 192 Data length 8 0. 9999 0. set the value "8888" as 65520 (HFFF0) and the value "9999" as 65535 (HFFFF). 1 Data length 7 10. 342 to choose write to RAM.8s. If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time. <Setting> To make communication between the personal computer and inverter. Set with communication data. the inverter will come to an alarm stop. If initial setting is not made or there is a setting fault. 0. When changing parameter values frequently. parameters are written to RAM. Note: After making the initial setting of the parameters. set "1" in Pr. If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value. Parameter Number 117 118 119 120 121 122* 123 124 342 Factory Setting 0 192 1 2 1 0 <9999> 9999 1 0 Setting Range 0 to 31 48. powering off the inverter clears the parameter values that have been changed. 2 The Pr. 2 0 to 10. the minor fault signal (LF) is switched on. 342 " E PROM write selection" setting is also valid when the communication option is fitted. No communication Set the communication check time [s] interval. 11 0. At this time. parameters are written to 2 E PROM. 1 * When making communication. 9999 0 to 150ms. When parameter write is performed from the computer. Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer. Allocate the used terminal with any of Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection). Parameter Number Description Station number Communication speed Stop bit length/data length Parity check presence/ absence Setting 0 to 31 48 96 192 8 bits 7 bits 0 1 2 0 to 10 0 1 10 11 Description Station number specified for communication from the PU connector. the inverter will not come to an alarm stop. If a communication error occurs. 96. the communication specifications must be set to the inverter initially. the inverter can be coasted to a stop by MRS or RES input.1 to 999. 190 to Pr.8 9999 0 to 150ms 9999 0 1 2 0 1 122 123 124 Communication check time interval Waiting time setting CR • LF presence/ absence selection E PROM write selection 2 342* * When you have set write to RAM. always reset the inverter. communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset. 120 . 2 0.1 to 999. Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and response.

(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows: No. the inverter returns “reply data 3)” to the computer again. Inverter data processing time No error* Reply data from the (Request accepted) inverter (Data 1) is checked With error for error) (request rejected) Computer processing delay time No error* Answer from (No inverter computer in response processing) to reply data 3) (Data 3) is checked With error. execute retry operation from the user program. 1) Data format types (1) Communication request data from computer to inverter [Data format] Format A *3 ENQ 1 *3 ENQ 1 *3 ENQ 1 Inverter station number 2 3 *5 Instruction Waiting code time 4 5 6 7 8 Data 9 10 Sum check 11 12 *4 13 ←Number of characters Format A' Inverter station number 2 3 *5 Instruction Waiting code time 4 5 6 7 Data 8 Sum check 7 8 Sum check 9 10 *4 11 ←Number of characters [Data read] Format B Inverter station number 2 3 *5 Instruction Waiting code time 4 5 6 *4 9 ←Number of characters 121 . *2. Inverter outputs 3) for error) again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting. On receipt of a data error occurrence. Run Command Running Frequency Parameter Write Inverter Reset Monitoring Parameter Read A’ Present C A Present C A Present C A Absent Absent B Present E E’ F Absent G B Present E 3) D Absent Absent D Absent Absent D Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent F Absent G 4) 5) Absent Absent Absent Absent H H 4 * In the communication request data given from the computer to the inverter. Data is automatically transferred in ASCII between the computer and inverter. (Refer to page 123) (3) Data format Hexadecimal data is used.PARAMETERS <Computer programming> (1) Communication protocol Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the following procedure: Data read Computer ↓ Inverter Inverter ↓ Computer (Data flow) (Data flow) 1) 2) 3) *2 4) 5) Time *1 Data write *1. 1) 2) Operation Communication request is sent to the inverter in accordance with the user program. If a data error is detected and a retry must be made. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting. 10ms or more is also required after "no data error (ACK)".

2. 3. When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter. create the communication request data with no "waiting time" in the data format. operation.PARAMETERS Note: 1. codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. *4 indicates the CR or LF code. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. setting must also be made from the inverter according to the computer. 124. Hence. The inverter station numbers may be set between H00 and H1F (stations 0 and 31) in hexadecimal. monitoring) given by the computer to the inverter. the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate. 3) Instruction code Specify the processing request (e. 123 "waiting time setting" ≠ 9999. In this case. *3 indicates the control code. *5: When Pr. (Refer to page 218) 122 . Also. the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using Pr. (The number of characters decreases by 1.) 2) Reply data from inverter to computer during data write [No data error detected] Format C *3 ACK 1 Inverter station number 2 3 *4 4 ←Number of characters [Data error detected] Format D *3 NAK 1 Inverter station number 2 3 Error code 4 *4 5 ←Number of characters 3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read [No data error detected] Inverter station number 2 3 4 [Data error detected] Format E *3 STX 1 *3 STX 1 Read data 5 6 *3 ETX 6 7 *3 ETX 8 Sum check 9 10 *4 11 Format F Format E' Inverter station number 2 3 Read data 4 5 Sum check 7 8 *4 9 ←Number of characters *3 NAK 1 Inverter station number 2 3 Error code 4 *4 5 4) Send data from computer to inverter during data read [No data error detected] Format G *3 ACK 1 Inverter station number 2 3 *4 4 ←Number of characters [Data error detected] Format H *3 NAK 1 Inverter station number 2 3 *4 4 ←Number of characters (4) Data definitions 1) Control codes Signal STX ETX ENQ ACK LF CR NAK ASCII Code H02 H03 H05 H06 H0A H0D H15 Description Start of Text (Start of data) End of Text (End of data) Enquiry (Communication request) Acknowledge (No data error detected) Line Feed Carriage Return Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected) 2) Inverter station number Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.g. (Refer to page 218) 4) Data Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. 4.

. 9999. 1 bit is required for the start bit.PARAMETERS 5) Waiting time Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the computer and the transmission of reply data. 9 bits Maximum total number of bits .. 1 = 10ms.g. (The number of characters is decreased by 1. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments (e. create the communication request data with no "waiting time" in the data format. 12 bits 4 = Data sending time (s) 123 . Computer ↓ Inverter Inverter ↓ Computer Inverter data processing time =waiting time + data check time (set value×10ms) (12ms) Note : When Pr. Minimum total number of bits .) 6) Response time Data sending time (refer to the following calculation expression) Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time (12ms) (set value 10ms) Computer Inverter Inverter Computer ACK STX 10ms or more required ENQ 10ms or more required Data sending time (refer to the following calculation expression) Data sending time (refer to the following calculation expression) Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time (set value 10ms) (12ms) Computer Inverter Inverter Computer ENQ 10ms or more required Data sending time (refer to the following calculation expression) [Data sending time calculation expression] 1 Communication specification Number of data characters (Total number of bits) Communication speed (Refer to page 121) (See below) (bps) Communication specification Name Number of Bits 1 bit Stop bit length 2 bits 7 bits Data length 8 bits Yes 1 bit Parity check No 0 bits In addition to the bits in the above table. 2 = 20ms)... 123 "waiting time setting" .

3. 99 values and access to Pr. For monitoring. H01: Pr. Without the computer's command. 100 to Pr. Any data communication. design the program to cause the computer to provide a data read request as required. 200 to Pr. monitoring. (Example1) Computer→Inverter ENQ Station number 0 ASCII code→ H05 1 Instruction code E 1 *Waiting time Data 0 7 H37 A H41 D Sum check code F 4 H34 ←Binary code 1 H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H44 H46 ↓ H H H H H H H H H 30 + 31 + 45 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 37 + 41 + 44 H =1F4 Sum *When Pr. H03: Pr. 199 and Pr. Pr. 124 .) (Example2) Inverter→Computer STX Station number Read data ETX Sum check code 0 ASCII code→ 1 1 7 7 0 3 0 ←Binary code H02 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30 ↓ H H H H H H 30 + 31 + 31 + 37 + 37 + 30 H =130 Sum 8) Error code If any error is found in the data received by the inverter. 100 to Pr. 0 to Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" ≠‚ 9999. its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code. 990.991 value is accessible. 2. 905 values are accessible. Data for link parameter expansion setting differs as indicated below between access to Pr. 342 values are accessible. 0 to Pr. (Refer to page 128) Note: 1. 300 to Pr. is started when the computer gives a communication request. the inverter does not return any data. 900 to Pr. (The number of characters is decreased by 1. H02: Pr. 231 and Pr.g. 905: Instruction Code Read Link parameter expansion setting Write HFF H7F Data H00: Pr. the inverter will not accept that data. When the data from the computer has an error.PARAMETERS 7) Sum check code The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data. 232 to Pr. therefore. create the communication request data with no "waiting time" in the data format. 96 values are accessible. H09: Pr. run command. Pr. 160 to Pr. 158. e. 287 values are accessible.

is always requested by the computer. the inverter will not return data without the computer's request. If communication is halted due to signal cable breakage. I. 1: COMST1.. design the program so that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring. Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation. The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off. This should be fully noted. 1) 90 A=ASC (A$) 100 S=S+A 110 NEXTI 120 D$=CHR$ (&H5) +D$+RIGHT$ (HEX$ (S) . the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E. 125 . E. ER) ON/OFF setting : Interrupt definition at data receive : Interrupt enable Transmission data setting Sum code calculation : Addition of control and sum codes Data transmission Interrupt data receive : Interrupt occurrence at data receive 50 to 140 Transmission data processing !Data setting !Sum code calculation !Data transmission 1000 Interrupt to 1040 Receive data processing !Data import !Screen display 4 CAUTION When the inverter's communication check time interval is not set. 1. 1 30 ON COM (1) GOSUB*REC 40 COM (1) ON 50 D$= "01FB10002" 60 S=0 70 FOR I=1 TO LEN (D$) 80 A$=MID$ (D$. such as operation command or monitoring. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc. When the communication check time interval has elapsed. Hence. 2) 130 PRINT#1. Data communication is not started automatically but is made only when the computer provides a communication request. the inverter does not detect such a fault. 2) Since any data communication. etc.PUE). 3) Program example When the operation mode is switched to communication operation 10 OPEN "COM1: 9600. #1) 1040 RETURN General flowchart Line number 10 to 40 I/O file initial setting Initial setting of I/O file : Communication file opening : Circuit control signal (RS. 8.PARAMETERS (5) Instructions for the program 1) When the operation mode is switched to communication operation. HD" AS #1 20 COMST1. the inverter cannot be stopped. as required. 2. D$ 140 GOTO 50 1000 *REC 1010 IF LOC (1)=0 THEN RETURN 1020 PRINT "RECEIVE DATA" 1030 PRINT INPUT$ (LOC (1) . 2. computer fault etc. interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazard.

No.01A increments H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.01kW Write HF3 Monitoring H0000 to HFFFF: Two most recent alarm definitions Read data: [Example] H30A0 (Previous alarm .. 3 E.1% Read Special monitor selection No.] H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.1% 2 digits H03 H05 H06 H07 Output voltage Frequency setting Running speed Motor torque 0. 1 E.. THT) (Most recent alarm . set the instruction codes and data and start communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.01Hz 1 r/min 0. 144 = 2 to 10... 102 to 110.. OPT) b15 b8b7 b0 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Previous alarm (H30) Most recent alarm (HA0) Alarm data Data H00 Description No alarm 0C1 0C2 0C3 0V1 0V2 0V3 THT THM FIN IPF UVT OLT BE Data H80 H81 H90 HA0 HA1 HA2 HA3 HB0 HB1 HB2 HC1 HC2 HD1 HD2 Description GF LF OHT OPT OP1 OP2 OP3 PE PUE RET CTE P24 OSD ECT Data HD5 HD6 HD7 HD8 HD9 HDA HDB HF1 HF2 HF3 HF6 HF7 Description MB1 MB2 MB3 MB4 MB5 MB6 MB7 E.1V 0.1V 0.01Hz Data H09 Description Regenerative brake Electronic overcurrent protection load factor Output current peak value Converter output voltage peak value Input power Output power Increments 0. 7 Alarm definition H74 to H77 H10 H11 H12 H20 H21 H22 H30 H31 H40 H50 H51 H60 H70 4 digits 126 . Item Read 1 Operation mode Write HFB Instruction Code H7B Description H0000: Communication option operation H0001: External operation H0002: Communication operation (PU connector) H0000: Communication option operation H0001: External operation H0002: Communication operation (PU connector) H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency (hexadecimal) in 0..1V increments H0000 to HFFFF: Monitored data selected by instruction code HF3 H01 to H0E Data Description Output frequency Number of Data Digits 4 digits Output frequency [speed] Output current Output voltage Special monitor H6F 4 digits H70 H71 H72 4 digits 4 digits 4 digits Monitor selection data Increments 0.01Hz increments [Speed (hexadecimal) in r/min increments if Pr.PARAMETERS <Setting items and set data> After completion of parameter setting.. 2 E.01kW 0. H73 H01 H02 Output current 0.01A 0..1% H0B H0C H0D H0E 0..01A H0A 0. 6 E.. 37 = 1 to 9998 or Pr..

180 to Pr. write data to the inverter RAM.. 100 to Pr.. 195 settings. H9669: User clear is made. 991 values are accessible.. H00: Pr. communication-related parameter settings also return to the factory settings. Reads the set frequency (RAM or E PROM). H01: Pr. set the parameters again.* ! × HEC HF3 HFF 4 4 digits ! ! *Pr. 342 values are accessible.. 900 to Pr. 75 value is not cleared. Pr.. 195 values are not cleared. Pr. the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer. 232 to Pr.. 75. Pr. 4 digits 12 Link parameter expansion setting 2 digits Write HFF 127 .00 Hz) To change the set frequency consecutively. 160 to Pr. Stop b7 b0: b1: Forward rotation (STF) b2: Reverse rotation (STR) b3: b4: b5: b6: b7: 2 digits 4 Inverter status monitor H7A b0: Inverter running (RUN) * b1: Forward rotation (STF) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 b2: Reverse rotation (STR) (For example 1) b3: Up to frequency (SU) * b4: Overload (OL) * [Example 1] H02 b5: Instantaneous power . 96 values are accessible. When resuming operation. 9 User clear HFC Communication Pr. Calibration Other Pr. 287 values are accessible. 158 . 190 to Pr. H0000 to H9C40: 0. 199 and Pr. (Instruction code: HED) H9696: Resets the inverter. H9696: Batch clear of alarm history All parameters return to the factory settings. H02: Pr. 990 and Pr. Forward rotation [Example 2] H00 . 0 to Pr. (When plug-in option is fitted) H09: Pr. 300 to Pr. During forward rotation failure (IPF) * [Example 2] H80 b6: Frequency detection (FU) * . 231 and Pr. 200 to Pr. When using the inboard options. As the inverter is reset on start of communication by the computer. H00 to H6C and H80 to HEC parameter values are changed. Calibration Other Pr.PARAMETERS No. 186 and Pr. 10 11 Parameter write Parameter read Read H80 to HE3 H00 to H63 H7F Refer to the data list (Appendix 1) and write and/or read parameter values as required.. Stop due to alarm b7: Alarm occurrence * *The output data depends on the Pr. Any of four different clear operations is performed according to the data. 190 to Pr.* HEC HF3 HFF 2 2 digits 5 Set frequency read 2 (E PROM) Set frequency read (RAM) Set frequency 2 write (E PROM) Set frequency write (RAM) Inverter reset Alarm definition batch clear H6E H6D HEE HED HFD HF4 4 digits 4 digits 6 7 4 digits 4 digits 8 All clear HFC H9696 H9966 H5A5A H55AA ! ! × × ! × × ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 4 digits When all parameter clear is executed for H9696 or H9966.01Hz increments (hexadecimal) H0000 to H9C40: 0. 905 values are accessible. Item Instruction Code b7 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Description b0 0 Number of Data Digits (For example 1) 3 Run command HFA [Example 1] H02 .. H03: Pr. Data Communication Pr.01Hz increments (hexadecimal) (0 ≠ 400. *Pr.

<Error code List> The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in any communication request data form the computer.PARAMETERS Instruction Code Number of Data Digits No.  The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9. New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data.    Data range error    128 .   Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode or during inverter operation.  Does not accept receive data but is not brought to alarm stop.   Does not accept or receive data but is not brought to alarm stop. frequency setting. or CR and LF are not as set in the parameter. HDE to HED) parameter H00: Offset/gain H01: Analog H02: Analog value of terminal 13 Second parameter changing (Code FF = 1) Read H6C 2 digits Write HEC REMARKS Once the HFF. The stop bit length is not as specified. Error Code H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 HA HB HC HD HE HF Item Computer NAK error Parity error Sum check error Protocol error Framing error Overrun error  Character error   Mode error Instruction error code Definition The number of errors consecutively detected in communication request data from the computer is greater than allowed number of retry times. HEC or HF3 instruction code is written. The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data received by the inverter. Data received by the inverter is in the wrong protocol. A to F. HBD to HDA) 6 3 3 B parameter H00: Time Time Minute (Minute) (Second) H01: Time H02: Rotation direction When setting the bias/gain (data code H5E to H6A.    Inverter Operation Brought to an alarm stop (E. Item Description When setting the programmed operation (data code H3D to H5A. control code). but is reset to 0 when the inverter is reset or all clear is performed. The parity check result does not match the specified parity. The specified command does not exist.PUE) if error occurs continuously more than the allowable number of retry times. the set value is held. etc. data receive is not completed within the given time. Invalid data has been specified for parameter write.

(7) Operation at alarm occurrence Operation Mode Fault Location Description Inverter operation Inverter fault Communication error (Communication from PU connector) Communication error (Inboard option) Communication Inverter operation PU connector Communication Inverter operation Communication PU connector Inboard option Inboard option PU connector Inboard option Communication Operation (PU connector) Stop Continued Continued Stop/continued (*5) Stop Continued Continued Continued Stop External Operation Stop Continued Continued Continued Stop Continued Continued Continued Stop Computer link Operation (inboard option used) Stop Continued Continued Continued Stop Continued Stop/continued (*6) Continued Stop 4 (*5) Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to continue) (*6) Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to stop) (8) Communication error Fault Location Communication error (Communication error from PU connector) Option fault (Communication line fault) Communication error (Plug-in option fault) Error Message E.PUE E. 75. the inverter cannot be reset from the computer.OP1 to E. (*3) As set in Pr. 3 129 . 1 to E. (*4) As set in Pr. (*2) At occurrence of RS-485 communication fault. 77.PARAMETERS (6) Communication specifications for RS-485 communication Operation Mode Operation Location Item Run command (start) Running frequency setting Computer user program via PU connector Monitoring Parameter write Parameter read Inverter reset Stop command (*3) Run command Running frequency setting Monitoring Parameter write Parameter read Inverter reset Stop command (*3) Inverter reset Run command Running frequency setting Communication Operation from PU Connector Enable Enable Enable Enable (*4) Enable Enable (*2) Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable (*4) Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable External Operation Disable Enable (Combined operation mode) Enable Disable (*4) Enable Enable (*2) Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable (*4) Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Computer Link Operation (inboard option used) Disable Disable Enable Disable (*4) Enable Enable (*2) Enable Enable (*1) Enable (*1) Enable Enable (*4) Enable Enable (*2) Enable Enable Enable (*1) Enable (*1) Computer user program via inboard option Control circuit terminal (*1) As set in the operation and speed command write parameters.OP3 E.

21 0. 133 setting is used as a set point and the 4 to 20mADC current input signal used as a feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.PARAMETERS 4. air volume or pressure. Parameter Number 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 Factory Setting 10 100% 1s 9999 9999 0% 9999 Setting Range 10. " The voltage input signal (0 to ±5V or 0 to ±10V) or Pr. 9999 Remarks 9999: No proportional control 9999: No integral control 9999: Function invalid 9999: Function invalid 9999: No differential control Related parameters Pr. 133 "PID action set point for PU operation" Pr.42 PID control (Pr. 129 "PID proportional band" Pr. 130 "PID integral time" Pr. 131 "upper limit" Pr. 902 to Pr. 190 to Pr.g. 9999 0 to 100%. 195 (output terminal assignment) Pr.1 to 3600 s. P action Time I action Time PI action Time 130 .00 s. 9999 0 to 100%. 20. 134) Pr. flow rate. e. 905 (frequency setting voltage (current) biases and gains) <Setting> (1) Basic PID control configuration Inverter Deviation Set point x + y Process value PID Kp operation 1 1+ +Td # S Ti # S Manipulated variable fi Drive circuit Motor y IM Kp: Proportional constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time (2) PID action overview 1) PI action A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control action (I) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with time. 11. 132 "lower limit" Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" Pr. 186 (input terminal assignment) Pr.01 to 10. 134 "PID differential time" The inverter can be used to exercise process control. 9999 0 to 100% 0.1 to 1000%. 128 "PID action selection" Pr. 128 to Pr. 180 to Pr. Deviation Set point [Operation example for stepped changes of process value] Process value Note: PI action is the sum of P and I actions.2. 9999 0.

4) Reverse action Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X (set point . and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.process value) is positive.PARAMETERS 2) PD action A combination of proportional control action (P) and differential control action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic. and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative. Set point Deviation Process value Time P action D action Time PD action Time 3) PID action The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both actions for control. [Cooling] + Set point Process value Deviation X<0 X>0 Too cold → fi down Hot → fi up Process value Set point 4 Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency) Deviation Positive Negative $ % % $ Reverse action Forward action 131 . Deviation [Heating] + Set point X<0 Process value X>0 Cold → fi up Hot → fi down Process value Set point 5) Forward action Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X (set point .process value) is negative. Note: The PID action is the sum of P and I and D actions. [Operation example for proportional changes of process value] Note: PD action is the sum of P and D actions.

132 . 192 = 16 Pr. 194 settings. The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications of the detector used. The output signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 193 = 14 Pr.PARAMETERS (3) Wiring example " " " " " Sink logic Pr. 183 = 14 Pr. 191 to Pr. 3. The input signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 194 = 15 NFB Power supply R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 Inverter Motor U V W IM Pump P Forward rotation Reverse rotation PID control selection STF STR RT(Note 3) SD 10 (Note 2) FU OL IPF SE Upper limit Lower limit Forward rotation output Reverse rotation output Output signal common + + + For 2-wire type Detector For 3-wire type Setting potentiometer (Set point setting) Deviation signal 2 5 1 4 (OUT) (COM) (24V) (Process values) 4 ∼ 20mADC 0 24V DC power (Note 1) supply AC1φ 200/220V 50/60Hz Note: 1. 2. 186 settings.

133 Across terminals 1-5 Set the set point (%) in Pr. switch on the X14 signal. 20. 128 = 10. 128. 13 or 15" is set in Pr. Enter the deviation signal calculated externally. When "0. FDN and RL Remarks Set any of "10. 133. Set −10V as −100%. 11. When "2. 21) " To start PID control. 13 or 15" is set in Pr. " Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or into Pr. Item Set point Set point Deviation signal Process value Entry Set 0V as 0% and 5V as 100%. ordinary inverter operation is performed without the PID action being performed. 20 and 21" in Pr. 4. 73 (5V selected for terminal 2). enter it across terminals 1-5. 2. 3. Description When "1. Output Depending on Pr. 128 = 20. 11 or 14" is set in Pr. Pr. 0V as 0% and +5V as +100%. When this signal is off. 4. Common to terminals FUP. 11. At this time. 21) RL SE SE (Pr. 10. Output to indicate that the process value signal exceeded the lower limit value. 1. 73 (10V selected for terminal 1). 12. 133 and enter the process value signal across inverter terminals 4-5. 5. 128. 195 Lower limit output Forward (reverse) rotation direction output Output terminal common (Pr. Across terminals 4-5 4mADC is equivalent to 0% and 20mADC to 100%. Enter the set point for PID control. " When entering the externally calculated deviation signal.PARAMETERS (4) I/O signals Signal X14 Input Terminal Used Depending on Pr. 10. 73 (5V selected for terminal 1). 180 to Pr. Set −5V as −100%. 11. Output to indicate that the process value signal exceeded the upper limit value. 12 or 14" is set in Pr. set "10" or "11" in Pr. 186 2 1 4 FUP FDN 2 1 4 Function PID control selection Set point input Deviation signal input Process value input Upper limit output Description Switch on X14 to select PID control. 3. "Hi" is output to indicate that the output indication of the parameter unit is forward rotation (FWD) or "Low" to indicate that it is reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP). When "0. 0V as 0% and +10V as +100%. 191 to Pr. Open collector output 4 133 . 73 (10V selected for terminal 2). Across terminals 2-5 Set 0V as 0% and 10V as 100%. Enter the 4-20mADC process value signal from the detector. 5.

PARAMETERS
(5) Parameter setting
Parameter Number Setting 10 11 128 20 21 PID action selection Name Description For heating, pressure control, etc. PID reverse action PID forward For cooling, etc. action For heating, pressure control, PID reverse etc. action Process value input (terminal 4) PID forward For cooling, etc. action If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the process value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs. Gain K = 1/proportional band No proportional control Time required for the integral (I) action to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the proportional (P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily. No integral control. Set the upper limit. If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output. (Process value of 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.) No function Set the lower limit. (If the process value goes out of the setting range, an alarm can be output. In this case, the process value of 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.) No function Only valid for the PU command in the PU operation or PU/external combined mode. For external operation, the voltage across 2-5 is the set point. (Pr. 902 value is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 value to 100%.) Time only required for the differential (D) action to provide the same process value as that for the proportional (P) action. As the differential time increases, greater response is made to a deviation change. No differential control. Deviation value signal input (terminal 1)

129

0.1 to 1000%

PID proportional band

9999 130 0.1 to 3600 s 9999 131 0 to 100% 9999 132 0 to 100% 9999 133 0 to 100% PID action set point for PU operation PID differential time Lower limit Upper limit PID integral time

134

0.01 to 10.00 s 9999

(6) Adjustment procedure
Parameter setting Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 128 to Pr. 133.

Terminal setting

Set the I/O terminals for PID control. (Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, Pr. 190 to Pr. 195) Pr. 128 = 10, 11, 20, 21

Switch X14 signal on.

Run

134

PARAMETERS
(7) Calibration example
(A detector of 4mA at 0°C and 20mA at 50°C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25°C under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0-5V).)

START

Determine the set point. Determine the set point of the item to be adjusted.

&&&&&&Set the room temperature to 25°C. Set Pr. 128 and switch on the X14 signal to enable PID control.

Convert the set point into %. Calculate the ratio of the set point to the detector output.

&&&&&&Detector specifications When the detector used has the specifications that 0°C is equivalent to 4mA and 50°C to 50mA, the set point of 25°C is 50% because 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.

Make calibration.

&&&&&&When the set point setting input (0 to 5V) and detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated, make the following calibration*. &&&&&&Set point = 50% Since the specifications of terminal 2 are such that 0% is equivalent to 0V and 100% to 5V, enter 2.5V into terminal 2.

Set the set point. Enter a voltage to across terminals 2-5 according to the set point (%).

Operation Set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and the differential time to a slightly lower value, and switch on the start signal.

&&&&&&For PU operation, set the set point (0 to 100%) in Pr. 133. During operation, set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and set the differential time to a slightly lower value. In accordance with the system operation, reduce the proportional band and integral time and increase the differential time.

Is the process value steady?
No

Yes

Adjust parameters. Set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and set the differential time to a slightly lower value to stabilize the process value.

Optimize parameters. While the process value is steady, the proportional band and integral time may be reduced and the differential time increased throughout the operation.

4

END *When calibration is required, use Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 to calibrate the detector output and set point setting input in the PU mode during an inverter stop.

135

PARAMETERS
<Set point input calibration>
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) to across terminals 2-5. 2. Make calibration using Pr. 902. At this time, enter the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz). 3. Apply the voltage of 100% set point setting (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5. 4. Make calibration using Pr. 903. At this time, enter the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 60Hz).

<Detector output calibration>
1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) to across terminals 4-5. 2. Make calibration using Pr. 904. 3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) to across terminals 4-5. 4. Make calibration using Pr. 905. Note: The frequencies set in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 should be the same as set in Pr. 902 and Pr. 903. The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
[Set point setting] (%) 100 (%) 100 60 [Detection value] Manipulated variable (Hz) [Manipulated variable]

0 0 5 (V)

0 0 4 20 (mA)

0 0 100 Deviation (%)

Note: 1. If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL) signal or jog operation (JOG) signal is entered with the X14 signal on, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation is started. 2. When "20" or "21" is set in Pr. 128, note that the input across inverter terminals 1-5 is added to the set point across terminals 2-5. 3. When "5" (programmed operation mode) is selected for Pr. 79, PID control operation cannot be performed. In this setting, programmed operation is performed. 4. When "6" (switch-over mode) is selected for Pr. 79, PID is made invalid. 5. When "9999" is set in Pr. 22, the stall prevention level is the value entered from terminal 1. To use terminal 1 as the edit input terminal for PID, set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 22. 6. When "1" (online auto tuning) is selected for Pr. 95, PID control is made invalid. 7. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 and/or Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. 8. When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 903. (The Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" settings are also valid.)

136

PARAMETERS

4.2.43 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over function (Pr. 135 to Pr. 139)
Pr. 135 "commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence output terminal selection" Pr. 136 "MC switch-over interlock time" Pr. 137 "start waiting time" Pr. 138 "commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence" Pr. 139 "automatic inverter-commercial power supply switch-over frequency"
The inverter contains a complicated sequence circuit for commercial power supply-inverter operation switchover. Hence, the magnetic contactors for switch-over can be interlocked easily by merely entering the start, stop or automatic switch-over select signal.
Parameter Number 135 136 137 138 139 Factory Setting 0 0.1 s 0.5 s 0 9999 Setting Range 0, 1 0 to 100.0 s 0 to 100.0 s 0,1 0 to 60.0Hz, 9999 9999: No automatic switch-over Remarks

Related parameters Pr. 11 "DC injection brake operation time" Pr. 57 "restart coasting time" Pr. 58 "restart cushion time" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection)

(1) Wiring example
Sink logic, Pr. 185 = 7, Pr. 186 = 6, Pr. 192 = 17, Pr. 193 = 18, Pr. 194 = 19
MC2

NFB

MC1

Inverter R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 R1 〈L11〉 S1 〈L21〉 U V W

× MC3

External thermal relay IM

Note: #This switch-over function is used in the external operation mode. Always connect terminals R1, S1 (L11, L21) to a different power supply (power supply different from the one for MC1) to ensure proper operation. #MC2 and MC3 must be mechanically interlocked.

*1. Note the sequence output terminal capacities. The terminals used depend on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 194 settings.
Signal set in Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 *1 *1 *1 MC3 MC2
MC 1 MC 2 MC 3

4

Inverter start (forward rotation) Inverter-commercial power supply switch-over Operation interlock External thermal relay Reset

SU IPF OL FU SE

Output Terminal Capacity Inverter's open collector outputs (IPF, OL, FU) FR-A5AR (option output)

Permissible Output Terminal Load 24VDC 0.1A 230VAC 0.3A 30VDC 0.3A

STF CS MRS OH *3 RES SD 10 2 5

*2 DC24V

Frequency setting signal

IPF OL FU SE DC 24V

*2. When connecting an AC power supply, connect the FR-A5AR option and use the contact output. When connecting a DC power supply, install the following protective diode. *3. The terminals used depend on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.

137

................. OFF MC Operation (!: ON... 180 to Pr. [-] indicates that MC1 is on........ except for external thermal relay operation) Shorted for inverter operation.. OFF Initialization..... [Unchanged] indicates that the status before signal-on or -off is held.. opened for commercial power supply operation Opened when an inverter fault occurs MC2 Between power supply and motor MC3 Between inverter output and motor <I/O signals> 1) When this function is used (Pr. • MC1 switches off when an inverter fault occurs... reset input acceptance selection can be made using reset selection (Pr.. OFF Inverter operation ON Commercial power supply operation . 190 to Pr. 180 to Pr.. MC2......186 STF (STR) Depending on Pr....... ×: OFF) MC1 MC2 MC3  !  MRS MRS Operation enable/disable selection ! × × ! Unchanged CS Depending on Pr.......... ON Stop. 135 = "1").. ON Motor fault ... neither commercial power supply nor inverter operation can be performed.....PARAMETERS • Roles of the magnetic contactors (MC1. MC3) Magnetic Contactor MC1 Place of Installation Between inverter power supply and Role Normally shorted with the following exception: Opened only when an inverter fault occurs (shorted again by resetting) Shorted for commercial power supply operation... the input signals are switched on-off as indicated below: Signal Terminal Used Function On-Off Commercial power supplyinverter operation enable ..... ON Commercial power supplyinverter operation disable .... MC2 is off and MC3 is off in commercial power supply operation...... STF (STR) only functions when MRS and CS are on........ MC2 is off and MC3 is on in inverter operation and MC1 is on.......... 75).... 2) The output signals are output as follows: Signal MC1 MC2 MC3 Terminal Used Depending on Pr................ • If the MRS signal is not switched on. opened for inverter operation Shorted when an inverter fault occurs (selected with parameter.. • For the RES signal...... • The CS signal only functions when the MRS signal is on. OFF Motor normal . 195 Description MC1's operation signal is output MC2's operation signal is output MC3's operation signal is output 138 ..... ON Normal operation ...186 RES STF (STR) OH RES Inverter-commercial power supply switchover Inverter operation command (invalid for commercial power supply) (Note) External thermal relay input Operating condition initialization ! ! ! ! ! ! × × × ! !  ×  Unchanged !  × × × Unchanged  Note: • In the above MC Operation field.. OFF Forward (reverse) rotation ...............

137 MC3 start commencement (start waiting time) C: Pr. 138 and Pr. 136 MC switch-over interlock time B: Pr. 135 setting is other than "0". inverter operation is automatically switched to commercial power supply operation (MC2: ON. Switch off the inverter operation command signal (STF or STR) to switch commercial power supply operation to inverter operation and decelerate the motor to a stop. Stops inverter operation and coasts the motor. When an inverter fault occurs. 190 to Pr. (Pr.) Sequence output is provided. 136. 57 (reset time) D: Pr.D Each timer A: Pr. If the inverter's run command value is then lowered to or below the switch-over frequency.5 s) value than the time from when the ON signal enters inverter operation MC3 to when it actually switches on. Pr. Pr. Off for inverter fault only Operation command Actual operation (Note) Each timer A A. 139 settings are ignored. 137.B C. When the motor started by the inverter reaches the automatic switch-over frequency. Automatic switch-over is not done. 2. inverter operation is automatically switched to commercial power supply operation. 195 (output terminal function selection). Set a slightly longer (about 0. open collector outputs are provided.0 s 0 to 100. The motor is started and run by the inverter up to the set frequency. inverter operation is switched to commercial power supply operation. and when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the set frequency. Pr. 58 (switch-over cushion time) Coast to stop Operating status (Motor speed) Inverter operation Commercial power supply stop Coasting Coasting Inverter operation Stop Inverter operation Commercial power supply operation 139 . 135 1 136 137 0 to 100. relay outputs are provided from the FR-A5AR (option). When they are not assigned.3 to 0.0Hz 9999 Note: 1. Start and stop are controlled by the inverter operation command (STF or STR). commercial power supply operation is not automatically switched to inverter operation. The inverter stops when an inverter fault occurs (both MC2 and MC3 switch off). D A A B C.PARAMETERS (2) Parameter setting Parameter Number Name Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence output terminal selection MC switch-over interlock time Start waiting time Setting 0 Description Sequence output is not provided. Stops inverter operation and automatically switches inverter operation to commercial power supply operation. When MC1 to MC3 are assigned with Pr. Sets the MC2 and MC3 operation interlock time. 139 functions when Pr. MC3: OFF).0 s 0 138 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence 1 139 Automatic invertercommercial power supply switch-over frequency 0 to 60. <Operation sequence> ON Power OFF ON: Operation enable OFF: Operation disable ON: Forward rotation OFF: Stop ON: Inverter operation OFF: Commercial power supply operation Operation interlock ON (MRS) OFF Inverter operation command ON (STF) OFF Inverter-commercial power supply switch-over ON (CS) OFF 4 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over ON (MC1) OFF Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over ON (MC3) OFF Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over ON (MC2) OFF Note: Indicates a delay until MC switches on.

7. 57 = "0.0 s" # Pr. 149 ' Refer to Pr.PARAMETERS (3) Operation procedure 1) Operation procedure for running Operation pattern Switch power on. 180 to Pr. 37. but when the motor run by the commercial power supply was coasted to a stop at the last time. 3. MC2 switches on. 143 ' Refer to Pr. 135 = "1" (inverter's open collector output terminals) # Pr. the motor is switched over to commercial power supply operation. If the Pr.5 s" # Pr. 135 value is other than "0". 136 = "2. 190 to Pr. 137 settings are ignored in the PU operation mode. 8. Pr. MC1 and MC3 switch on. the PU operation interlock function (Pr. Pr. When the Pr. Note that when the STF (STR) signal is switched off. STF and CS signals switch on. the inverter's input terminals (STF. it restarts after the time set in Pr.) Constant-speed operation. 186 and/or Pr. 137 = "1. 140 . Inverter operation is enabled when the MRS. This function is only activated when R1 and S1 are connected to a different power supply (power supply which is not connected to MC1). 6. inverter operation # Pr. When both MC2 and MC3 are off and MC2 or MC3 is then switched on. 29. After MC2 switches off. the other functions may be affected. restart may not function properly. 195.5 s" (Always set this parameter when commercial power supply operation is switched to inverter operation. Pr. commercial power supply operation Deceleration (stop). 144 ' Refer to Pr.) # Pr. MC3 is on when the MRS and CS signals are on and STR is off. commercial power supply operation is performed. 135 setting is other than 0. 5. OH) return to their ordinary functions. (Motor coasts during this period. the motor is decelerated to a stop by the inverter. inverter operation 2) Signal on-off after parameter setting MRS OFF (OFF) OFF→ON CS OFF (OFF) OFF→ON STF OFF (OFF) OFF→ON MC1 OFF→ON (OFF→ON) ON MC2 OFF (OFF) OFF MC3 OFF→ON (OFF→ON) ON After MC3 switches off. MRS. 137 has elapsed. 9. (Motor coasts during this period. MC3 switches on. 135 value is other than "0" in the operation mode other than the above. 148. 4. the Pr. 2. 136 has elapsed.0 s" (Set the value equal to or longer than the time from when MC3 switches on actually until the inverter and motor are connected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. If it is shorter.) Waiting time 4s. CS. 79 = 7) is not activated if it has been set. When the CS signal is switched off. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. When the commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence is selected. This function is only valid in the external operation or PU (speed command) and external (run command) operation mode when the Pr. 136 and Pr. 58 = "0. Set parameters. Pr.) Waiting time 2s. Remarks External operation mode (PU operation mode) Power on At start (Inverter) Constant speed (Commercial power supply) Switched to inverter operation for deceleration (Inverter) Stop ON ON→OFF ON ON OFF→ON ON→OFF ON OFF→ON ON ON ON→OFF OFF→ON ON ON ON→OFF ON OFF ON Note: 1. Start. Also. 140 to Pr. In other cases (MRS is on). the motor restarts after the waiting time set in Pr. 22.

150 "output current detection level" Pr. 190 to Pr.2. 150 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. Pr. Once switched on. Set the output current detection time. 150 setting to when the output current detection signal (Y12) is output. (Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 190 to Pr.150 Pr. Set a period of time from when the output current rises to or above the Pr. 100% is the rated inverter current. This function is also valid during execution of the online or offline auto tuning. 150. the output current detection signal is held on for at least 100ms.PARAMETERS 4. the other functions may be affected. 151. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. Note: 1. 3.) Parameter Number 150 151 Factory Setting 150% 0 Setting Range 0 to 200.0% 0 to 10 s Minimum 100ms Output current detection signal OFF ON OFF Output current Pr. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. 195 (output terminal function selection) " If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y12 signal output. 4 141 . 151) Related parameters Pr.151 Time <Setting> Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Parameter Number 150 151 Description Set the output current detection level. 195. 151 "output current detection period" Pr. the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open collector output terminal. 2.44 Output current detection function (Pr.

PARAMETERS

4.2.45 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)
Related parameters

Pr. 152 "zero current detection level" Pr. 153 "zero current detection period"

Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection)

When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may cause a gravity drop when the inverter is used in vertical lift application. To prevent this, the output current "zero" signal can be output from the inverter to close the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero". " If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector output terminal. (Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y13 signal output.)
Parameter Number 152 153 Factory Setting 5.0% 0.5 s
Start signal

Setting Range 0 to 200.0% 0 to 1 s
OFF ON

Pr. 152 "zero current detection level" Zero current detection signal output (Y13)

Pr.152 100 ms (Note) OFF ON OFF ON

Output current 0 [A]

Pr. 153 "detection time"

Pr. 153 "detection time"

<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter Number 152 153 Description Set the zero current detection level. Set this parameter to define the percentage of the rated current at which the zero current will be detected. Set the zero current detection time. Set a period of time from when the output current drops to or below the Pr. 152 setting to when the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.

Note: 1. If the current falls below the preset detection level but the timing condition is not satisfied, the zero current detection signal is held on for about 100ms. 2. This function is also valid during execution of the online auto tuning. 3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.

CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the zero current detection time setting not be too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output current. To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety backup such as an emergency brake.

142

PARAMETERS
Pr. 154 ' Refer to Pr. 22.

4.2.46 RT signal activated condition selection (Pr. 155)
Pr. 155 "RT signal activated condition"
Related parameters Pr. 14 "load pattern selection" Pr. 44 to Pr. 49 (second function selection) Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) " Set the condition of activating the RT terminal to select the second control functions by switching on-off the RT signal.
Parameter Number 155 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0, 10

<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter:
Pr. 155 Setting 0 10 Description Made valid immediately by switching the RT signal on-off. Made valid only when the RT signal is on at constant speed. (Invalid during acceleration/deceleration)

4.2.47 Stall prevention function and current limit function (Pr. 156)
Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection"
Related parameters Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level" Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed" Pr. 48 "second stall prevention operation current" Pr. 49 "second stall prevention operation frequency" Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation current" Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation frequency" Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation" Pr. 157 "OL signal output waiting time"

4

You can make setting to disable stall prevention caused by overcurrent, make setting to disable the fastresponse current limit which limits the current to prevent the inverter from resulting in an overcurrent trip if an excessive current occurs due to sudden load variation or ON-OFF, etc. in the output side of the running inverter, and set the OL signal output delay.
Parameter Number 156 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 to 31, 100, 101

143

PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter as required:
Pr. 156 Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 100 101 (Note 3) Driving Regenerative Driving Regenerative Fast-Response Current Limit !...Activated "...Not activated ! Stall Prevention Operation Selection !...Activated "...Not activated Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! " ! ! " ! ! " ! ! " ! " " ! " " ! ! " ! ! " ! " " ! " " ! " " ! " " OL Signal Output !...Operation continued "...Operation not continued (Note 1) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

"
!

"
!

"
!

"
!

"
!

"
!

"
!

" " " " " " " " " " " "
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

" " " " " " " " " " " "
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

" "
! ! ! !

" "
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

" " " "
! ! ! !

" " " " " "
! !

" " " " " " " " " "
! !

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "
! ! ! !

Note 1: When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the "E.OLT" alarm code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped. (Alarm stop display "E.OLT") 2: If the load is heavy, the lift is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, the stall prevention may be activated and the motor not stopped in the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Therefore, set optimum values to the Pr. 156 stall prevention operation level. (When the output voltage reduces during stall prevention operation, an overcurrent trip will be less liable to occur but the torque decreases. Set "0" in Pr. 154 when the torque may be reduced.) 3: At the setting of "101", the fast-response current limit can be disabled in the driving mode as compared to the setting of "100".

CAUTION Always perform test operation. Stall prevention operation performed during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes. Stall prevention operation performed during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.

144

PARAMETERS

4.2.48 OL signal output timer (Pr. 157)
Pr. 157 "OL signal waiting time"
Related parameters Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection" Pr. 191 "SU terminal function selection" Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection" Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection" Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection" Pr. 195 "A, B, C terminal function selection"

Use this parameter to set whether the overload alarm signal (OL signal) is output immediately or a preset period of time after occurrence of an overload status.
Parameter Number 157 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 to 25 s, 9999
Overload status (OL output)

Remarks 9999: No signal output

OL output signal

Set time (s)

<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter:
Pr. 157 Setting 0 0.1 to 25 9999 Description Output immediately. Output after the set time (s) has elapsed. Overload alarm signal is not output.

Pr. 158 ' Refer to Pr. 54.

4

145

. choose the parameter number to be registered. Note: 1. When Pr.. make the user groups valid or invalid. a total of 32 parameters can be registered to two different user groups. Parameters registered to user groups 1 and 2 may only be accessed for reading and writing. When Pr. 176 is read.. 160 setting is not displayed. Pr. . "0" set in the second digit of the 2-digit Pr.. make registration. Pr... 175 or Pr. (2) Parameter deletion from user group (when deleting Pr. 5 is deleted from user group 1.. 3. 174 "user group 1 deletion" Pr... The registered parameters may only be accessed for reading and writing.2. However. 3 to user group 1) Flickering Pr. Using the key. CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FWD . Using the SET key. Pr.. Using the key.. (3) By setting the required value in Pr. 176 "user group 2 deletion" • Pr. 174 reading 1. 77.. 2. Pr. The number of parameters registered for user setting appears. 174 is read... 160 Setting 0 1 10 11 Description All parameters can be accessed for reading and writing (Factory setting) Parameters registered to user group 1 may only be accessed for reading and writing. . Using the SET key.... 1.. 160 "user group read selection" is used to limit the parameters which may be read. When "9999" is set in Pr. 10. 160.5 s CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD FWD . choose the parameter to be deleted. 173 "user group 1 registration" Pr... 9999 Remarks 9999: Batch deletion 9999: Batch deletion <Examples of use> (1) Parameter registration to user group (when registering Pr. ..5 s CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 SET CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 . Parameters registered to user group 2 may only be accessed for reading and writing. 160 and Pr. the parameters registered to the corresponding user group is batch-deleted. 174 or Pr. 9999 0 to 999 0 to 999. it is displayed when "0" is set in the first digit only. 176) Pr.... 991 values can always be read independently of the user group setting. Pr.PARAMETERS 4. move to the next parameter to be registered. 5 from user group 1) Flickering Pr. Pr. 11 0 to 999 0 to 999. 146 ... . 175 "user group 2 registration" Pr. 3 is registered to user group 1.... the number of parameters registered to user group 2 appears. 160 "user group read selection" Pr. The number of parameters registered for user setting appears. • From among all parameters. 176. 173 or Pr. Other parameters than those registered to the user groups cannot be read. choose the parameter number to be deleted. Using the key. make deletion. the number of parameters registered to user group 1 appears. 173 reading 1. 173 to Pr. Parameter Number 160 173 174 175 176 Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Setting Range 0. Using the key. 160... 4. ..49 User group selection (Pr.

182 "RH terminal function selection" Pr. 165 ' Refer to Pr. 9999 0 to 99. 171) Pr.PARAMETERS Pr. 4. 9999 0 to 99. 160. 183 "RT terminal function selection" Pr. 57. Pr. REMARKS The watt-hour value is monitored at the Pr. 9999 0 to 99. 9999 0 to 99.51 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 9999 4 147 .2. Parameter Number 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 Terminal Symbol RL RM RH RT AU JOG CS Factory Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Factory-Set Terminal Function Low-speed operation command (RL) Middle-speed operation command (RM) High-speed operation command (RH) Second function selection (RT) Current input selection (AU) Jog operation selection (JOG) Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection (CS) Setting Range 0 to 99. Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection" Pr. 186) Pr. 162 to Pr.50 Watt-hour meter clear/actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 176 ' Refer to Pr. 185 "JOG terminal function selection" Pr. 9999 0 to 99. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" You can clear the watt-hour value and actual operation hour monitoring function. 52 setting of "23". 4.2. Parameter Number 170 171 Factory Setting 0 0 Setting Range 0 0 <Setting> Write "0" in the parameters to clear the watt-hour value and actual operation hour. 171 "actual operation hour meter clear" Related parameter Pr. 170. 186 "CS terminal function selection" Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions. 181 "RM terminal function selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. and the actual operation hour at the Pr. 170 "watt-hour meter clear" Pr. 173 to Pr. 52 setting of "25". 9999 0 to 99. 184 "AU terminal function selection" Pr.

210. 278 to Pr. RH) Third function FR-HC connection (inverter operation enable) FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection) (Only when FR-A5NR option is fitted) PU operation external interlock External DC dynamic braking start PID control valid terminal Brake opening completion signal PU-external operation switch-over Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost Advanced magnetic flux vector-V/F switch-over (V/F control is executed when X18 is on) Load torque high-speed frequency S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switch-over terminal (only when FR-A5AP option is fitted) Orientation command (Note 11) (only when FR-A5AP option is fitted) Pre-excitation (Note 12) (only when FR-A5AP option is fitted) No function 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 9999 REX X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 BRI X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X22 LX *: When Pr. 70 Pr. 79 Pr. 148 . 4 to Pr. 80. Pr. 270. 59 = 0 2 RH Pr. Pr. 165 Refer to page 182 Pr. 276 Pr. 380 to Pr. 79. Pr. Pr. 2 Pr. 16 Pr. 232 to Pr. 230. Pr. 24 to Pr. Pr. 4 to Pr. 200. 59 = 1. Pr. 221 to Pr. 230. 2 Pr. 79 = 5 3 4 5 6 7 RT AU JOG CS OH * * Second function selection (Note 10) Pr. 275. 50 Pr. **: Operated when the relay contact "opens". 89 Pr. 59 = "1 or 2". 232 to Pr. 30. 221 to Pr. 6. 27. 239 Pr. 15-speed selection (combination with RL. 211 to Pr. Pr. 274 Pr. 201 to Pr. 24 to Pr. Pr. 231 Pr. 162 to Pr. 59 Pr. 271 to Pr. motor-embedded temperature relay or the like is operated to stop the inverter. 80. 79. 231 Pr. Pr. 58. 70 Pr. 239 Pr. 4 to Pr. Pr. 59 = 1. 59 = 1. Pr. 239 Pr. RH and RT signals change as listed above.270 = 1. 369. 44 to Pr. Pr. 210. Pr. 79 = 5 Pr. Pr. 221 to Pr. Pr. 6. Pr. 370 Pr. 57. 59 = 0 0 RL Pr. the functions of the RL. Pr. Pr. 79 = 5 * * Remote setting (setting clear) Programmed operation group selection Stop-on-contact selection 0 Middle-speed operation command Remote setting (deceleration) Programmed operation group selection High-speed operation command * * Remote setting (acceleration) Programmed operation group selection Functions Low-speed operation command Relevant Parameters Pr. Pr. 220. 79. 270 = 1. Pr. 210. 211 to Pr. 24 to Pr. 369 Pr. 200. 128 to Pr. 27. 220. 27. 230. Pr. Pr. 116 Pr. 79 = "5". Pr. 2 Pr. 110 to Pr. Pr. 201 to Pr. 3 * Pr. 232 to Pr. 14 Pr. 24 to Pr. 6 Pr. 275. Pr. RM. 270 = "1 or 3".81. 359. 59 = 0 1 RM Pr. 30. 285 Pr. 15. 3 * Stop-on-contact selection 1 Current input selection Jog operation selection Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection External thermal relay input** The externally provided overheat protection thermal relay. 201 to Pr. 276 Refer to page 10 Pr. RM. Pr. 12 Pr. 79 Pr. 211 to Pr. 6. Pr. 270. 134 Pr. 239 Pr. Pr. 4 to Pr. 27 Pr. 200. 10 to Pr. Pr. Pr. Pr. 220. 350 to Pr. Pr. 231 Pr. Pr. 59 Pr. and Pr. 383 Pr. Pr. 59 Pr. Pr. 81. Pr.PARAMETERS <Setting> Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Setting Signal Name Pr. 232 to Pr.

the MRS signal acts as this function. multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote setting. and its allocation cannot be changed. When advanced magnetic flux vector-V/F switch-over and load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost are not selected. the terminal inputs are OR’ed. V/F control becomes secondary function control. shares RT with multi-speed setting (low speed). the FR-A5AX (12-bit digital input) is required. RL) and AU. They cannot be set individually. 79 and the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned. 10. 9. 81 "number of motor poles" = "12. In this case. 11. the MRS terminal shares this function. 4 149 . the MRS terminal shares this function. When HC connection (inverter operation enable signal) is not selected. Use common terminals to assign programmed operation group selection. 7. the RT signal shares this function.PARAMETERS Note: 1. When "7" is set in Pr. Made valid when vector control servo lock is set valid. 4. When FR-HC connection inverter operation enable (X10) signal is not assigned. One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. 12. Pr. 270 = "1 or 3". (Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for speed setting and need not be set at the same time. RM. 8. 3. 14 or 16"). 5. the second functions (RT) share these functions. The speed command priorities are higher in order of jog. RT signal shares the advanced magnetic flux vector-V/F swith over (X18) function (in case Pr. In this case. When a stop position is entered externally for orientation control. Stop-on-contact control selection. multi-speed setting (RH. 2.) 6. When the load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (X17) signal is not assigned.

Pr. 3 103 OL 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 FU FU2 FU3 RBP THP PRG PU RY Y12 Y13 FDN FUP RL Output frequency detection Second output frequency detection Third output frequency detection Regenerative brake pre-alarm Electronic overcurrent protection pre-alarm Programmed mode PU operation mode Inverter operation ready Output current detection Zero current detection PID lower limit PID upper limit PID forward-reverse rotation output 150 . 41  Pr.1. Pr. Output when the cumulative electronic overcurrent protection value reaches 85% of the preset level. 23.52 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 9999 0 to 199. 66. 194 "FU terminal function selection" Pr. 9999 <Setting> Refer to the following table and set the parameters: Setting Positive Negative logic logic 0 1 2 100 101 102 Signal Name RUN SU IPF Function Inverter running Operation Related parameter  Pr. 79. Refer to Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection" Pr. 50 (second output frequency detection). 43 Pr. 195 "A. 9999 0 to 199. C terminal function selection" You can change the functions of the open collector and contact output terminals. Pr. 9999 0 to 199.PARAMETERS 4. Refer to Pr. 153 Pr. 128 to Pr. 70 is reached. 128 to Pr. Pr. Pr. 149. 41 "up-to-frequency sensitivity". 152. 9999 0 to 199. 116 (third output frequency detection). Output when the inverter can be started by switching the start signal on or while it is running. 190 to Pr. Pr. Pr. Pr. Output while stall prevention function is activated. B. 42. 152 and Pr. Output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr. 154 Pr. 150. 134 (PID control). B.2. 231   Pr. 134 Output during operation when the inverter output frequency rises to or above the starting frequency. 50 Pr. (Note 3) Output when the PU operation mode is selected. 151 Pr. 116 Pr. Refer to Pr. Parameter Number 190 191 192 193 194 195 Terminal Symbol RUN SU IPF OL FU A. Refer to Pr. 153 (zero current detection). 150 and Pr. 9999 0 to 199. 195) Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection" Pr. Pr. 43 (output frequency detection). Refer to Pr. Pr. 191 "SU terminal function selection" Pr. C Factory Setting 0 1 2 3 4 99 Factory-Set Terminal Function Inverter running Up to frequency Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage Overload alarm Output frequency detection Alarm output Setting Range 0 to 199. 148. Pr. 200 to Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection" Pr. 70 Pr. Refer to Pr. 42. Output in the programmed mode. 22. 151 (output current detection). Overload alarm Refer to Pr. 9 Pr. (Note Up to frequency 2) Instantaneous power failure or Output when an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage undervoltage occurs.

the terminal conducts with the settings of 0 to 99 and does not conduct with the settings of 100 to 199. 285 (brake sequence functions). 2. 244   Pr. IPF. 76. 4. Pr.PARAMETERS Setting Positive Negative logic logic 17 18 19 20 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 98 99 9999    120 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 198 199 Signal Name MC1 MC2 MC3 BOF FAN FIN ORA ORM Y29 Y30 Y31 Y32 RY2 LF ABC  Related parameter Function Commercial power supplyinverter switch-over MC1 Commercial power supplyinverter switch-over MC2 Commercial power supplyinverter switch-over MC3 Brake opening request Fan fault output Fin overheat pre-alarm In-position Orientation error Overspeed detection Forward running output Reverse running output Regeneration status output Operation ready 2 Minor fault output Alarm output No function Operation Refer to Pr. the operations of the up-tofrequency SU and frequency detection FU. FU: The actual speed (frequency) provided by the PLG feedback signal is output at or above the frequency specified for detection. 285 Pr. 278 to Pr. When orientation is valid (only when FR-A5AP option is loaded) For PLG feedback control. note that the output of the SU (up-to-frequency) signal may alternate between ON and OFF due to that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed dependent on the acceleration/deceleration time setting. 76 = 1 or 3. FU3 are as follows: SU. The output assignment of the RUN terminal and alarm output relay conforms to the above setting independently of Pr. When an inverter alarm occurs. FU2. 139 Refer to Pr. 244   0 to 99: Positive logic 100 to 199: Negative logic Note: 1. 135 to Pr. the signal outputs are switched over to alarm code outputs. The same function may be set to more than one terminal. 3. 4 8. 121. Pr.) This signal is output when "5" is set in Pr. 151 . (Such alternation will not take place when the acceleration/deceleration time setting is "0s". 6. 195 do not function if the values set are other than the above. 278 to Pr. Output when the heat sink temperature reaches about 85% of the fin overheat protection temperature. FU2. When the function is activated. Under PLG feedback control (when the FR-A5AP option is loaded). When the frequency setting is varied with the analog signal or the key of the operation panel. the output signals of the SU. Pr. 190 to Pr. FU3: The inverter output frequency is output at or above the frequency specified for detection.139 (commercial power supply-inverter switch-over). vector control (only when the FR-A5AP option is loaded) For vector control (only when the FR-A5AP option is loaded) Output when a light fault (fan fault or communication error alarm) occurs. When Pr. Output when the inverter's protective function is activated to stop the output (major fault). Output when a fan fault occurs. OL and FU output terminals conform to Pr. 76.  Pr. 7. 79 "operation mode selection" and the external operation mode is selected (the inverter goes into the programmed mode). 135 to Pr. 5.

7 and Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection" Among the parameters. 199 (i. " You can read the user's initial value list in the help mode of the parameter unit (FR-PU04). 3) Press the SET key to read Pr. 6) Through the above steps. Pr. 9999 The read Pr. 199) Related parameter Pr. These values may be set to 16 parameters. Note that the parameters of which initial values have not been set are initialized to the factory settings by user clear operation.53 User initial value setting (Pr. 8 are registered. Parameter Number 199 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 to 999. 902 to Pr. (Operation from the FR-DU04) 1) Set "1" (target initial value) in Pr. 3. 8 as user's initial values. 7. 4.2. The number of parameters having user's initial values are then displayed. The operation panel (FR-DU04) cannot be used to refer to user's initial values. 4) Further press the SET key for 1. 8 = 2 in the above example) are user's initial values. one parameter uses the area of two parameters for registration. 2) Set "2" (target initial value) in Pr. 8 with the key and press the SET key for 1.5 seconds to enter. 2. 199 (and pressing the are batch-deleted.e. Pr. the user's initial values registered 152 . SET key for 1. 231. Note: 1.5 seconds). you can set user-only parameter initial values. By performing user clear operation from the operation panel or parameter unit. 905 are set. <Setting example> (1) To set "1" in Pr. 201 to Pr. Values cannot be registered to Pr. 7 = 1. the parameter numbers which cannot be cleared cannot be set. 5) Select Pr.5 seconds. (2) Deletion of user's initial values By writing "9999" to Pr. The parameter setting screen is then displayed. 199. As this setting is concerned with user-cleared initial values. 7 and Pr. The settings of the parameters whose numbers are set in Pr. 7 and "2" in Pr. When user's initial values for Pr.PARAMETERS 4. 199 value is displayed as the number of parameters registered. 8. you can initialize the parameters to the user-set initial values. 199 "user's initial value setting" Pr. the initial values of Pr.

76 = 3 Terminal function Pr. 3 [hour/minute] 0 to 2: Rotation direction 0 to 400. 9999 0 to 99.0 221 to 230 231 0. 9999: Frequency 0 to 99. 230 "program set 3 21 to 30" Pr. 221 to Pr. 200 "programmed operation minute/second selection" Pr.54 Programmed operation function (Pr.59: Time 0 to 2: Rotation direction 0 to 400. 221 to Pr. 201 to Pr.T 〈L1. 79 "operation mode selection" 211 to 220 0. 79 = 5 U.59: Time 0 to 2: Rotation direction 0 to 400.9999. 9999: Frequency 0 to 99. " The start time of day. running frequency and rotation direction.9999.W Motor 153 .2. 210 • Group 2: Pr. " This function is made valid when the following parameter is set to the following value: • Pr. 9999 0 to 99. 2 [minute/second] 1. 9999: Frequency 0 to 99. 211 to Pr.59 0 to 2: Rotation direction 0 to 400. Parameter Number 200 201 to 210 Factory Setting 0 0.PARAMETERS 4. 211 to Pr. 220 "program set 2 11 to 20" Pr. 200 to Pr.0 0 4 <Wiring example> • For sink logic Inverter R.V.59: Time Related parameters Pr. 201 to Pr. automatic operation is performed under the control of the internal timer in accordance with the preset time of day. 76 "alarm code output selection" Pr. 79 = "5" (programmed operation) " You can select the time unit for programmed operation between "minute/second" and "hour/minute".59: Time 0 to 99.0 0 to 3 0 to 2 0 to 400. 220 • Group 3: Pr.L2. rotation direction and running frequency are defined as one point and every 10 points are grouped into three: • Group 1: Pr. 231 to set the time of day when programmed operation is started.L3〉 Programmed operation start Group selection Timer reset Input signal common STF RH RM RL STR SD FU OL I PF SU SE Terminal function 1 2 3 Time-out signal Output signal common Group run signals (Open collector) Pr. 231) Pr. 230 " Use Pr.59 0 to 2 0 to 400.S.59 Setting Range Remarks 0. 231 "timer setting" " In programmed operation. 210 "program set 1 1 to 10" Pr.9999. 9999: Frequency 0 to 99.

When the reference time of day is set in Pr. 2: Reverse rotation Frequency setting Time of day setting 154 . the reference time-of-day monitor screen is displayed instead of the voltage monitor screen. 201 to Pr. 200 Setting 2 3 Pr. 230 Parameter Number 201 to 230 Name Programmed operation minute/second selection Setting Range 0 to 2 0 to 400Hz 0 to 99:59 Factory Setting 0 9999 0 Remarks Rotation direction setting 0: Stop. When "2" or "3" is set in Pr. 204 Group 1 10 No. 200. 211 Pr. 1) Setting range The time unit depends on the Pr. Start Time of Day Pr. 210 Pr. 2. running frequency and start time of day can be set by using Pr. 231 is also reset to "0". 1: Forward rotation. Frequency. Setting 0 1 2 3 Description Minute/second unit (voltage monitor) Hour/minute unit (voltage monitor) Minute/second unit (reference time of day monitor) Hour/minute unit (reference time of day monitor) Note: 1. 200 setting is changed. Select either of "minute/second" and "hour/minute". the units for Pr. 201 to Pr.11 Group 2 20 No.PARAMETERS <Setting> (1) Set the time unit for programmed operation in Pr. 202 Pr. programmed operation is started at this time of day. 231 when both signals are on. Note that when the Pr. 231. Setting Point No. 231 Setting Range Maximum 99 minutes 59 seconds Maximum 99 hours 59 minutes Note: The reference time-of-day timer returns to "0" when both the start signal and group select signal are entered. Pr. Note that the reference time-of-day value set in Pr. 200 setting. 2) Resetting the reference time of day The reference time of day is cleared by switching on the timer reset signal (STR) or by resetting the inverter. 231 Setting Range Maximum 99 minutes 59 seconds Maximum 99 hours 59 minutes Pr. 231 setting will change. 220 Pr. (2) The inverter has an internal timer (RAM). 231. 203 Pr. 201 Pr. 200 Setting 0 1 Pr.1 2 3 4 Rotation Direction.21 Group 3 30 Pr. Set the reference time of day in Pr. 221 Pr. 200. (3) Program setting The rotation direction.

When ic = 10mA.30" and press the 5) Press the SET SET SET key ( WRITE key when using the FR-PU04 parameter key ( WRITE key when using the FR-PU04 parameter unit).PARAMETERS <Setting procedure> (Example: Set point No.5V should be satisfied. 4 hours 0 minutes Forward rotation.1A Only when Pr. 0. 3:00 Pr. the operation pattern is as shown in the figure below: No. write "0" in the rotation direction and frequency. 202 = 0. 35. 6 hours 0 minutes Forward rotation. Set "9999" for no setting. 20Hz. 30Hz. 7 hours 30 minutes Stop. 201 = 1. Hereafter. 7:30 Pr. 3) Enter 30 (30Hz) and press the 4) Enter "4. 201 value. 6:00 Pr. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Operation Forward rotation. 3 hours 0 minutes Reverse rotation. 10Hz. 30. 9:00 <Operation pattern> Set point 1 Forward rotation 0 20Hz 4 1 3 6 7:30 9 Time of day 2 3 4 10Hz 5 6 35Hz 4 (4) Input signals Name Group signal RH (group 1) RM (group 2) RL (group 3) Timer reset signal (STR) Programmed operation start signal (STF) Description Used to select the programmed operation. (Note 1) SET key ( WRITE key when using the FR-PU04 parameter unit). 0. and press the the FR-PU04 parameter unit) to display the current setting. Output during running of corresponding group's program and cleared on timer reset. 20. 2) Enter "1" (forward rotation) in Pr. IPF) Description Output on completion of the operation of the selected group and cleared on timer reset. 0. Note 1: To make a stop. Signal Level Remarks Permissible load 24VDC. 4:00 Pr.80 is entered (59 minutes or 59 seconds is exceeded). 10. 205 = 1. 204 = 1. 35Hz. Signal Level Remarks Input to zero the reference time of day. OL. Input to start programmed operation. Vec<0. 1 hour 0 minutes Stop. (Note 2) key ( READ key when using key to advance the key to move to the next parameter (Pr. press the parameter one by one. • Assuming that operation has been programmed as indicated in the following table. Note 2: An error will result if 4. 202). 9 hours 0 minutes Parameter Setting Pr. 1. 30Hz. 203 = 2. 76 = 3 Open collector output (isolated) 155 . forward rotation. group for Photocoupler isolated May also be driven by transistor. (5) Output signals Name Time-out signal (SU) Group select signals (FU. 1:00 Pr. 4 hours 30 minutes) 1) Read Pr. 206 = 0. 201 and press the unit).

156 . turn the programmed operation start signal (STF) off. group 2 and group 3. To resume the operation. reset the timer using the time-out signal as shown below. 2. STOP. If the inverter power is switched off. the operation mode cannot be switched between PU operation and external operation. Programmed operation will not be performed if any of the group select signals is switched on during PU operation or data link operation. Start signal STF Group 1 RH Group 2 RM Inverter output frequency 0 f1 t1 f2 t2 t'3 t'4 t'5 t'1 f3 f4 t3 f5 0 f1 f2 f3 f4 0 t4 t5 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 Setting of group 2 t'2 t'3 t'4 t'5 Setting of group 1 t'1 Group 1 select signal (FU) Group 2 select signal (OL) Time-out signal (SU) 0 t'2 (7) To repeat the operation of the same group. the following signals are invalid:AU. t4 t5 Setting of group 1 2) Multi-group select operation When two or more groups are selected at the same time.) 2. and the time-out signal (SU) is output after the operation of group 2 ends. For example. When the programmed operation start signal (STF) and timer reset signal (STR) are ON.) Note: Use the programmed operation function with "5" set in Pr. then turn on the start signal (STF). then on.PARAMETERS (6) Operation 1) Ordinary operation After completion of all preparations and settings. When the inverter is wired for programmed operation specifications. the operation of group 2 is started. RM (group 2) and RL (group 3)). 79. the operation of group 1 is first carried out. the inverter cannot be operated in any other mode. When the operation of the group ends. a signal is output from the time-out output terminal. This causes the internal timer (reference time of day) to be reset automatically and the operation of that group to be performed in sequence in accordance with the settings. the internal timer is reset and the inverter does not restart if the power is restored. turn on the desired group select signal (any of RH (group 1). if group 1 and group 2 have been selected. (The open collector signal of SU is turned on. Start signal STF Group 1 RH Inverter output frequency Time-out signal (SU) 0 f1 t1 f2 t2 f3 f4 t3 f5 0 t6 Note that the operation is not started if the timer reset signal (STR) is on. 1. then on (including an instantaneous power failure) during the execution of the programmed operation. switch the start signal on before setting. 1) To repeat the operation of only group 1 Inverter STF (Group 1) RH (Group 2) RM (Group 3) RL STR SD 2) To repeat the operation of groups 1 and 2 Inverter STF (Group 1) RH (Group 2) RM (Group 3) RL STR SD SU SE SU SE Note: 1. 4. the reference time of day is reset. During programmed operation. JOG 3. and after that operation ends. the operations of the selected groups are executed in sequence of group 1. (At this time. when it is required to set the reference time of day.

. 190 to Pr. 195 (multi-function outputs) to allocate the terminals used to output the FAN and LF signals.) <Reference> In either of the following cases. Cooling fan on-off control valid (The cooling fan is always on while the inverter is running. and the fan fault (FAN) and light fault (LF) signals are output. 190 to Pr.PARAMETERS Pr. 1. 1) Pr. 244 = "0" When the fan comes to a stop with power on. 240 ' Refer to Pr. fan operation is regarded as faulty. or when the fan starts during the fan OFF command. Pr. Parameter Number 244 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0. 244 "cooling fan operation selection" You can control the operation of the cooling fan built in the inverter (200V class. the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to temperature. 2. 1 <Setting> Setting 0 1 Description Operated at power on (independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop). 72. 4. Note: When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 244 = "1" When the fan stops during the fan ON command while the inverter is running. 2) Pr.2. 4. Use Pr. 239 ' Refer to Pr.55 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 195. During a stop..5K or more. 244) Pr.2K or more). 232 to Pr. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. the other functions may be affected. 400V class... 4 157 . [FN] is shown on the operation panel.

the motor starts at 0Hz. Output frequency (Hz) Motor coasts to a stop.2. The motor coasts to a stop.) DC brake Time (2) Pr. 250) Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal had switched off. 2. 45 "second deceleration time" Pr. The RUN signal switches off when the output stops. 8. etc. Start signal ON OFF Decelerated when start signal switches off. 250 has elapsed after start signal had switched off. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 158 . Output frequency (Hz) Deceleration time (time set in Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" Pr. 250 = "9999" When the start signal switches off. 250 = other than "9999" The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 110 "third acceleration/deceleration time" Pr.56 Stop selection (Pr. 250 "stop selection" Related parameters Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. Start signal OFF Output is shut off when time set in Pr. Parameter Number 250 Factory Setting 9999 Setting Range 0 to 100 s. Time RUN signal OFF Note: 1. the motor is decelerated to a stop.PARAMETERS 4. 111 "third deceleration time" Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal (STF/STR) switches off. When the start signal is switched on again during motor coasting. 9999 (1) Pr.

253) Pr.2. 73 "0 to 5V.57 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr.2. 0 to 10V selection" is used to select the override.1% Factory Setting 50% 150% Override value (%) 150 Factory setting (50% to 150%) Pr. 251) Pr. 252. and set the override value as desired. Parameter Number 252 253 Setting Range 0 to 200% 0 to 200% 200 Minimum Setting Increments 0. Pr. 0 to 10V selection" You can extend the 50% to 150% override range (to 0% to 200%). 251 "Output phase failure protection selection" You can make invalid the output phase failure protection (E. which is covered when Pr. W) on the inverter's output side (load side) becomes open.PARAMETERS 4. 73 "0 to 5V. 253 "override gain" Related parameters Pr.LF) function which stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U. V. 252 "override bias" Pr. 253 100 50 0 0V 2. 1 Minimum Setting Increments 1 Factory Setting 1 Description 0: Without output phase failure protection 1: With output phase failure protection 4. Parameter Number 251 Setting Range 0.5V (5V) Voltage across 2-5 5V (10V) 4 159 . 252 Pr.1% 0.58 Override bias/gain (Pr.

266. Parameter Number 261 262 263 264 265 266 Factory Setting 0 3Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 5s 9999 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 Power supply Setting Range 0. 265 "power-failure deceleration time 2" Pr. 1 0 to 20Hz 0 to 120Hz. 21 = 1 266 0 to 3600 s 0 to 360 s 0 to 3600 s 0 to 360 s 9999 0 to 400Hz 160 . the inverter can be decelerated to a stop. If the output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is equal to or greater than the frequency set in Pr. ! Remove the jumpers from across terminals R-R1 <L1-L11> and terminals S-S1 <L2-L21> and connect terminal R1 <L11> to terminal P <+> and terminal S1 <L21> to terminal N <->. the inverter is decelerated to a stop. 266 "power-failure deceleration time switch-over frequency" When an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs. 12 "DC dynamic brake voltage" Pr. The frequency can be adjusted within the range 0 to 20Hz according to the load specifications (inertia moment. 263. 262 from the output frequency at that time. Set the slope in terms of time required for deceleration from the frequency set in Pr.266 Time <Setting> Parameter Number 261 Setting 0 1 262 0 to 20Hz Description Coasting to stop When undervoltage or power failure occurs. the inverter is decelerated to a stop. 264 Set the frequency at which the deceleration slope is is switched from the Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" Pr. 9999 0 to 400Hz Output frequency (Hz) Subtracted frequency Pr. 9999 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s. The inverter is decelerated to a stop. torque). 264 "power-failure deceleration time 1" Pr. Normally. 21 = 1 Pr. 264 setting to the Pr. Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency set in Pr. 21 = 0 Pr.PARAMETERS 4. If the output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is less than the frequency set in Pr. the inverter output is shut off. starting at the output frequency at that time. Same slope as in Pr. 263 "subtraction starting frequency" Pr. Set the slope in terms of time required for deceleration from the frequency set in Pr. 21 = 0 Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Switch-over frequency Pr. 261 to Pr. 20 to 0Hz. 263.59 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 20 to 0Hz. 266. 262 from the output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure. 265 setting. operation can be performed with the factory setting unchanged. 0 to 120Hz 263 9999 264 265 Pr. 262 "subtracted frequency at deceleration start" Pr. When undervoltage or power failure occurs. starting at the value found by subtracting the frequency set in Pr. Set a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr.2. 261 "power failure stop selection" Pr.262 Pr. 266) Related parameters Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 Pr. deceleration starts at the value found by subtracting the frequency set in Pr.

If power is restored during deceleration.and middle-speed operations according to load torque). the motor will coast. 276.2. 273 "current averaging range" Pr. 276 "stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency" To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit etc of a lift. 271 "high-speed setting maximum current" Pr. Specifically. 5.60 Stop-on-contact. 270. some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to coast. this function is made invalid. 274. 270) Pr. select advanced magnetic flux vector control. This function suppresses vibration which is liable to occur when the load is stopped upon contact in vertical motion applications. refer to Pr. • For function details of load torque high-speed frequency control. Load torque high-speed frequency control automatically sets the maximum operating frequency according to the load. This function is invalid when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is activated. to reduce incoming and outgoing times. 2. The power failure stop function is not activated during a stop or error. 272 "mid-speed setting minimum current" Pr. speed can be automatically increased in a sky parking lot. 274 "current averaging filter constant" Pr. ensuring steady precise positioning. For function details.PARAMETERS Note: 1. 263) is negative. when the load is light. load torque high-speed frequency selection (Pr. When the high power factor converter is used (Pr. 3. 4. 30 = 2). the preset frequency can be increased for operation. refer to Pr. 270 "stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed control selection" Related parameters Pr. 275 and Pr. 275 "stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor" Pr. the weight of the load is determined after a start by the average current at a given time. CAUTION If power-failure deceleration operation is set. If (output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure) minus (frequency set in Pr. the inverter is kept decelerating to a stop. stop-on-contact control causes a mechanical brake to be closed while the motor is developing a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a mechanical stopper etc. • When stop-on-contact control is selected. 4. To restart. switch off the start signal once. When the load is light. then switch it on again. If enough regenerative energy is not given by the motor. Parameter Number 270 Factory Setting 0 Setting Range 0 1 2 3 Description Without stop-on-contact control and load torque high-speed frequency control Stop-on-contact control Load torque high-speed frequency control Stop-on-contact control and load torque high-speed frequency control 4 161 . the calculation result is regarded as 0Hz. for example. ! Using Pr. 271 to Pr. select stop-on-contact control and/or high-speed frequency control (control which automatically switches between high.

59 "remote setting function selection" Pr. required when "2" or "3" is set in Pr. 5 "multi-seed setting (middle speed)" Pr.2.61 High-speed frequency control (Pr. 270 to select load torque high-speed frequency control. 9999 1 to 4000 Whether there is a load or not.PARAMETERS 4. Parameter Number 271 272 273 274 Factory Setting 50% 100% 9999 16 <Without high-speed frequency control> <With high-speed frequency control> Light Setting Range 0 to 200% 0 to 200% 0 to 400Hz. (The output frequency is increased. 180 to Pr. 6 "multi-seed setting (low speed)" Pr. 186 = 19 MC Mechanical brake NFB R 〈L1〉 Power supply S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 Start signal Load torque high-speed frequency function selection STF CS (Note) SD U V W Motor Note: The input signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 274) Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) ! Used to set the current. 273 "current averaging range" Pr. etc. averaging range. 162 . 271 "high-speed setting maximum current" Pr. 4 "multi-seed setting (high speed)" Pr. 186 settings. Faster The lift with a light load or without a load is moved faster than the lift with a load. 271 to Pr. 274 "current averaging filter constant" Related parameters Pr. 180 to Pr.) <Wiring example> • Sink logic • Pr. the lift is moved vertically at the same speed. 272 "mid-speed setting minimum current" Pr.

PARAMETERS <Operation example> Power running A Pr.5 Less than Pr. Example: 1. 271 setting Terminal STF (STR) CS rated current Pr. 271 setting (%) 2. the frequency varies according to the current.5 1 2 Pr.5 (60Hz) Pr. 5 "multi-speed setting (middle speed)" settings as shown below according to the average current flowing during acceleration from the frequency half of the Pr. (Average current during acceleration from (Pr. 186.> 4 <Setting> 1) Set "2 or 3" in Pr. 180 to Pr. 4 “multi-speed setting (high speed)” and Pr. 274 Current averaging filter constant 1 to 4000 163 . 274 and the factory setting is 12ms. 273) Hz can be achieved.4 Pr. If the average current is not less than the following. Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the output current.5 Regenerating B 1 2 × Pr.271 (50%) Pr. 3) Refer to the following table and set the parameters: Parameter Number 4 5 271 272 273 Name Multi-speed setting (high speed) Multi-speed setting (middle speed) High-speed setting maximum current Mid-speed setting minimum current Current averaging range 9999 Setting 0 to 400Hz 0 to 400Hz 0 to 200% 0 to 200% 0 to 400Hz Description Set the higher-speed frequency.5 × Pr. 5 × 1/2) Hz to (Pr. the maximum running frequency is the value set in Pr. the maximum running frequency is the value set in Pr. 272 setting (%) Frequency Pr. 2) Assign X19 (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) to the input terminal using any of Pr.) A larger setting provides higher stability but poorer response. 270. Average current during acceleration from (Pr.75 × Pr. 272 setting rated current or more ON OFF • When operation is performed with X19 (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) signal on. 5. If the average current is not more than the following. 273 × 1/2) Hz to (Pr. (The time constant [ms] is 0.272 (100%) Average current <In this example. Set the lower-speed frequency. 5) Hz is achieved.4 (120Hz) Pr. 4 as shown in operation example A . Rated inverter current × Pr. Rated inverter current × Pr. Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and middle speeds. 5 as shown in operation example B . 5 setting to the frequency set in Pr. 60Hz for 100% current and 120Hz for 50% current. the inverter automatically varies the maximum frequency between Pr.

the output current may increase in the constant power region. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 27 Speed 5 Pr. The fast-response current limit function is invalid. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. (The 12-bit digital speed input has the highest priority. 5 Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. When the average current within the current averaging range is small. 4 Speed 2 (middle speed) Pr. 164 . 4. the other functions may be affected. 2. 180 to Pr. 6. 5. the motor may accelerate suddenly up to 120Hz. causing hazardous conditions. 186. The maximum output frequency is 120Hz. If the current averaging zone range the constant power region. 2. 27 Setting using terminal 2. Note: 1. 6 Speed 6 Pr. CAUTION When the load is light. 1. the above list is invalid. 3. RM. 59. 25 Speed 4 Pr. 4 Speed 2 (middle speed) Pr. the running frequency increases. the output frequency is 120Hz. RL) are selected together: X19 " Input Signals RH RM " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " RL Set Frequency Conforms to load torque high-speed frequency control. 7. If its setting exceeds 120Hz. Speed 1 (high speed) Pr.PARAMETERS Note: 1. 4-5. 6 Speed 1 (high speed) Pr. 24 Speed 6 Pr. Jog operation overrides the above list. 24 Speed 7 Pr. This function is only valid in the external operation mode. JOG " indicates that the signal is on. 3. which causes the longer deceleration time. 26 Speed 4 Pr. 1-5). Multi-speeds override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5.) 4. 25 Speed 7 Pr. 26 Speed 5 Pr. Assumes that the external operation command mode is selected and the remote setting function is not selected. Provide sufficient interlocks on the machine side before starting operation. When the 12-bit digital speed input (option FR-A5AX) is selected. 5 Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. Can be activated at every start. ! Set frequency reference table for load torque high-speed frequency control The following table lists the frequencies set when the load torque high-speed frequency control signal (X19) and multi-speed terminals (RH. This function is not activated when "1" or "2" (remote setting function) is selected for Pr. 4.

270 settings "1 to 3" are made invalid: • PU operation • Programmed operation • PU + external combined • PID control • Remote setting function mode • Orientation control (option FR-A5AP) • Jog operation (common to PU and external operations) 4 165 . ! Restrictions when 1 to 3 are selected for Pr.) Pr. 270 Under the following conditions.PARAMETERS ! Function list (The following specifications apply to the external operation mode. 270 Setting 0 1 2 3 Load Torque High-Speed Frequency Control Stop-On-Contact Control Multi-Speeds (7 speeds) " " " " × × × " " " × " ": Indicates that the function is valid. the functions of Pr.

Note: (RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any time difference. 7) (b) Deceleration time (Pr. Pr. 180 to Pr.62 Stop on contact (Pr. 3. 1. the inverter enters the stop-on-contact mode. 276) Pr. Parameter Number 270 275 276 Factory Setting 0 9999 9999 Setting Range 0.5 MC Mechanical brake Pr. 0 to 1000%. 186 settings. 9999 0 to 15. in which operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 5 "multi-seed setting (middle speed)" Pr. 166 .PARAMETERS 4.4 Ordinary mode Stop-on-contact control Pr. 6 "multi-seed setting (low speed)" Pr. load torque high-speed frequency selection" ! Set "1 or 3" (stop-on-contact control) in Pr. 275. 9999 <Without stop-on-contact control> <With stop-on-contact control> Vibration Complete stop Lift Lift <Wiring and operation examples> • Sink logic Output frequency Pr. 275 "stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor" Pr. 4 "multi-seed setting (high speed)" Pr. 6 "multi-speed setting (low speed)" independently of the preceding speed. 276 "stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency" Related parameters Pr. 72 "PWM carrier frequency" Pr. 180 to Pr. When both the RT and RL terminals are switched on. 8) (c) Second deceleration time (Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 270 "stop-on-contact.) (a) Acceleration time (Pr. 44) Note: The input signal terminals used depend on the Pr. 270. 48 "second stall prevention operation current" Pr.2. 2. Also advanced magnetic flux vector control must be selected.6 0 Time (a) NFB R 〈L1〉 Power supply S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 Start signal Multi-speed selection 1 Multi-speed selection 2 Stop-on-contact selection 1 Stop-on-contact selection 2 STF RH RM RL RT SD U V W RM Motor RL RT RH (b) (c) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when both RL and RT switch on.

By increasing the Pr. 9999) No 167 . Usually set a value between 130% and 180%. the stop-on-contact function is made invalid: • PU operation • Programmed operation • PU + external operation • PID control function operation • Remote setting function operation • Orientation control function operation • Jog operation <Setting> 1) Select advanced magnetic flux vector control and set "1" or "3" in Pr. (Valid at the frequency of 3Hz or less) Conforms to the Pr. RT terminals Main function Output frequency for a stop on contact Stall prevention operation level Exciting current low-speed multiplying factor Pr. the operating frequency will be 30Hz. Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" Ordinary Operation RL Multi-speeds RT Stop-on-Contact Control RL ON Pr. The stop-on-contact function is different from the servo lock function. 275 before RL and RT are switched on. and if used to stop or hold a load for an extended period. 6 "low-speed frequency" Pr.OCT) may occur or the machine may oscillate in a stop-on-contact state. 2) Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Parameter Number Name Setting Description Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control. After a stop. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0 to 400Hz 48 275 Second stall prevention operation current Stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor Stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency 0 to 200% 0 to 1000% 9999 0 to 15 9999 276 • Function switch-over when stop-on-contact control is selected Operation Mode (External) RL. No compensation Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-contact control. the function can cause the motor to overheat. 0 to 10V 4 to 20mA Pr. Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact control. 2. Under the following operating conditions. Set the stall prevention operation for stop-on-contact control.PARAMETERS Note: 1. PLG feedback control is made invalid when the inverter enters the stop-on-contact control mode. but the overcurrent alarm (E. 48 (second stall prevention operation current) The current is compensated for by the multiplying factor (0 to 1000%) set in Pr. 49 (second stall prevention operation frequency) is invalid. Pr. the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases. 3. If it is set to more than 30Hz. 72 "PWM carrier frequency selection". When stop-on-contact control is to be exercised during PLG feedback control. 275 setting. immediately reset this function and use a mechanical brake to hold the load. 22 (stall prevention operation level) Carrier frequency Fast-response current limit (0 to 15) Yes (0 to 15. 276 (stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency) When RL and RT are on. 270. The frequency should be as low as possible (about 2Hz). RT ON Remarks 4 Either is OFF 0 to 5V.

4-20mA # *# indicates that the function is selected. 0-10V. 27 Jog frequency Pr. 6 Jog frequency Pr. RL. 5 Jog frequency Pr. 24 Speed 2 (middle speed) Pr. 6 Speed 3 (low speed. 15 Speed 3 (low speed. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 2. 15 According to 0-5V. 25 = 9999 Stop-onContact Control Function Remarks Speed 5 Pr. RT. 15 Speed 3 (low speed. 6 Pr. Note that when both RL and RT are on.PARAMETERS Frequencies set in stop-on-contact control (Pr. 180 to Pr. JOG) are selected together. 5 Pr. 6 Jog frequency Pr. stop-on-contact frequency) Pr. 6 and stop-on-contact control is exercised. Input Signals RH " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " RM RL RT JOG Set Frequency Speed 1 (high speed) Speed 2 (middle speed) Speed 3 (low speed) According to 0-5V. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 5. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. 27 = 9999 Speed 7 Pr. stop-on-contact frequency) Pr. The jog frequency has the highest priority. (The remote setting function disables stop-on-contact control. the other functions may be affected. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Pr. 186. Indicates that the remote setting function is not selected. stop-on-contact frequency) Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 24 = 9999 # # # Middle speed when Pr. 26 = 9999 Low speed when Pr. RM. 15 Speed 3 (low speed. The selection of the 12-bit digital speed input FR-A5AX (option) makes the above list invalid. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 6 Jog frequency Pr. 26 Middle speed when Pr. 15 Speed 6 Pr. " indicates that the signal is on. 25 Speed 1 (high speed) Pr. 26 Low speed when Pr. 4 Pr. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr.) 3. 168 . the frequency is as set in Pr. 15 Speed 4 Pr. 26 = 9999 Low speed when Pr. 4-20mA Jog frequency Speed 6 Pr. 0-10V. Note: 1. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 4 Jog frequency Pr. 4. 6 Jog frequency Pr. 270 = 1 or 3) (In external operation mode) The following table lists the frequencies set when the input terminals (RH. 15 Jog frequency Pr. stop-on-contact frequency) Pr.

284 "deceleration detection function selection" Pr. 190 to Pr. 278 to Pr.2. ensuring secure operation.3 s 0. 169 . 80 "motor capacity" Pr. The input signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 285 "overspeed detection frequency" This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical brake opening completion signal timing signal in vertical lift and other applications. 285) Pr. The output signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr.3 s 6Hz 0. (24VDC 0.1A) Note: 1.PARAMETERS 4. ! This function is only valid when "7" or "8" is set in Pr. 282 "brake operation frequency" Pr. 281 "brake operation time at start" Pr. 9999 Related parameters Pr. 60 to select brake sequence mode. 190 = 20 MC Mechanical brake 4 NFB R 〈L1〉 Power supply S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 Start signal Multi-speed signal MC Brake opening completion signal (BRI signal) STF RH (Note 2) RUN AU (Note 1) SD SE U V W 24VDC Motor * MC Brake opening request signal (BOF signal) *Note the permissible current of the inverter's internal transistor.3 s 0 9999 Setting Range 0 to 30Hz 0 to 200% 0 to 2 s 0 to 5 s 0 to 30Hz 0 to 5 s 0. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) <Wiring example> • Sink logic • Pr. 280 "brake opening current detection time" Pr. 184 = 15 • Pr. 1 0 to 30Hz. 60 "intelligent mode selection" Pr. 283 "brake operation time at stop" Pr. 195 settings. 180 to Pr. 2. This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at starting due to the operation timing fault of the mechanical brake or an overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop. 180 to Pr. 285) Parameter Number 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 Factory Setting 3Hz 130% 0.63 Brake sequence function (Pr. ! The mechanical brake opening completion signal may either be entered or not entered into the inverter. 279 "brake opening current" Pr. 190 to Pr. 278 "brake opening frequency" Pr. (With the exception of Pr. 186 settings.

the inverter starts running. * If Pr.13 Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input).279 ON ON Closed Electromagnetic brake operation Opened Closed Time 170 .283 Output frequency STF Output current Brake opening request (BOF signal) Pr. 282. the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 279.283 Output frequency STF Output current Brake opening request (BOF signal) Brake opening completion (BRI signal) Electromagnetic brake operation Closed ON Pr. When the time set in Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input) Target frequency Pr. the brake opening request signal (BOF) is switched off. ! At stop: When the speed has decreased to the frequency set in Pr.278 Pr.280 Pr. When the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed.281 Pr.278 Pr.278 Pr.282 Pr. 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr. the inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed. 283 elapses after the brake operation confirmation signal (BRI) was activated.279 ON ON Opened Closed Time 2) Pr. When the output frequency reaches the value set in Pr.PARAMETERS <Operation example> ! At start: When the start signal is input to the inverter.13 Pr. 1) Pr. 60 = "7" (brake opening completion signal input) Target frequency Pr.278 Pr. this time is the time after the brake opening request signal is output.282 Pr. 281 elapses after the brake opening completion signal (BRI) was activated.281 Pr.280 Pr. the inverter output is switched off.

If (detected frequency) . Pr. 80. Generally. 60. If deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation.1-0. 180 to Pr. 282 0 to 30Hz 283 0 to 5 s 0 1 284 285 0 to 30Hz 9999 * When vector control is executed with the FR-A5AP. set this parameter to about 0. 60 = 7. Overspeed is not detected. The brake opening completion signal (BRI) is a parameter valid when Pr. set the acceleration time to 1 second or longer. Pr. 60 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened. 81 •"9999") 2) Set "7 or 8" (brake sequence mode) in Pr. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr.1 seconds.1 to 0. for details. 282 ≥ Pr. 190 to Pr. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. 195 According to Pr. Note that the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is not activated when the brake sequence mode is selected. Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%. 60 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened + about 0. Pr. Pr.0Hz. At this frequency. If the setting is too low. the inverter alarm (E. Generally. the load is liable to drop with gravity at start. Signal BOF BRI Terminals Used According to Pr.MB1) is provided to shut off the output and switch off the brake opening request signal (BOF). 180 to Pr. 278 setting + 3-4Hz. Pr.3 seconds. 180 to 186 and Pr. 195. 171 . 60. the other functions may be affected.MB2) is provided to shut off the output and switch off the brake opening request signal (BOF). 285 in the PLG feedback control mode.PARAMETERS <Setting> (1) Parameter setting 1) Select advanced magnetic flux vector control. it is recommended to set "7" (brake opening completion signal input) in Pr. Generally. (Refer to page 214. (2) Explanations of terminals used The terminals must be allocated using Pr. This parameter may only be set if Pr. set this parameter to the Pr. this is replaced with excessive speed deviation detection frequency. 190 to Pr. This parameter may only be set if Pr. 278. Deceleration is not detected.3 seconds. To ensure more complete sequence control. (Pr. 60 = 8 (without mechanical opening completion signal) brake opening completion signal) Brake opening request Brake opening request  Brake opening completion signal 4 Note: 1. 190 to Pr. 60 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + about 0. 60 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + 0. 186 and Pr. the inverter alarm (E. 278 ≤ Pr. 282.2 to 0.) Note: When using this function. set this parameter to about 50 to 90%. 60 = 7 (with mechanical brake Pr. 195. the brake opening request signal (BOF) is switched off. 2.(output frequency) > Pr.2 seconds. 186 Brake Sequence Mode Pr. 3) Refer to the following table and set the parameters: Parameter Number 278 279 280 281 Name Brake opening frequency Brake opening current Brake opening current detection time Brake operation time at start Brake closing frequency Brake operation time at stop Deceleration detection function selection Overspeed detection frequency* Setting 0 to 30Hz 0 to 200% 0 to 2 s 0 to 5 s Description Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor + about 1.

PARAMETERS (3) Protective functions If any of the following errors occur in the brake sequence mode. (Overspeed detection function) Deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation (Use Pr.MB1 E. Note: During PLG feedback control (when the FR-A5AP option is loaded). (Gravity drop prevention function) More than 2 seconds after the run command (forward or reverse rotation) is input. the brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not switch on.(output frequency) > Pr.MB6 E. More than 2 seconds after the brake opening request signal (BOF) switched off at a stop.MB4 E. On the operation panel (FR-DU04) LED and parameter unit (FR-PU04) screen. 285) is valid if the Pr.MB5 E. the brake opening completion signal (BRI) switched off during that period. the inverter results in an alarm. 286 in the PLG feedback control mode. Though the inverter had switched on the brake opening request signal (BOF). the brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not switch off.MB3 E. 60 setting is other than "7 or 8". the following errors are displayed: Error Display E.MB7 Error Display (Detected frequency) . 284 to select this function.MB2 E.) (Except stall prevention operation) Brake opening request signal (BOF) switched on though the motor is at a stop. the brake opening request signal (BOF) does not switch on. overspeed detection (Pr. shuts off the output and switches off the brake opening request signal (BOF terminal). 172 . More than 2 seconds after the brake opening request signal switched on.

71 "Applied motor" Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay" Pr. 173 . 286 287 Details Set the drooping amount at the rated torque as a percentage with respect to the rated frequency. The upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 120Hz.00s Min. This function is valid when Pr. Pr. The rated current follows the value set in Pr. Parameter No. 1.64 Droop control (Pr. the function will be invalid (no droop control). The drooping amount at the rated torque is set by the droop gain as a percentage using the rated frequency as a reference.2.01% 0.PARAMETERS 4. 4. 286 287 Name Droop gain Droop filter constant Frequency Setting range 0 to 100% 0. setting unit 0. When the setting value is "0".01s Factory setting 0% 0. ! The output frequency is varied according to the amount of torque current during unbalanced flux vector control and vector control.00 to 1. and provides speed drooping characteristics. 287 "Droop filter constant" Related parameters Pr. 117. Set the time constant of the filter applied on the torque amount current. 9 "Motor rated current". 286 "Droop gain" Pr. 286. 287) Pr. Pr. This function is valid when the operation state is constant speed operation. 286 ≠ "0" during unbalanced flux vector and vector control. 84 "Rated motor frequency" This function balances the load in proportion to the load torque with or without PLG. Droop compensation frequency = Amount of torque current after filtering Rated frequency × droop gain × Rated current 100 ! Confirm the following items when using the droop control. 2. 3. This is effective in balancing the load when using multiple inverters. 342 $ Refer to Pr.3s Droop compensation frequency Droop gain Torque 100% 4 <Setting> Refer to the following table and set each parameter. Parameter No.

900 Pulse period T2 :Set in Pr. ! Terminal FM provides the pulse output. the meter normally deflects to full scale. 5 to 14. (Note the polarity. 17. Pr. 5 to 14. set "2" (output current. preset in Pr. AM is the positive terminal.2.PARAMETERS 4. 55 or Pr. 54. (1) Calibration of terminal FM 1) Connect a meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals FM-SD. When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the output signal. 158. 54 "FM terminal function selection" Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection" ! By using the operation panel/parameter unit. 55 or Pr.) 2) Set any of "1 to 3. At this 1440pulse/s. 1440pulse/s (+) T1 8VDC (5) SD (AM) FM (Digital meter) (-) (+) (-) * Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU04) or parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used for calibration. ! You can display a digital value on a digital counter using the pulse train signal from terminal FM. 55 "frequency monitoring reference" Pr. 158. Pr. the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. When the running frequency has been selected for monitoring. 18 and 21" in Pr. 3) When outputting a signal which cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation. Used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for such a reason as a remote frequency meter. In this case. 56 the running frequency or current at which the output signal is 10V. you can calibrate the meter connected to the inverter from the parameter unit without providing a calibration resistor. set "21" in Pr. 55. When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the output signal. adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor. 900 "FM terminal calibration" Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration" Related parameters Pr. 901 allows the output voltage ratio (gain) to be adjusted according to the meter reading. preset in Pr. FM is the positive terminal. 55 (frequency monitoring) Set in Pr.) 2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected. (2) Calibration of terminal AM 1) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals AM-5. Meter 1mA full scale Analog meter 1mA (AM) FM *Calibration resistor (5) SD T2 Pulse width T1 :Adjusted with Pr. After that. By setting Pr. use this resistor and the operation panel or parameter unit together to make calibration. 17. 900.65 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. the ratio of this FM terminal output frequency can be set in Pr. ! Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale state of each monitored data. e. (Note the polarity. 54. 56 "current monitoring reference" Pr. 18 and 21" in Pr. However. 901) Pr. 56 (current monitoring) Note: The parameter is factory-set to 1mA full-scale or 1440pulse/s FM output frequency at 60Hz. A 1440pulse/s output is provided at the full scale value as explained in the section of Pr.g. 174 . 56 the running frequency or current at which the output signal is 1440pulse/s. 3) Set any of "1 to 3. you can calibrate a meter connected to terminal FM to full scale. for example) in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. output current. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC. 900.

the pointer may take some time to move. refer to the FR-PU04 instruction manual. When a frequency meter is connected across terminals FM-SD to monitor the running frequency.5 seconds. the FM terminal output is filled to capacity at the factory setting if the maximum output frequency reaches or exceeds 100Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400pulse/s. 900 "FM terminal calibration" or Pr. the Pr. Pr. 2) Set the running frequency. 4) Read Pr. 55 setting must be changed to the maximum frequency. (Depending on the setting. REMARKS Calibration can also be made for external operation. (Motor need not be connected. 900 is factory-set to 1mA full-scale or 1440pulse/s FM output frequency at 60Hz. 4 175 . 3. 3) Press the SET key.) 7) Press the SET key for about 1. For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04). Calibration can also be made during operation. Note: 1. In this case. 5) Press the FWD key to run the inverter. 901 "AM terminal calibration". 4. 2. 8) Press the STOP RESET key to stop the inverter.PARAMETERS <Operation procedure> • When operation panel (FR-DU04) is used 1) Select the PU operation mode.) 6) Hold down the key to adjust the meter pointer to the required position. Set the frequency in the external operation mode and make calibration in accordance with steps 4) to 8).

73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain" Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain" You can set the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5V. ! Use Pr. 2) Any point can be adjusted with no voltage applied across terminals 2-5.902 Pr.PARAMETERS 4. Parameter Number 902 903 904 905 Factory Setting 0V 5V 4mA 20mA 0Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 0Hz 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 Setting Range 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 0 to 20mA 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz 1 to 400Hz 0 to 60Hz 1 to 400Hz Related parameters Pr. ! Use Pr. 2) Any point can be adjusted with no current flowing at terminal 4.904 0 0 0 4 Frequency setting signal 100% Pr. e. 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC. 905 to set the output frequency relative to the 20mA frequency command current (4 to 20mA). 3) Bias voltage is not adjusted.905 Pr.66 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain (Pr. ! Use Pr.g.903 Pr. 176 . 904 "frequency setting current bias" Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" Pr. 905) Pr. ! Use Pr. 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mADC). 904 to set the bias frequency at 4mA. 902 to Pr. 73. 0 to 5VDC. 903 to set the output frequency relative to the frequency command voltage set in Pr.2.73 5V 10V 20mA <Setting> (1) The frequency setting voltage biases and gains may be adjusted in either of the following three ways: 1) Any point can be adjusted with a voltage applied across terminals 2-5. 79 "operation mode selection" Factory setting Output frequency (Hz) 60Hz 〈50Hz〉 Gain Bias Pr. (2) The frequency setting current biases and gains may be adjusted in either of the following three ways: 1) Any point can be adjusted with a current flowing at terminal 4. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias" Pr. 3) Bias current is not adjusted. 902 to set the bias frequency at 0V. and the output frequency. The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input signal entered from outside the inverter to set the output frequency.

PARAMETERS Pr. 177 .) <Adjustment procedure> When using the frequency setting signal from the operation panel (FR-DU04) to set the frequency. !Frequency setting mode FR-DU04 MODE CONTROL PANEL !Monitoring mode FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL !Parameter setting mode FR-DU04 MODE CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MODE !Help mode FR-DU04 MODE CONTROL PANEL !Operation mode (PU operation mode) FR-DU04 MODE CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Confirm that the PU operation mode ( ) has been chosen. . 79 "operation mode selection" ≠ "0"). (1) Power-on (monitoring mode) FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD (2) Choose the PU operation mode. ) ). In the JOG operation mode ( or external operation mode ( press the If the ( ). 904. 905 can also be adjusted similarly. Pr.902. key to display 4 cannot be displayed by pressing key in the external operation mode (if Pr. Pr. 1) Using the MODE key. 79 "operation mode selection". make sure that the PU operation mode has been selected. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain" (Pr. refer to 2) and set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr.

Example: To change the external operation mode (Pr. !Parameter setting mode FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Most significant digit flickers SET SET Middle digit flickers Least significant digit flickers ×7 times SET ×9 times 0 to 9 0 to 9 !Current setting SET SET !Setting change Press for 1. Press the key once. choose the "parameter setting mode" as in 1). SET SET 178 . press the key. "1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr.5 s SET !Setting write Flicker If appears. you did not press the key for 1. Restart the procedure from the beginning. If appears. 79=1) Using the MODE key. and restart the setting from the begining.5 seconds when writing the setting. make sure that the forward rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal connected to the control terminal is not on.PARAMETERS 2) Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection". 79. If it is on. 79=2) to the PU operation mode (Pr. turn it off.

904 and Pr. Hz A V CONTROL PANEL MON EXT REV PU FWD SET Most significant digit flickers. Press for 1. Middle digit flickers. (Pr.5 s SET ! Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5 FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD In any of the methods in (5) to (7) on the following page. SET Least significant digit flickers.PARAMETERS (3) Read Pr. 902. Pr. ×9 times SET ×3 times SET 0 to 9 Current setting of gain frequency FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL 0 to 9 Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD (4) Set a gain frequency in Pr.) !Parameter setting mode Using the FR-DU04 MODE key. 903 and show the current setting of the gain frequency. the gain frequency change will not be reflected. 903 and show the analog voltage A/D value across terminals 2-5 in %. 179 . (when the frequency is set to 80Hz) Current setting of !Changing the gain gain frequency frequency FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD MON EXT REV PU Hz A V FWD 4 Press to change the set frequency. continue the setting until the analog voltage A/D value flickers. If you end the setting here. choose the "parameter setting mode" as in (2)-1). 905 can also be adjusted similarly.

5V (10V.5 s SET Flicker When the potentiometer is at the maximum position.) FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Press for 1. 79 "operation mode selection" according to the operation mode to be used. from the external potentiometer) (current: across terminals 4-5) (When applying 5V) ! Analog voltage A/D value (%) !Apply a 5V voltage.PARAMETERS 1) When not adjusting the gain voltage → go to (5) 2) When adjusting any point by applying a voltage → go to (6) 3) When adjusting any point without applying a voltage → go to (7) (5) How to adjust the gain frequency only without the voltage being adjusted or key once to display ! Analog voltage A/D value (%) !Press the across terminals 2-5 the current analog voltage adjustment. 20mA)] FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD Press for 1. (7) How to adjust any point without applying a voltage across terminals 2-5 (without a current flowing across terminals 4-5) (when changing from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%)) !Set the gain voltage (%) with the key.g. (9) Re-set Pr.5 s Flicker (6) How to adjust any point by applying a voltage across terminals 2-5 (e. 100(%) for ! Analog voltage A/D value (%) once to display the current across terminals 2-5 analog voltage calibration value. the value is nearly 100.5 s SET Flicker (8) Press the SET key to shift to the next parameter. FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL Hz A V MON EXT REV PU FWD SET SET Example: When analog voltage adjustment value is 100%(5V) Press for 1. or key !Press the [0(%) for 0V (0mA). 180 . across terminals 2-5 (Turn the external potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5 to maximum.

990) Pr. the motor will start running at the set frequency by merely switching on the start signal.67 Buzzer control (Pr. The input signal to terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the frequency setting signal. 903 or Pr. the Pr. CAUTION Be careful when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0V. If the Pr. refer to the FR-PU04 instruction manual. Parameter Number 990 Factory Setting 1 Setting Range 0. 1: With beep 4 181 . For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04). 4. 1 Remarks 0: Without beep. 20 value does not change. Even without the speed command.2.PARAMETERS Note: 1. 2. 990 "buzzer control" You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press any key of the operation panel or parameter unit. 905 (gain adjustment) value is changed.

.....CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this product...................... 195 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 5 ...2 Troubleshooting ....... 193 5............................. 182 5........... Chapter 1 5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection .. Always read the instructions before using the equipment...1 Errors (Alarms) .............................................

• Resetting method When the protective function is activated and the inverter has stopped its output.1 Error (alarm) definitions (1) Major faults When the protective function is activated. the operation panel shows "Err. T〈L1. the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. S. To reset. then open.2 Troubleshooting" and clear up the cause by taking proper action. If an alarm stop has occurred. If RES-SD are kept shorted. the inverter cannot restart. refer to "5. therefore.1 Errors (Alarms) PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5. the inverter output is shut off and the alarm is output. and resume operation.OC1 FR-PU04 OC During Acc Description Check point Corrective action Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during acceleration. L2. L3〉) is supplied. Operation Panel Indication Name E.OC2 FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OC Check point Corrective action Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during constant speed. the inverter must be reset to restart it. use any of the following methods: switch power off once.5. then on again. 5. 182 . • If "E. T〈L1. • When the protective function is activated. When the protective function is activated. Check for sudden acceleration. Operation Panel Indication Name Description E. the inverter output is kept stopped (and the motor is coasted to a stop). disconnect the motor once and then start the inverter. This indication also appears when the start signal is entered with power supplied to the R1<L11> and S1<L21> terminals only. contact your sales representative. Check for sudden load change.1 seconds. If "E. L3〉).OC1" is always lit at a start. L2.OC1" is still lit. • Increase the acceleration time. S." and the parameter unit indicates that the inverter is being reset. the corresponding protective function is activated and the error (alarm) indication appears automatically on the PU display.1 Errors (Alarms) If any fault has occurred in the inverter. short reset terminal RES-SD for more than 0. the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. Check that main circuit power (R. take the corresponding corrective action. then reset the inverter. Check for output short circuit. Keep load stable. • Supply main circuit power (R. or press the STOP RESET key of the operation panel or parameter unit (use the help function of the parameter unit). Check for output short circuit. Unless reset.1.

It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system. the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. Check mechanical brake operation.OV1 FR-PU04 OV During Acc Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration A prealarm (RB indication) occurs if the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage reaches 85% of the specified value due to regenerative energy.OV3 FR-PU04 OV During Dec Description Check point Corrective action Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop A prealarm (RB indication) occurs if the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage reaches 85% of the specified value due to regenerative energy. Check for sudden speed reduction. Operation Panel Indication Name E. the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. If that voltage reaches or exceeds the specified value. If that voltage reaches or exceeds the specified value. Check for too fast operation of motor's mechanical brake. If that voltage reaches or exceeds the specified value. • Use the brake unit or power regeneration converter (FR-RC) as required. Check for output short circuit. Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the inertia moment of the load) • Decrease the braking duty. E. Check for too slow acceleration.OV2 FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OV Description Check point Corrective action Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed A prealarm (RB indication) occurs if the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage reaches 85% of the specified value due to regenerative energy. • Keep load stable. Decrease the acceleration time. It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system. 5 183 .OC3 FR-PU04 OC During Dec Check point Corrective action Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed). • Increase the deceleration time. Check for sudden load change. Operation Panel Indication Name E. Check for sudden speed reduction.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Operation Panel Indication Name Description E. It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system. • Use the brake unit or power regeneration converter (FR-RC) as required. the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.

acceleration/deceleration time setting. 71 setting to the constant-torque motor setting. Check the motor for use under overload.IPF FR-PU04 Inst.THM FR-PU04 Motor Ovrload Description Check point Corrective action Motor overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection) (Note 1) The electronic overcurrent protection in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability during constant-speed operation.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Operation Panel Indication Name E.) Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.THT FR-PU04 Inv. Corrective action • Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure. and the inverter restarts if the start signal is on upon power restoration. Pwr. When 85% of the preset value is reached. • For a constant-torque motor. the alarm warning output contacts open (across terminals B-C) and Description close (across terminals A-C). • Reduce the load weight. Reduce the load weight. provide a thermal relay in the inverter output side since the motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. • Remedy the instantaneous power failure. Operation Panel Indication Name E. pre-alarm (TH indication) occurs. (Overload immunity 150%. In some operating status (load size. Resetting the inverter initializes the internal heat integrating data of the electronic overcurrent protection. When a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or two or more motors are run. (The inverter continues operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15ms. change the Pr. the alarm warning output is not provided. the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.) Check the motor for use under overload. overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration. but the inverter performs protective operation to prevent a fault from occurring in itself.). Operation Panel Indication Name 184 . E. At this time. When the specified value is reached. etc. Loss Instantaneous power failure protection (Note 2) If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off). the instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to stop the inverter output in order to prevent the control circuit from malfunctioning. • Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure. inverse-time characteristics cause the electronic overcurrent protection to be activated to stop the inverter output in order to protect the output transistors. (Refer to page 89. 60s. Overload Description Check point Corrective action Note 1: Inverter overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection) (Note 1) If a current of more than 150% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur (200% or less).) Note 2: When an instantaneous power failure occurs. the alarm display and alarm output are not provided. (Note 2) If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms.

the control circuit will not operate properly and will result in decreased motor torque or increased heat generation.UVT FR-PU04 Under Voltage Description Check point Corrective action Undervoltage protection If the power supply voltage of the inverter reduces. the inverter output is stopped. Reduce the load and operating duty. if the power supply voltage reduces below 150V (about 300V for the 400V class). • Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+-P1. When a jumper is not connected across P/+-P1. • Check for cooling fin clogging.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Operation Panel Indication Name E. E. the overheat sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output. If the relay contacts are reset automatically. 185 .FIN FR-PU04 H/Sink O/Temp Fin overheat If the cooling fin overheats. Remedy the ground fault portion. E. the inverter will not restart unless it is reset. 5 This function is activated only when OH has been set to any of Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection). Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable. Check the power supply system equipment such as power supply. 186 (input terminal function selection). Check for start of large-capacity motor. Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name E. the undervoltage protective function is activated. 180 to Pr.OHT FR-PU04 OH Fault Description Check point Corrective action Note 3: External thermal relay operation (Note 3) If the external thermal relay designed for motor overheat protection or the internally mounted temperature relay in the motor switches on (contacts open). 180 to Pr. this function stops the inverter output. • Check for too high ambient temperature. Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+-P1. Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications. To prevent this. • Check for motor overheating.GF FR-PU04 Ground Fault Output side ground fault overcurrent protection This function stops the inverter output if a ground fault overcurrent flows due to a ground fault which occurred in the inverter's output side (load side).

• Check for a wrong option function setting and operation. Contact your sales representative.g. S. • Reduce the number of communication options used to one. Cct.PE FR-PU04 Corrupt Memry Parameter storage device alarm Stops the inverter output if a fault occurs in the E2PROM device which stores parameter settings. Fault Brake transistor alarm detection If the brake circuit fault has occurred due to damaged brake transistors. L2. In this case. Contact your sales representative. • Check the parameter (Pr. Note 4: The FR-A5NR (relay output/computer link) may be used with another communication option. E. Reduce the load weight. T <L1. Corrective action • When the high power factor converter is connected. L2. • Reduce load J.) Check the motor for use under overload. Operation Panel Indication Name Description E. • Check that the plug-in option is connected to the connector securely. 30) setting and wiring. L2. this function stops the inverter output.BE FR-PU04 Br. • Check that the termination resistor is fitted properly.OPT FR-PU04 Option Fault Option alarm Stops the inverter output if two or more communication options are fitted. this alarm appears if an AC power supply is accidentally connected to R. only the relay output function may be used and the computer link is unusable. contact fault of the plug-in option other than the communication option). 186 . • Connect the plug-in option securely. (1 to 3 indicates the option slot numbers. check for an AC power supply connected to the R. L3> terminals may have damaged the inverter. In this case.OLT FR-PU04 Still Prev STP ( OL shown during stall prevention operation) Stall prevention The running frequency has fallen to 0 by stall prevention activated. L3>.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name E.. S. (OL while stall prevention is being activated. L3> terminals. etc.OP1 to OP3 FR-PU04 Option slot alarm 1 to 3 Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Option slot alarm Stops the inverter output if a functional alarm occurs in the plug-in option loaded in the corresponding slot (e. etc. the inverter power must be switched off immediately. • Confirm the option function setting. E. (Note 4) Description When the high power factor converter is connected. Change the inverter. • Check that the number of communication options fitted is one. Check point • When the high power factor converter is connected. communication alarm of the communication option. S. • Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper. connecting an AC power supply to the R. Check for too many number of parameter write times. T <L1.) • Check the communication cable for wire breakage. E. T <L1.

"16" or "17" was set in Pr. the inverter self-determines it as an alarm and stops the output. the operation panel or PU is disconnected. 5 Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action 187 . • Check that the capacity of the used motor is not smaller than the inverter capacity. E. this function stops the inverter output. a fault of the communication option itself.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Operation Panel Indication Name E. • Check the Pr. • Check the wiring (Check the motor for a fault).RET FR-PU04 Retry No Over Retry count exceeded If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set. Find the cause of alarm occurrence. This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the time set in Pr. V. when "2". This function stops the inverter output if the number of successive communication errors is greater than the permissible number of retries when the Pr. • Check the setting of Pr. E.) • Connect the communication option securely. • Contact your sales representative. Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication. (1 to 3 indicate the option slot numbers. "3". • Check if the rated motor current is extremely lower than the rated inverter current. 122. E. • Contact your sales representative.g.LF FR-PU04  Output phase failure protection • This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U. occurs. • Check for loose fitting of the DU or PU. 251 "output phase failure protection selection". • Check the cables properly. E. Check that the communication option is plugged in the connector securely.CPU FR-PU04 CPU Fault CPU error If the arithmetic operation of the built-in CPU does not end within a predetermined period. etc. 121 value is "9999" for RS-485 communication from the PU connector. 75 setting.PUE FR-PU04 PU Leave Out Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Parameter unit disconnection This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection". Fit the DU and PU securely.  • Make connection securely. 1 FR-PU04 to Fault 1 to Fault 3 E. W) on the inverter′s output side (load side) results in open phase. e. 3 Option fault The inverter output is stopped if a contact fault occurs at the connector between the inverter and communication option.

To reset.P24 Fault 6 24VDC power output short circuit When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted. Check the PU and cable.0SD FR-PU04 Excessive speed deflection Excessive speed deviation detection The inverter output is stopped if the motor speed increased or decreased due to load. then on again. during vector control executed with the FR-A5AP cannot be controlled to meet the speed command value.  Contact your sales representative. Perform parameter setting check and wiring properly. enter the RES signal or switch power off. etc. 285 during PLG feedback or orientation control selected with the FR-A5AP. Find the cause of alarm occurrence. 6 FR-PU04 E. E. E.P24 FR-PU04 E. use the operation panel or switch power off. 7 Fault 7 CPU error This function stops the inverter output if a communication error occurs in the built-in CPU. this function shuts off the power supply output. At this time. 278 to Pr. E.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name E. Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable.CTE FR-PU04  Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Operation panel power supply short circuit When the operation panel power supply (P5S of the PU connector) is shorted. Check for sudden load change. 285). At this time. the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used and RS-485 communication from the PU connector cannot be made. Remedy the short circuit portion.(output frequency) has become less than Pr. this function shuts off the power output.MB1 to 7  FR-PU04 Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Brake sequence error • The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence function (Pr. then on again. To reset. 188 . E. E. Take action to avoid sudden load change. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal. Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output. all external contact inputs switch off.MB1 occurs and the inverter output is stopped. • If (detected frequency) .

You can make parameter setting to output the light fault signal. If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of the rated inverter current flows in the motor. The acceleration time may change. 244 "cooling fan operation selection". When the overload current has reduced below 150%.until the overload current reduces to prevent overcurrent speed operation shut-off. Check the motor for use under overload. 22 "stall prevention operation level" or make the stall prevention inoperative using Pr. Refer to page 150) Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action (3) Warnings Operation Panel Indication Name OL FR-PU04 OL FN FR-PU04 Fan fault Fan fault For the inverter. If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of the rated inverter current flows in the motor. 156 "stall prevention operation selection". this function lowers the frequency During constant. When the deceleration overload current has reduced below 150%. 195 (output terminal function selection). Change the fan. the output is not shut off. which contains a cooling fan. (2) Minor fault When the protective function is activated. Increase the stall prevention operation level using Pr. (Set "98" in any of Pr. this function decreases the frequency again. Check the cooling fan for a fault. 189 . Check for encoder signal wire break. this function increases the frequency again.ECT FR-PU04 No encoder signal Wire break detection The inverter output is stopped if the encoder signal is turned off during orientation. FN appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault or operates differently from the setting of Pr. Description Check point Corrective action Stall prevention (Over current) If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of the rated inverter current flows in the motor. 190 to Pr. PLG feedback or vector control executed with the FR-A5AP. When the acceleration overload current has reduced below 150%. 5 Note 5: The stall prevention operation current may be set as desired. It is factory-set to 150%. this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current reduces to prevent the During inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. Repair wire break. this function increases the frequency up to the set value.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action E. this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload current reduces to prevent the During inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off.

• You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication Name Description Check point Corrective action Operation Panel Indication oL FR-PU04 oL Stall prevention (overvoltage) If the regenerative energy of the motor increases too much to During exceed the brake capability. This alarm appears if: • The RES signal is on. Check for sudden speed reduction. Perform operation correctly. As soon as the regenerative energy has reduced. • You attempted to set any parameter value outside its setting range. If it reaches 100% of the preset level. RB Regenerative brake prealarm This alarm appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches 85% of the value set in Pr. Increase the deceleration time. Description Corrective action 190 . Check that the brake resistor is not used frequently. STOP RESET FR-PU04 PS key of the PU has been set in Pr. Increase the deceleration time using Pr. PS PU stop A stop made by pressing the stop selection". Err.OV_) occurs if the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%. motor overload shutoff (E. • Normal communication cannot be made between the PU and inverter.THM) occurs. 75 "PU STOP RESET Check for a stop made by pressing the Refer to page 100. Check for large load or sudden acceleration. • You attempted to change the operation mode during operation. 8 "deceleration time". The deceleration time may change. • You attempted to set any parameter value in the external operation mode. Regenerative overvoltage (E. deceleration resumes. 70 "special regenerative brake duty". Reduce the load volume or the frequency of operation. 77 "parameter write disable selection" has been set to disable parameter write. this function stops the decrease deceleration in frequency to prevent overvoltage shut-off. • You attempted to set any parameter value during operation (while signal STF or STR is ON). TH FR-PU04 TH Electronic overcurrent protection prealarm This alarm appears if the cumulative value of the electronic overcurrent protection reaches 85% of the preset level. RB FR-PU04 key of the operation panel.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5.3 Correspondences between digital and actual characters There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel: Actual 0 Digital Actual A Digital Actual M Digital 1 B N 2 C O 3 D o 4 E P 5 F S 6 G T 7 H U 8 I V 9 J r L - 5 191 . 5. After resetting. By pressing the MODE key at this point without resetting the inverter. the display shows the output frequency. This also applies to the current. you can confirm the data in the alarm history (refer to page 51). In this way.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of an alarm When any alarm has occurred.1. it is possible to know the running frequency at the occurrence of the alarm.1. the display automatically switches to the indication of the corresponding protective function (error).

195 setting is "99" (factory setting).OC3 E. an alarm definition can be output as a 4-bit digital signal.OPT E. Correlations between alarm definitions and alarm codes are as follows. 7 E. 1: Output transistor ON (common terminal SE) The alarm output assumes that Pr.OSD Output Terminal Signal On-Off SU 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IPF 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 OL 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 FU 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Alarm Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E E Alarm Output (across B-C) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Not provided (Closed) (Provided when OLT is displayed (Open)) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) Provided (Open) 1 1 1 1 F (Note) 0: Output transistor OFF. press the Operation 2: Switch power off once.OC2 E.OP3 E. 6 E. Note that the electronic overcurrent protection's internal heat calculation value and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.PUE E.RET E.IPF E.4 Alarm code output By setting Pr. 3 E. 76 "alarm code output selection".THM E. 192 . STOP RESET key to reset the inverter.OP1 to E.1.OV3 E.OLT E. then switch it on again.5 Resetting the inverter The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations.LF E. Operation 1: Using the operation panel (FR-DU04).FIN E.THT E. 5.1. PE E.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5. This signal is output from the open collector output terminals equipped as standard on the inverter.OC1 E.ECT E.OV1 E. Operation Panel Display (FR-DU04) E. GF E.OV2 E. Operation 3: Switch on the reset signal (RES). BE E.UVT E.CPU E. 1 to E.OHT E.

2. Check that the load is not too heavy. 0. Pr. 905) settings are correct. Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on. 0. Check that various operational functions (such as three-speed operation). Check that the bias and gain (Pr.1 Motor remains stopped 1) Check the main circuit Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is provided).2 Motor rotates in opposite direction Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U. (Use shielded cables) Check that the load is not too heavy. 15 "jog frequency" setting is not lower than the Pr. 2. especially the maximum frequency (Pr.5. 4) Check the load Check that the load is not too heavy. 5. reverse rotation) are connected properly. are not zero. 13 "starting frequency" value. Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero. Pr.2. and check again. (Measure the input signal level. 112) setting is not too large. 14) is proper for the application. 5) Others Check that the ALARM lamp is not lit. 3) Check the parameter settings Check that the reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 902 to Pr. 78) is not selected. Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. 902 to Pr. Pr. Pr. Pr.2. Check that the set value of the load pattern selection (Pr. 193 . 1).4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short. Check that the torque boost (Pr. it is recommended to initialize the parameters (return to factory settings). Check that the shaft is not locked.2. 46. 2) Check the input signals Check that the start signal is input. Check that the conductor across P1-P〈+〉 is connected.2 Troubleshooting PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5. V and W is correct. Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to 20mA. Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input. 5 5. 13) setting is not greater than the running frequency.2 Troubleshooting POINT: Check the corresponding areas. Check that the start signals (forward rotation. 5. 19. 79) setting is correct. Check that the motor is connected properly. Check that the operation mode (Pr. Check that the starting frequency (Pr. 1. If the cause is still unknown. 57 = other than "9999"). 5. 905. Pr. Check that the Pr.) Check that the following parameter settings are proper: Pr. 46. Check that the CS signal is not off when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr.2. Pr. 112) setting is not too large to activate the stall function. 5.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting Check that the frequency setting signal is correct.5 Motor current is large Check that the load is not too heavy. Check that the torque boost (Pr. re-set the required parameter values. Check that the sink/source connector is fitted securely.

. Check that the SET key ( WRITE key) is pressed for longer than 1. Check that the STF or STR signal is off.7 Speed varies during operation During operation under advanced magnetic flux vector control. 5. For any other setting (1 to 8). load may become heavy in winter. 77 "parameter write inhibit selection". the operation mode cannot be changed. (In agitators. the operation mode is limited according to the setting.9 Operation panel (FR-DU04) display is not provided Make sure that the operation panel is connected securely with the inverter..2.5 seconds. 80) and the number of applied motor poles (Pr. 46. 1) setting is correct.. External input signal 2.) Check that the torque boost (Pr. the output frequency varies with load fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. 194 .2... Check the setting of Pr.11 Parameter write cannot be performed Check that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON). Check that the load is not too heavy. 0.. check the following: 1. Check that a malfunction does not occur due to an undesirable current when the transistor output unit is connected. Pr. (Refer to page 18. Pr. This is a normal operation and is not a fault. 5.. Check that you are not attempting to make parameter setting in the external operation mode. Press the operation panel's MODE key two times and key (press the PU key for the parameter unit press the (FR-PU04)). 1) Inspection of load Check that the load is not varying..... etc..10 POWER lamp is not lit Make sure that the wiring and installation are correct... 2) Inspection of input signal Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying. When the setting of Pr. 81) are correct for the inverter and motor capacities in advanced magnetic flux vector control.6 Speed does not increase Check that the maximum frequency (Pr. switching input power on places the inverter in the external operation mode. Check the Pr.2.. 5. 5.. Parameter setting . for example. When it is on..8 Operation mode is not changed properly If the operation mode is not changed properly.42 feet) in advanced magnetic flux vector control. Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals P〈+〉-P1 by mistake.. Check that you are not attempting to make parameter setting outside the setting range.) 3) Others Check that the settings of the applied motor capacity (Pr.2..2. Check that the wiring length is within 30m (98.2. 79 "operation mode selection" is "0" (factory setting).. Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by induced noise.. 79 setting... 112) setting is not too large to activate the stall prevention function.. Check that the wiring length is correct in V/F control. This changes the external operation mode into the PU operation mode. 5.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5...

For periodic inspection. changes in the parts with time.. humidity.. and other factors..5.3. 1) Cooling system: ... etc. 5.. such as acetone.3 Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection... 5) Cooling fan.. 5 195 .. When more than 10 minutes have elapsed..... as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.. a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. 4) Insulation resistance: Measure. etc. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to adverse influence by the operating environment.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection The transistorized inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices..2 Check items (1) Daily inspections • Check the following: 1) Motor operation fault 2) Improper installation environment 3) Cooling system fault 4) Unusual vibration and noise 5) Unusual overheating and discoloration • During operation... temperature changes. benzene.. dust.. 5. such as temperature. consult us. service life. 2) Screws and bolts: ....3. toluene and alcohol.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5.. Do not use detergent or alcohol to clean the display and other sections of the operation panel (FRDU04) or parameter unit (FR-PU04) as these sections may deform. gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol. make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+-N/. etc. When accessing the inverter for inspection. Note: Do not use solvent....These parts may become loose due to vibration...Clean the air filter.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection For some short time after the power is switched off..of the inverter is 30VDC or less using a tester. Check that they are tightened securely and retighten as necessary. check the inverter input voltages using a tester. 5... 3) Conductors and insulating materials: Check for corrosion and damage. relay: Check and change if necessary. When cleaning the inverter. dirt and vibration.. switch power off.. (2) Cleaning Always run the inverter in a clean state..3...

The inverter's main circuit uses semiconductors.3. W 〉 and ground terminal with megger. −10ºC to +40ºC. S. (3) Visual check. (1). non-freezing. 3) For the inverter. humidity. environment dust. (4) Clean. use a meter (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer. (3) No fault. (2) Check cable cables sheaths for breakage. Overall unit Power supply voltage " Visual and auditory checks. Thermometer. (2) Re-tighten. (2). 5. V. block " " (1).5 Pressure test Do not conduct a pressure test. " " " " General 500VDC class megger Main circuit (1) Check conductors for distortion. Terminal Check for damage. (Use a 500VDC megger. Measure voltage across inverter terminals R-S-T 〈L1-L2-L3〉. L2. L3. W 〈L1. (2) No fault.3. Conductors. V. T.6 Daily and Periodic Inspection Area of Inspection Inspection Item Description Interval Periodic Daily 1 2 year years Method Criterion Instrument Check ambient Surrounding temperature.4 Insulation resistance test using megger 1) Before performing the insulation resistance test using a megger on the external circuit.) Power supply R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 Motor Inverter U V W IM DC500V megger Ground terminal 5. disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter. Within permissible AC voltage Meter. which may be deteriorated if a pressure test is made.3. etc. " (1) Disconnect all cables from inverter and measure across terminals R. (2) Visual check. recorder non-freezing Ambient humidity: 90% or less. No fault 196 . (2) Check for loose screws and bolts. General Check for unusual vibration and noise. non-condensing. 2) For the continuity test of the control circuit. conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5. No fault. " Visual check. digital fluctuation multimeter (Refer to page 203) (1) 5M Ω or more. (Variable torque) hygrometer. dirt. " (Refer to page 7) Ambient temperature: (constant torque) −10ºC to +50ºC. (3) Check for overheating of each part. (1) Check with megger (across main circuit terminals and ground terminal). Check that main circuit voltage is normal.

Meter. Voltmeter. W. 500V megger 5 Note: The value for the 400V class is indicated in the parentheses. (1) No fault. (2) Re-tighten (1) Light indicator lamps on panel. Cement resistor. (1) Phase-tophase voltage balance within 4V (8V) for 200V (400V). " " " " " " " (1) Visual check. " " (1) Check with megger (across terminals and ground terminal).PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Daily and Periodic Inspection Area of Inspection Inspection Item Description Interval Periodic Daily 1 2 year years Method Disconnect cables from inverter and measure across terminals R. (1) Check if LED lamp is blown. etc. P. " (1) Auditory. General Motor Insulation resistance (1) Check for unusual vibration and noise. including motor cables. Check reading of meters on panel. (2) Fault must occur because of sequence. sensory. Crlterlon Instrument Inverter module. (1) Check for crack in resistor insulation. W. (2) Check for unusual odor. " " (1) No fault. (2) Check for rough surface on contacts. Must satisfy specified and management values. −〉 with a meter range of 100Ω. (2) Disconnect one end and measure with a meter. (2) Check for loose connection. W. (2) Perform sequence protective operation test to make sure of no fault in protective and display circuits. (1) Check that lamps are lit. +. etc. damage. V. Check that reading is normal. (2) Error should be within ±10% of indicated resistance value. S. V. (2) No fault. (2) Simulatively connect or disconnect inverter protective circuit output terminals. (1) Turn by hand with power off. (1). P. visual checks. L2. (2) Clean. N and U. T. " (Refer to page 198) Analog meter Main circuit Relay Resistor (1) Check for chatter during operation. (1) Check for unusual vibration and noise. (1) Measure voltage across inverter output terminals U-V-W. (2) Visual check. rectifier type voltmeter No unusual vibration. wire-wound resistor. 197 . digital multimeter Digital multimeter. (1) Disconnect cables (1) 5M Ω or more from U. " " Control circuit Operation Proteccheck tive circuit Cooling system Cooling fan Display Display Meter (1) Check balance of output voltages across phases with inverter operated independently. N 〈L1. (2) Check for open cable. (1) Auditory check. Converter module Check resistance across terminals. (2) No fault. ammeter. unusual noise. V. (2) Clean with rag. +. L3. − and U. (2) Check for unusual odor due to overheating.

L2. the measured value is several to several ten’s-of ohms depending on the module type. (Use 100Ω range. Note: 1. V. U. check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged. L3〉 and motor cables (U. circuit tester type. S. etc. If all measured values are almost the same. T) 〈L1. S. V. the modules are without fault. 2. P and N 〈L1. U. W.) <Checking method> Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R. At the time of continuity. <Module device numbers and terminals to be checked> Tester Polarity D1 D2 D3 TR1 TR3 TR5 R 〈L1〉 P 〈+〉 S 〈L2〉 P 〈+〉 T 〈L3〉 P 〈+〉 U P 〈+〉 V P 〈+〉 W P 〈+〉 P 〈+〉 R 〈L1〉 P 〈+〉 S 〈L2〉 P 〈+〉 T 〈L3〉 P 〈+〉 U P 〈+〉 V P 〈+〉 W Inverter module Converter module Measured Value Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity D4 D5 D6 TR4 TR6 TR2 Tester Polarity R 〈L1〉 N 〈−〉 S 〈L2〉 N 〈−〉 T 〈L3〉 N 〈−〉 U N 〈−〉 V N 〈−〉 W N 〈−〉 P 〈+〉 Measured Value Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity Continuity Discontinuity N 〈−〉 R 〈L1〉 N 〈−〉 S 〈L2〉 N 〈−〉 T 〈L3〉 N 〈−〉 U N 〈−〉 V N 〈−〉 W Inverter module TR1 TR3 (Assumes the use of an analog meter. Before measurement. W). T. L3. (2) Prepare a meter. V.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS ! Checking the inverter and converter modules <Preparation> (1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R. W. L2. and check for continuity.) Converter module TR5 D1 R 〈L1〉 S 〈L2〉 T 〈L3〉 D2 D3 C U V W D4 D5 D6 TR4 N 〈–〉 TR6 TR2 198 . + and −〉.

3) Reinstall the fan cover.7 Replacement of parts The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices. The life of the cooling fan bearing is usually 10. Fan cover Fan Fan connectors 2) Disconnect the fan connector(s). The part replacement guidelines for the inverter are indicated in the following table. the cooling fan must be changed every 2 to 3 years if the inverter is run continuously.3. The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics. 3) Remove the fan. Replacement Parts of the Inverter Part Name Cooling fan Smoothing capacitor in main circuit Smoothing capacitor on control board Relays Standard Replacement Interval 2 to 3 years 10 years 10 years  Description Change (as required) Change (as required) Change the board (as required) Change as required Note: For part replacement. ! Reinstallation 1) After confirming the orientation of the fan.000 hours. use care to avoid the cables being caught by the fan. For preventive maintenance.5K> <Fan side face> 2) Reconnect the fan connectors.000 to 35. Hence. the parts must be changed periodically. (1) Cooling fan The cooling fan cools heat-generating parts such as the main circuit semiconductor devices. When wiring. ! Removal 1) Push the catches from above and remove the fan cover. reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up. Lamps and other shortlife parts must also be changed during periodic inspection. the cooling fan must be changed immediately. ↑ AIR FLOW <Example: FR-A520-5. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5. contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center. 5 199 . leading to reduced performance or failure of the inverter.

and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is also used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit.3. pull down the terminal block from the back of the control circuit terminals. 5. 1) Remove the mounting screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. When the measured capacitance of the capacitor has reduced below 85% of the rating. change the capacitor. 2) With both hands. external cracks. change the capacitors about every 10 years. 200 .. Check the following: 1) Case (side faces and bottom face for expansion) 2) Sealing plate (for remarkable warping and extreme cracks) 3) Explosion-proof valve (for excessive valve expansion and operation) 4) Appearance. etc. relays must be changed according to the number of accumulative switching times (switching life). This is greatly influenced by the ambient temperature and operating conditions. When the inverter is operated in on ordinary. leakage. Their characteristics are adversely affected by ripple current. Before replacement. etc. (3) Relays To prevent a contact fault.8 Inverter replacement The inverter can be changed with the control circuit wiring kept connected. discoloration. exercise care not to bend the pins of the control circuit terminal block connector. remove the screws in the wiring cover of the inverter.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS (2) Smoothing capacitors A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing the DC in the main circuit. air-conditioned environment. 3) When installing the terminal block to a new inverter.

5 201 .9 Measurement of main circuit voltages. Accurate measurement cannot be made if you use a tester or general measuring instrument.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 5. measure the following circuits using the instruments given on the next page. When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement.3. currents and power ! Measurement of voltages and currents Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics. accurate measurement depends on the instruments used and circuits measured. Input voltage Output voltage Input current Output current Inverter Ar 3-phase power supply Vr As Vs At Vt P/+ N/– W11 W12 W13 R 〈L1〉 U Au Vu W21 To motor Vv S 〈L2〉 V Av T 〈L3〉 W Aw Vw W22 :Moving-iron type V :Electrodynamometer type - + Instrument types :Moving-coil type :Rectifier type Typical Measuring Points and Instruments Note: Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately.

. etc.PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Measuring Points and Instruments Item Power supply voltage V1 Power supply side current I1 Power supply side power P1 Measuring Point Across R-S. AU. When Pr. 3. 202 SD is common. and across U-V and V-W Difference between phases is within ±1% of maximum output voltage. L2 and L3. STOP.55 (Valid for frequency monitoring only) Across AM (+) −5 Start signal Select signal Reset Output stop Alarm signal Note Across STF. L2-L3 and L3-L1〉 Calculate after measuring power supply voltage. do not use the instrument because eddy-current losses occurring in the metallic parts inside the instrument will increase and may lead to burnout.900 Pulse cycle T2: Set by Pr. Accurate data will not be obtained by a tester. 195 "A. Pf1 = P1 × 100% 3 V1 × I1 Output side voltage V2 Across U-V. In this case. * Values in parentheses indicate those for 400V class.35 × V1 Maximum 380V (760V) during regenerative operation 0 to 5V/0 to 10VDC 0 to ±5V/0 to ±10VDC 4 to 20mADC 5VDC 10VDC Approximately 5VDC at maximum frequency (without frequency meter) T1 Across FM (+) −SD Frequency meter signal DC8V T2 Pulse width T1: Adjusted by Pr. S and T. V and W line currents Output side power P2 At U. S-T and T-R 〈Across L1-L2. Current should be equal to or less than rated inverter current. STR. L2 and L1 line currents〉 At R. and across phase wattmeter (3-wattmeter method) L1-L2. use an approximate effective value type instrument. Output side power factor Pf2 Pf2 = P2 × 100% 3 V2 × I2 Converter output Across P-N 〈Across + and −〉 Across 2 (+) −5 Across 1 (+) −5 Across 4 (+) −5 Across 10 (+) −5 Across 10E (+) −5 Moving-coil type (such as tester) Frequency setting signal Frequency setting power supply POWER lamp lit 1. When the carrier frequency exceeds 5kHz. JOG. Electrodynamic type singleP1 = W 11 + W 12 + W 13 S-T and T-R 〈At L1. and across R-S. CS (+) −SD Across RES (+) −SD Across MRS (+) −SD Across A-C Across B-C Moving-coil type (such as tester) Approximately 10DVC at maximum frequency (without frequency meter) 20 to 30VDC when open. V and W. RT. RM. C terminal function selection" setting is positive logic. RL. S and T line currents Moving-iron type AC ammeter 〈L1. Difference between phases is 10% or lower. power supply side current and power supply side power. B. may be used) (Internal resistance: 50kΩ or larger) “5” is common. RH. L2-L3 and L3-L1〉 Measuring Instrument Moving-iron type AC voltmeter Remarks (Reference Measured Value) * Commercial power supply Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation (Refer to page 203) Power supply side power factor Pf1 R. P2 = W 21 + W 22 2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method) Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor. ON voltage: 1V or less Continuity check (Note 2) <At OFF> <At ON> Across A-C: Discontinuity Continuity Across B-C: Continuity Discontinuity 1. V-Wand W-U Rectifier type AC voltmeter (Note 1) (Not moving-iron type) Moving-iron type AC ammeter (Note 3) Electrodynamic type singlephase wattmeter Output side current I2 U. Moving-coil type (Tester. 2.

....CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter provides the "specifications" of this product... Always read the instructions before using the equipment. 203 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 6 ....1 Standard Specifications ................. Chapter 1 6..................

5 Approx.2) 40.5 39. 4.75 0.7) 30.9 1.7 9.1 Standard Specifications 6.7 8 9.2) Open type (IP00) 13.0 2.0 (121.2 4.4) (5.5 5.5 25 22 22 30 30 30 40 50 44 49.8 175 185 55 55 75 100 82 94.5 (7.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 18 28 37 54 68 80 104 150% 60s. 150% 0.5 10 11 11 15 15 15 20 18.0 (88. the crest value of the inverter output voltage remains unchanged from the DC bus voltage.1 10. NA version) Type FR-A520-""K kW Applicable motor capacity (Note 1) VT CT Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) VT CT Continuous current (A) VT CT Overload capacity (Note 3) VT Voltage (Note 4) Regenerative braking torque Maximum value /Permissible duty HP CT 0.6 23.9 5 5 1. 170 to 264V 60Hz ±5% 4.0 (13. 203 . frequency 52 66 80 100 Enclosed type (IP20 NEMA1) (Note 7) Forced air cooling 3.5s (inverse-time characteristics) Three phase.5 1.6.5 18.1) 40.6 11 12 3.1.5 5. 200V to 220V 50Hz.5 (7.4 145 154 45 45 60 75 67 70.1 1.6 17.2) 55. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated current.0 (28.7 5 5.5s (inverse-time characteristics) 120% 60s. 170 to 253V 60Hz Permissible AC voltage fluctuation Permissible frequency fluctuation Power supply system 1.2) 8. 5.6) 13.1 Standard Specifications SPECIFICATIONS 6 SPECIFICATIONS 6. The maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply voltage. 200V to 220V 50Hz.0 (13. 200 to 230V 60Hz 170 to 242V 50Hz.0 (88. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable when Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.5 7.3 3 3. 3. weight (kg (lbs)).0 (17.2 12. The open type (IP00) is used when the inboard option is fitted after removal of the option wiring port cover.3) Note: 1.5 7. For repeated duty.2 3 3 4.4 1/2 1 1.2 2.1 Model specifications ! 200V class (Japanese version.7 115 130 37 37 50 60 55 58.5 2.7 14.5 2 3 3. 200V to 220V 50Hz.6 215 248 Output 5 10 10 20 25 30 40 6.5 7.5 1. 2.2 17.5 capacity (kVA) (Note 6) Protective structure (JEM 1030) Cooling system Self-cooling 2.6 0. 7. 200% 0. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables). 200 to 240V 60Hz 100% 100% 15% torque/3%ED torque/3%ED torque/2%ED (Note 5) (Note 5) (Note 5) Three phase. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class.7) 13.0 (28. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.6 2.5) with DU Power supply Rated input AC voltage.0 (66.1 3. However. 200V to 220V 50Hz.7 3.3 29 34 7.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 Three phase. allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.7) 3.7) 6.7) 6. 200 to 230V 60Hz 20% torque/continuous Three phase.75 1 1. Short duration rating 5s 6. 200 to 240V 60Hz 170 to 242V 50Hz.7) 3.4 0.1 20. (4.9 30.5 (7.7 25.0 (28.

4 0.8 43. For repeated duty. NA version.6 6.5 1. 4. weight (kg (lbs)).7) (13.3 3. 3. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables). 150% 0.9) (77. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable when Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 43 57 71 86 110 Continuous current (A) VT 1.0 Approx.5 58.5 7.2) (77.5 23.2) (79. The open type (IP00) is used when the inboard option is fitted after removal of the option wiring port cover.75 0.0 13.5s (inverse-time characteristics) Overload capacity (Note 3) VT 120% 60s.7) (28. the crest value of the inverter output voltage remains unchanged from the DC bus voltage.2 3 3.7 3.7) (52.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100 capacity (kVA) (Note 6) Protective structure (JEM Enclosed type (IP20 NEMA1) (Note 7) Open type (IP00) 1030) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling 3.5 18.5 3.0 13.0 13. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated current. Power supply Output 6 204 .8 3 4. 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz voltage. frequency Permissible AC 323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz voltage fluctuation Permissible frequency ±5% fluctuation Power supply system 1.7) (28.3 2. allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.5 3.0 13.5 6.2) (13.SPECIFICATIONS ! 400V class (Japanese version.5 2.7) (7.5s (inverse-time characteristics) Voltage (Note 4) Three phase.1 1.0 35.9 3 4.7 49.5 7. 5.5 3. (7. 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz RegenMaximum erative value 100% torque/2%ED (Note 5) 20% torque/continuous braking /Permissitorque ble duty Rated input AC Three phase. Short duration rating 5s 6.7) (7.7) (7.4) with DU Note: 1.7) (28.9 9.5 25 22 22 30 30 30 40 37 37 50 45 45 60 55 55 75 VT 1 1.6 94.75 1 1. EC version) Type FR-A540-""K kW Applicable motor capacity (Note 1) HP CT 0.5 2.4 1/2 0.6 29 32.7 9 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 CT 150% 60s.7) (7.5 2 2. The maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply voltage.8 6.5 7.0 6.5 39. However.6 16.4 54 65 84 Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) VT 1.7 CT 1.0 35. 2.6 72.0 24.5 10 11 11 15 15 15 20 18.5 3 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 CT 1.9 10.2) (28.2 2.1 6. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.9 30.6 5.1 13 17.5 4. 7.5 3.7 5 5. 200% 0.0 20.0 36.5 25.5 5.5 5.

4 to 20mADC 3-digit BCD or 12-bit binary using operation panel or parameter unit (when the FR-A5AX option is used) Available individually for forward rotation and reverse rotation. forward/reverse rotation prevention.5Hz (for advanced magnetic flux vector control) Manual torque boost 0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually). (Each speed can be set between 0 and 400Hz. motor current (steady or peak value).. within 0. 11 bits/0 to 5V. 0 to 10VDC. electronic overcurrent protection load factor. regenerative brake duty and motor load factor. Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz). offline auto tuning function. computer link operation (RS-485) 5 different signals can be selected from inverter running.2 to 400Hz 0.alarm code (4 bit) output 1 signal can be selected from output frequency.01% of set output frequency for digital input Base frequency set as required between 0 and 400Hz. voltage) Alarm retained at the activation of protective function is reset. motor torque. terminal 1 input: 12 bits/−10 to +10V.) Input terminal signal states. PID lower limit. during program mode operation. motor exciting current.015Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 input: 12 bits/0 to 10V.. Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. load meter. presence or absence can be selected. online auto tuning function. external thermal relay input selection. operation mode selection. input power. instantaneous power failure (undervoltage). Open collector output.SPECIFICATIONS 6. output terminal signal states.. third acceleration/ deceleration time selection Jog operation selection Current input selection Output stop Alarm reset Input signals Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control or advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected) 0. PID forward/reverse rotation. watt-hour meter.2 Common specifications Control system Output frequency range Frequency Analog input setting resolution Digital input Frequency accuracy Voltage/frequency characteristic Starting torque Torque boost Acceleration/deceleration time setting DC injection brake Stall prevention operation level Analog input Frequency setting Digital input signal Start signal Multi-speed selection Second. operation time (0 to 10 s).) Provided with jog operation mode select terminal (Note 1) Input of frequency setting signal 4 to 20mADC (terminal 4) is selected. cumulative energization time. commercial power supply-inverter switch-over MC1. frequency jump operation.3A) Open collector. output voltage. output power. Up to 15 speeds can be selected. output voltage. motor current (steady or peak value). PID control. 30VDC 0. 0 to 5VDC. converter output voltage (steady or peak value). running speed. (Four alarm definitions are only displayed on the operation panel. frequency setting. zero current detection. automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure.3A.1. Constant torque or variable torque pattern can be selected. up to frequency. Selection can be made from output frequency. input power. operation ready. 11 bits/−5 to +5V) 0. Instantaneous shut-off of inverter output (frequency. terminal assignment status Output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time immediately before protective function is activated Operation guide and troubleshooting by help function Operational specifications Control specifications Operation functions Operating status Output signals Alarm (inverter trip) For meter PU (FR-DU04 /FR-PU04) Display Operating status Alarm definition Operating status Alarm definition Interactive guidance Additional display on parameter unit (FR-PU04) only 205 . 150%: At 0. Contact output. electronic overcurrent protection load factor. programmed operation. Start signal self-holding input (3wire input) can be selected.. motor torque.) 0 to 3600s (up to three different accelerations and decelerations can be set individually. 8 alarm definitions are stored.01Hz Within ±0. commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation. overload. regenerative brake pre-alarm. regenerative brake duty. converter output voltage (steady or peak value). Maximum/minimum frequency setting. 2. fan fault and fin overheat pre-alarm minor fault. slip compensation. 3. running speed can be changed during operation from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04).change-over contact (230VAC 0. polarity reversible operation. electronic overcurrent protection pre-alarm. voltage (0 to 30%) variable Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% variable). frequency setting. output current detection.2% of maximum output frequency (25°C ±10°C (77°F ±18°F) for analog input. 0 to ±10VDC. brake release request. output power. Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s/full scale) and analog output (0 to 10VDC). actual operation time. PID upper limit. frequency detection. running speed. overload alarm. load meter. second frequency detection. linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode can be selected. option fitting status. and motor exciting current. during PU operation. third frequency detection.

dust and dirt. Not provided for the FR-A520-11K to 55K and FR-A540-11K to 55K which do not have a built-in brake circuit. retry count excess. etc. CPU error.) Maximum 1000m (3280. regenerative overvoltage shut-off. oil mist. option fault. stall prevention. instantaneous power failure. After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%). constant speed). 3. parameter error. Jog operation may also be performed from the operation panel or parameter unit. 2 5. main circuit device overheat. 6 206 . 2. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit. overload alarm. brake resistor overheat protection. PU disconnection. ground fault current. (No corrosive and flammable gases. fan fault. 24VDC power output short circuit. overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection). output phase failure protection. vibration Note: 1.SPECIFICATIONS Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration. undervoltage. brake transistor alarm (Note 2).9 m/s or less (conforming to JIS C 0040) Protective/alarm functions Ambient temperature Environment Ambient humidity Storage temperature (Note 3) Ambience Altitude. fin overheat. operation panel power short circuit Constant torque: -10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing) (-10°C to +40°C with FR-A5CV"" attachment) Variable torque: -10°C to +40°C (14°F to 104°F) (non-freezing) (-10°C to +30°C with FR-A5CV"" attachment) 90%RH or less (non-condensing) −20°C to +65°C (−4°F to +149°F) Indoors.80 feet) above sea level for standard operation. deceleration. output short circuit.

3.33) 125 (4.20) 2-φ 6 hole 260 (10.24) 6 (0.4K.20) 2-φ6 hole ! 200V class Inverter Type FR-A520-0. 2.65) 49.4K.95) Note: FR-A540-0.3 Outline drawings ! FR-A520-0.63) 207 .75K D 110 (4.65) (Unit: mm (inches)) ! FR-A520-1. 0.92) 245 (9.5K.91) 140 (5. (Unit: mm (inches)) 143 (5.7K 150 (5.4K FR-A520-0.92) 260 (10.2K.24) 125 (4.7K ! FR-A540-0.74) 245 (9.4K to 1.2K.5K.1.51) 5 (0.SPECIFICATIONS 6.33) D 5 (0.75K 110 (4.5 (1. 2. 3.24) 95 (3.75K. 0. 1.5K are not provided with the cooling fan.24) 6 (0.

69) D1 84 (3.5 (0.68) Inverter Type FR-A540-5.48) 10.5K 220 (8. 18. 7.24) (9.4) 2-φ10 hole 400 (15. 7.5K FR-A520-7.00) H1 H D1 FR-A520-11K ! 400V class 6 (0.65) 260 245 (10.24) 195 (7.41) 2-φ6 hole ! 200V class Inverter Type FR-A520-5.69) 300 285 190 (11.5K H H1 D 260 245 170 (10.24) (9.22) (7.65) D 170 (6.66) D 10.5K.5K.24) (9. 22K 250 (9.00) 10 (0.53) 208 .65) (6.5K FR-A540-7. 11K ! FR-A540-5.65) (6.75) 101.5K H H1 260 245 (10.69) 260 245 170 (10.31) 211 (8.06) 380 (14.5 (0.5K.96) 6 (Unit: mm (inches)) 242 (9.31) 84 (3.5 (4.5K.48) D1 84 (3.39) 230 (9.31) 101.69) 170 (6. 18.84) 190 (7.5K.5 (4.31) (Unit: mm (inches)) ! FR-A520-15K.SPECIFICATIONS ! FR-A520-5. 15K.24) (9.81) (11. 22K ! FR-A540-11K.31) 84 (3.

84) D1 71.60) 430 (16.93) 430 (16.65) H1 530 (20.72) W1 270 (10.84) 250 (9.81) 154 (6.96) 380 (14. 37K. 45K.47) 12 (0.84) 250 (9.65) 550 (21.93) 460 (18.72) 450 (17.65) 700 (27.39) 12 (0.65) 550 (21.87) 525 (20.84) 250 (9.59) 15 (0.68) 250 (9.47) ! 400V class Inverter Type FR-A540-30K FR-A540-37K FR-A540-45K FR-A540-55K W 340 (13.67) 525 (20.96) 380 (14.67) H2 10 (0.06) 154 (6.68) 250 (9.47) 12 (0.65) 550 (21.47) 12 (0.2 (0.59) 15 (0.84) D1 71.13) 2-φC hole C W1 W2 ! 200V class Inverter Type FR-A520-30K FR-A520-37K FR-A520-45K FR-A520-55K W 340 (13.59) 15 (0. 45K.67) 525 (20.39) 450 (17.39) 12 (0.06) C 10 (0.5 (2.96) 410 (16.06) 154 (6.65) 550 (21. 55K W H2 D 3.06) 154 (6.72) 450 (17.SPECIFICATIONS ! FR-A520-30K.63) 380 (14.39) 450 (17.59) 15 (0.56) H1 530 (20. 55K ! FR-A540-30K.67) 675 (26.81) 154 (6.93) H 550 (21.72) 480 (18.67) 525 (20.39) 15 (0.5 (2.59) D 195 (7.59) D 195 (7.60) 430 (16.57) H2 10 (0.96) 380 (14.96) W2 320 (12.93) 430 (16.14) W2 320 (12.06) C 10 (0.47) H D1 H1 (Unit: mm (inches)) 209 .90) W1 270 (10.06) 154 (6.93) 430 (16.47) 12 (0.11) H 550 (21.39) 15 (0. 37K.87) 525 (20.63) 380 (14.84) 250 9.72) 450 (17.65) 550 (21.

75 (0.67) 72 (2.4 hole 21.5 (0.13) 3.94) 20 (0.51) 11.67) 14.5 54 (2.5 (3.5 (0.φ4 hole 17 (0.94) 2.97) 72 (2.25 (0. ! Parameter unit (FR-PU04) <Outline drawing> 24 (0.5 (0.78) 2-M3 hole 1.25 (0.75 (0.85) 18.SPECIFICATIONS ! Operation panel (FR-DU04) <Outline drawing> 16.13) 54 (2.93) 19.57) 81.21) Effective depth 4.57) (Unit: mm (inches)) Choose the mounting screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the mounting threads.13) (Unit: mm (inches)) Choose the mounting screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the mounting threads.83) 81.46) <Panel cutting dimension drawing> 16.83) 15 (0.75 (0.5 (1.5 (1.89) 13 (0.5 (0.5 (0.73) 20 (0.06) 5.05) 80 (3.15) 40 (1.5 (0.79) 17 (0.5 13 (0.92) 5-M3 threads Effective depth 4.14) 46.5 40 (1.79) <Panel cutting dimension drawing> 16.83) 6 210 .5 (0.41) 24 (0.59) 10.41) 48 (1.65) 15 (0.59) 10.06) 3. 1.5 (3.5 (0.57) 125 (4.83) 46.5 (0.65) 23.75 (0.21) 1.65) 23.5 (0.51) (0.

..... Always read the instructions before using the equipment....................1 Option List......CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS This chapter describes the "options" of this product................. Chapter 1 7.. 211 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 7 ..................

according to capacity FR-A5CV"" FR-A5FN"" FR-A5AT"" SF"" FR-ABR-(H)"" (Note 1) FR-ASF-H"" FR-BEL-(H)"" (Note 1) FR-BAL-(H)"" (Note 1) FR-BIF-(H)"" (Note 1) FR-BSF01 FR-BLF BU-1500 to 15K. Allows ratios to be set to five inverters.) For independent operation.1. (0 to 5VDC. low) switching operation. (5VA) For ratio control. Allows operation to be controlled from several places.1 Option List OPTIONS 7 OPTIONS 7.4K to 22K.5K to H30K FR-BU-15K to 55K. H7.5K to H55K FR-AX (Note 4) FR-AL (Note 4) FR-AT (Note 4) FR-FK (Note 4) FR-FH (Note 4) According to capacity Common to all models 211 . H15K to H55K FR-BR-15K to 55K. Used to place only the heat generating section of the inverter in the back of the control box. Specifications. Used to improve the inverter input power factor (overall power factor about 95%) and cooperate with the power supply.4 to 55K. according to capacity 0. French.5K to 55K. Suppresses surge voltages on the inverter output side. (Used with the standard accessories. For joint operation using external signals.4K to 55K.4K to 55K. With frequency meter. the inverter meets the totally enclosed structure specifications (IP40). Noise filer conforming to the EMC Directive (EN50081-2) Used to improve the braking capability of the brake built in the inverter. For radio noise reduction For line noise reduction (applies to small capacities of 3. Italian. High-function brake unit which can return motor-generated braking energy to the power supply. German.1 Stand-alone options Name Parameter unit (8 languages) Parameter unit connection cable Cooling fin protrusion attachment totally enclosed structure specification attachment Attachment for conduit connection FR-A200E series installation interchange attachment EMC Directive compatible noise filer (Note 3) High-duty brake resistor Surge voltage suppressing filter Power factor improving DC reactor Power factor improving AC reactor Radio noise filter Line noise filter BU brake unit Brake unit Resistor unit Power regeneration converter High power factor converter Manual controller DC tach. (1. H15K to H55K FR-RC-15K to 55K.4K to 7.7kW or less) For line noise reduction Used to improve the braking capability of the inverter (for highinertia load or negative load).1 Option List 7. Swedish and Finnish) Cable for connection of the operation panel or parameter unit. according to capacity 0. according to capacity 30K to 55K. etc. By installing this option.4 to 55K. Use the brake unit and resistor unit together.4K to 55K.5VA) For remote operation. The high power factor converter switches the converter circuit onoff to convert the input current waveform into a sine wave to suppress harmonics considerably. according to capacity 0. Interactive parameter unit using LCD display (For use in Japanese. H7.5K to 55K. Used to connect a conduit directly.5K. according to capacity 0. middle. according to capacity 0. Mounting plate used to make the mounting dimensions identical to those of the conventional models. Used to improve the inverter input power factor (overall power factor about 90%) and cooperate with the power supply. according to capacity 0. 0 to 10VDC) (1VA) (Note 2) For three-speed (high. (3VA) Common to all models Applicable Inverter Common to all models 1. follower Three speed selector Motorized speed setter Ratio setter Type FR-PU04 FR-CB2"" FR-A5CN"" Application. according to capacity 0. Spanish. frequency setting potentiometer and start switch. H15K to H55K FR-HC7. Used to improve the braking capability of the inverter (for highinertia load or negative load). English.7.

Options available in Japan only. Used with a deviation sensor and synchro. (FR-SW0-SETUP-WJ is Japanese version. 4. with the exception of some models. 115VAC 60Hz. The intercompatibility attachment (FR-A5AT"") is required to mount the inverter.) Applicable Inverter Common to all models Note: 1. (3VA) For follow-up operation. (3VA) For synchronous operation. Carbon-film type. (5VA) For soft start and stop. 2W1KΩ B characteristic. Rated power consumption 3. Supports steps from inverter start-up to maintenance. Dedicated frequency meter (up to 120Hz scale). (2VA) For parallel operation of several (up to 35) inverters. Movingcoil DC ammeter. For calibration of the frequency meter.Power supply specifications of FR series controllers and setters: 200VAC 50Hz. etc. "H" in the type code indicates 400V class. 7 212 . Allows parallel operation and acceleration/deceleration. Wire-wound type. For follow-up operation using the signal of a pilot generator (PG). (5VA) Can be used as A/V conversion or operational amplifier. 200V/220VAC 60Hz.OPTIONS Name PG follower (Note 4) Master controller (Note 4) Soft starter (Note 4) Deviation detector (Note 4) Preamplifier (Note 4) Pilot generator (Note 4) Deviation sensor (Note 4) Frequency setting potentiometer (Note 4) Frequency meter (Note 4) Calibration resistor (Note 4) Inverter setup software FR-FP FR-FG FR-FC FR-FD FR-FA QVAH-10 YVGC-500W-NS WA2W 1kΩ YM206RI 1mA RV24YN 10kΩ FR-SW0-SETUP-WE Type Application. 2. Output 90VAC/90° For frequency setting. B characteristic. 70/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500r/min) For synchronous operation (mechanical deviation detection). Specifications.

personal computer or FA controller. e.1. Three inboard options may be mounted at the same time (the number of the same options mountable is only one. The FR-A5AX (12-bit digital input) is required separately to input the stop position command externally for orientation control. Among 26 standard output signals of the inverter. CC-Link stands for Control & Communication Link. Outputs extra 16 signals which can be monitored on the FM and AM terminals such as output frequency. the motor speed can be kept constant if load variation occurs. Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed from a computer or PLC. Any one output signal can be selected from among the standard output signals of the inverter and output as a relay contact (contactor) signal. Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed from a PLC. Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed from a computer or PLC. 213 . this option outputs any 3 selected signals from relay contact output terminals. Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed from a computer or PLC.) 2. and only one of the communication options may be mounted. connected by a communication cable. Gains and offsets can also be adjusted. this option outputs any 7 selected signals from open collector output terminals. PLG output (Note 3) ! FR-A5AP ! Pulse train input Computer link FR-A5NR Communication Relay output Profibus DP DeviceNetTM CC-Link (Note 2) Modbus Plus FR-A5NP FR-A5ND FR-A5NC FR-A5NM ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Function Input interface used to set the inverter frequency accurately using external 3-digit BCD or 12-bit binary-coded digital signals. Note: 1. The motor speed is detected by the pulse encoder and this detection signal is fed back to the inverter to automatically compensate for speed variation. Hence. A pulse train signal can be used to enter the speed command to the inverter. 20mADC or 5V(10V)DC meter can be connected. 3.g.OPTIONS 7. The current spindle position and actual motor speed can be monitored on the operation panel or parameter unit.2 Inboard dedicated options ! Inboard options Name 12-bit digital input Digital output Extension analog output Relay output FR-A5AY Type ! FR-A5AX ! ! ! ! FR-A5AR ! ! Orientation. Used with a position detector (pulse encoder) installed on a machine tool spindle to stop the spindle in position (orientation control). Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed under the control of a user program from a computer. Among 26 standard output signals of the inverter.

285 "excessive speed deviation detection frequency" In case the motor speed is increased or decreased due to load. Addition of Pr.OSD activated timing |(Actual speed) . 9999 Minimum Setting Increments 0. (speed command value)| Actual speed into frequency.01Hz Factory Setting 9999 Description 9999: Not detected E. OSD). alarm stop occurs (E. 285 shares the function with Pr.(speed command value) | > (Pr.ECT) occurs if the encoder signal’s interruption is detected during orientation. 285. 285 "overspeed detection frequency" of the inverter's brake sequence function. Addition of Pr. PLG feedback or vector control. Parameter Number 376 Name Wire break detection selection Setting Range 0. during vector control and can not be controlled to meet the speed command value. 370 "control mode selection". Time Preset frequency CAUTION Pr. 376 "wire break detection selection" Alarm stop (E. setting "6" in Pr.OPTIONS <When using the FR-A5AP option> 1. 52 makes the running speed monitor Alarm stop occurs if speed value equivalent to the actual deviation becomes greater than speed. Convert |(Actual speed) Alarm "E. 285) Running speed (Note) Speed command value Note: When a PLG is connected. 2. frequency set in Pr. etc.1 Minimum Setting Increments 1 Factory Setting 0 Description 0: Function invalid 1: Function valid 7 214 .OSD" results in alarm stop. This function is made valid when vector control is selected in Pr. Parameter Number 285 Name Excessive speed deviation detection frequency Setting Range 0 to 30Hz.

8s Minimum Setting Increments 0. 501 "communication error occurrence count display" is incremented by 1. Since this data is stored 2 in E PROM at one-hour intervals. performing power-on reset or inverter reset may cause the Pr.1s Factory Setting 0 Communication line status Communication error (OP3) Normal Abnormal Recognition Time set in Pr.> The extended functions for E. Parameter Number 500 Setting Range 0 to 999. (Pr. it is not regarded as a communication error and operation continues. Parameter Number 501 Setting Range 0 Minimum Setting Increments 1 Factory Setting 0 Count timing depending on communication line status Normal Abnormal Normal Abnormal Incremented by 1 Incremented by 1 At the point of communication line fault occurrence. Pr. 215 . 501 "communication error occurrence count display" The cumulative number of communication error occurrences can be indicated. 501 2 data to be the value stored in E PROM the last time depending on the reset timing. When the fault is restored to normal communication within the set time. 500 has elapsed is recognized as a communication error. Note: The communication error occurrence count is stored into RAM temporarily.OPTIONS <When using the FR-A5NC (CC-Link) option. Write 0 to erase this cumulative count. 2) Addition of Pr. 500 The communication line fault which still persists after the time set in Pr. 500 to 502) 1) Addition of Pr.OP3 error and E. 500 "communication error recognition waiting time" You can set the waiting time from when a communication line fault occurs until it is recognized as a communication error. 3 error have been added to this instruction manual.

4.OP3 (alarm data: HA3)] is a fault that occurs on the communication line. the fault definition overwrites the alarm indication of the alarm history temporarily. 3 lit E. 2 Minimum Setting Increments 1 Factory Setting 0 (About setting) Pr.) When no alarm output is provided. 502 Fault Setting Plug-in option itself Communication line 0 1 2 0 1 2 At Fault Occurrence Operation Continued Continued Continued Coast to stop Indication None None None E. the fault definition is stored into the alarm history.OP3 lit after stop E. The acceleration time at a restart is the ordinary acceleration setting (e. When the Pr. 3. (The fault definition is written to the alarm history when an alarm output is provided. 6. 500 Time Alarm Operation Indication output Coast to stop Decelerated to stop Decelerated to stop Coast to stop E. 5. When the Pr. 45). 3 kept lit Alarm output Kept active Kept active Not active Kept active Kept active Kept active Decelerated E. 8. 3 lit after to stop stop Provided Decelerated after stop to stop Provided Decelerated after stop to stop Note: 1.OP3 kept lit E. the operation/speed command at a restart is the one given before the fault occurrence.g. 3 lit Alarm output Not provided Not provided Not provided Provided Error Recognition after Elapse of Pr. Pr. 3 lit after stop Provided Provided after stop Not provided Provided Provided after stop Provided after stop At Fault Removal Operation Kept stopped Kept stopped Restart Kept stopped Kept stopped Kept stopped Indication E. 2. and a fault of the CC-Link plug-in option itself [E. 7. After the fault is removed. 3 kept lit E.OP3 lit after stop E.) 7 216 . removing the fault during deceleration causes acceleration to restart at that point. When the setting was made to provide an alarm output. Pr. 44).OP3 lit E.g. 1.OP3 kept lit Normal indication E. 3 lit after stop E. 3 lit after to stop stop Decelerated E. 502 setting of 2. 502 "error-time stop mode selection" You can select the inverter operation if a communication line fault or a fault of the CC-Link plug-in option itself occurs. the deceleration time is the ordinary deceleration setting (e. 502 setting is 1 or 2. 3 (alarm data: HF3)] is a communication circuit fault in the communication option. Pr. and the alarm history returns to the preceding alarm indication. When a communication line fault occurs at the Pr. 502 setting is 2. Pr. the alarm indication is reset and returns to the ordinary monitor. but is not stored. The alarm output is the ABC contact output or alarm bit output. A communication line fault [E. 3 kept lit E. 44. Pr. 7.OPTIONS 3) Addition of Pr. Parameter Number 502 Setting Range 0. (Acceleration is not restarted if the fault is that of the CC-Link plug-in option itself.

346 values. 345 6 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Watchdog time-out action 2 3 1 Address key bit FR-PU04 option 7 6 5 4 Device node address 4 3 2 1 0 Pr. 347 and Pr. 346 6 Output assembly 5 4 3 2 Baud rate 1 0 Pr. 348 2 1 0 7 6 5 3 4 Pr. 348 (Note ) bit FR-DU04 7 6 5 4 3 Pr. 346 and Pr. 348 are bitmap parameters and defined as follows: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Baud rate key bit FR-PU04 option 7 6 5 4 3 Input assembly 2 1 0 7 Pr. 346 2 1 0 Note: When using the FR-PU04. 345 and Pr. parameter clear and all parameter clear are enabled. 345 and Pr. 347 2 1 0 7 6 5 3 4 Pr. Parameter Number 345 346 347 348 Name DeviceNet address starting data DeviceNet baud rate starting data DeviceNet address starting data (higher-order byte) DeviceNet baud rate starting data (higher-order byte) Setting Range 0 to 65519 0 to 65519 0 to 255 0 to 255 Minimum Setting Increments 1 1 1 1 Factory Setting 41023 (63) 20612 (132) 160 80 Description ( ) for FR-DU04 ( ) for FR-DU04 Remarks: Parameter copy. • Bitmap parameters Pr. 345 2 1 0 Pr. you need not set the Pr.OPTIONS <When using the FR-A5ND (DeviceNet) option. 217 . 348 values. These parameter values are automatically changed by setting the Pr. 347 (Note ) bit FR-DU04 7 6 5 4 3 Pr.> The methods of setting DeviceNet node address and baud rate using FR-DU04 or FR-PU04 are shown as follows. 347 are bitmap parameters and defined as follows: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 DN fault mode 0 7 Pr.

.......... 224 8 .....APPENDICES This chapter provides the "appendices" for use of this product........... 218 Appendix 2 Operating the Inverter Using a Single-Phase Power Supply .... Appendix 1 Data Code List ............................ Always read the instructions before using the equipment..............

Appendix 1 Data Code List APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 Data Code List Function Parameter Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Name Torque boost Maximum frequency Minimum frequency Base frequency Multi-speed setting (high speed) Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Multi-speed setting (low speed) Acceleration time Deceleration time Electronic thermal O/L relay DC injection brake operation frequency DC injection brake operation time DC injection brake voltage Starting frequency Load pattern selection Jog frequency Jog acceleration/deceleration time MRS input selection High-speed maximum frequency Base frequency voltage Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency Acceleration/deceleration time increments Stall prevention operation level Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed Multi-speed setting (speed 4) Multi-speed setting (speed 5) Multi-speed setting (speed 6) Multi-speed setting (speed 7) Multi-speed input compensation Acceleration/deceleration pattern Regenerative function selection Frequency jump 1A Frequency jump 1B Frequency jump 2A Frequency jump 2B Frequency jump 3A Frequency jump 3B Speed display Up-to-frequency sensitivity Output frequency detection Output frequency detection for reverse rotation Second acceleration/deceleration time Second deceleration time Second torque boost Second V/F (base frequency) Second stall prevention operation current Second stall prevention operation frequency Second output frequency detection DU/PU main display data selection PU level display data selection FM terminal function selection Frequency monitoring reference Current monitoring reference Restart coasting time Restart cushion time Read 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A Standard operation functions Data Codes Link Parameter Extension Write Setting (Data code 7F/FF) 80 0 81 0 82 0 83 0 84 0 85 0 86 0 87 0 88 0 89 0 8A 0 8B 0 8C 0 8D 0 8E 0 8F 0 90 0 91 0 92 0 93 0 94 0 95 0 96 0 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated output current Display functions Second functions Output terminal functions Basic functions 218 .

I for intelligent mode decel Starting frequency for elevator mode Retry selection Stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency Number of retries at alarm occurrence Retry waiting time Retry count display erasure Special regenerative brake duty Applied motor PWM frequency selection 0-5V/0-10V selection Filter time constant Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection Alarm code output selection Parameter write disable selection Reverse rotation prevention selection Operation mode selection Motor capacity Number of motor poles Motor exciting current Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency Speed control gain Motor constant (R1) Motor constant (R2) Motor constant (L1) Motor constant (L2) Motor constant (X) Online auto tuning selection Auto-tuning setting/status V/F1 (first frequency) V/F1 (first frequency voltage) V/F2 (second frequency) V/F2 (second frequency voltage) V/F3 (third frequency) V/F3 (third frequency voltage) V/F4 (fourth frequency) V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) V/F5 (fifth frequency) V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) Third acceleration/deceleration time Third deceleration time Third torque boost Third V/F (base frequency) Third stall prevention operation current Third stall prevention operation frequency Third output frequency detection 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 Operation selection functions 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Third functions 5-point flexible V/F characteristics Advanced magnetic flux vectorcontrol 219 .APPENDICES Function Additional function Parameter Number Data Codes Link Parameter Extension Write Setting (Data code 7F/FF) BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD (Note) CE CF (Note) D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Name Read 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 Remote setting function selection Intelligent mode selection Reference I for intelligent mode Ref. I for intelligent mode accel Ref.

APPENDICES Function Parameter Number 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 Data Codes Link Parameter Extension Write Setting (Data code 7F/FF) 91 1 92 1 93 1 94 1 95 1 96 1 97 1 98 1 9C 1 9D 1 9E 1 9F 1 A0 1 A1 1 A2 1 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Name Station number Communication speed Stop bit length Parity check presence/absence Number of communication retries Communication check time interval Waiting time setting CR. LF presence/absence selection PID action selection PID proportional band PID integral time Upper limit Lower limit PID action set point for PU operation PID differential time Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence output terminal selection MC switch-over interlock time Start waiting time Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence Automatic inverter-commercial power supply switch-over frequency Backlash acceleration stopping frequency Backlash acceleration stopping time Backlash deceleration stopping frequency Backlash deceleration stopping time Speed setting switch-over Parameter unit language switch-over Stall prevention operation level at 0V input Stall prevention operation level at 10V input Output current detection level Output current detection period Zero current detection time Zero current detection period Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation RT signal activated condition Stall prevention operation selection OL signal waiting time AM terminal function selection Read 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A Display Additional functions Additional function Sub functions Current detection Backlash Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over PID control Communication functions 160 User group read selection 00 80 2 Restart after instantaneous power failure 162 163 164 165 170 171 173 174 175 176 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection First cushion time for restart First cushion voltage for restart Restart stall prevention operation level Watt-hour meter clear Actual operation hour meter clear User group 1 registration User group 1 deletion User group 2 registration User group 2 deletion 02 03 04 05 0A 0B 0D 0E 0F 10 82 83 84 85 8A 8B 8D 8E 8F 90 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 User functions Initial monitor 220 .

C terminal function selection Read 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 Additional function Terminal assignment functions 199 User's initial value setting 27 A7 2 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 Programmed operation minute/second selection Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 1 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 2 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Program setting 3 Timer setting Multi-speed setting (speed 8) Multi-speed setting (speed 9) Multi-speed setting (speed 10) Multi-speed setting (speed 11) Multi-speed setting (speed 12) Multi-speed setting (speed 13) Multi-speed setting (speed 14) Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 3C 3D 3F 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Multi-speed operation Programmed operation 221 . B.APPENDICES Function Parameter Number 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 190 191 192 193 194 195 Data Codes Link Parameter Extension Write Setting (Data code 7F/FF) 94 2 95 2 96 2 97 2 98 2 99 2 9A 2 9E 2 9F 2 A0 2 A1 2 A2 2 A3 2 Name RL terminal function selection RM terminal function selection RH terminal function selection RT terminal function selection AU terminal function selection JOG terminal function selection CS terminal function selection RUN terminal function selection SU terminal function selection IPF terminal function selection OL terminal function selection FU terminal function selection A.

digital output 12-bit digital input Droop control Brake sequence functions Stop on contact High speed frequency control Function selection Power failure stop functions Additional function 222 .APPENDICES Function Stop Sub selection function function Parameter Number 240 244 250 251 252 253 261 262 263 264 265 266 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 Soft-PWM setting Cooling fan operation selection Stop selection Output phase failure protection selection Override bias Override gain Power failure stop selection Subtracted frequency at deceleration start Subtraction starting frequency Power-failure deceleration time 1 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Power-failure deceleration time switch-over frequency Stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection High-speed setting maximum current Mid-speed setting minimum current Current averaging range Current averaging filter constant Stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor Stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency Brake opening frequency Brake opening current Brake opening current detection time Brake operation time at start Brake operation frequency Brake operation time at stop Deceleration detection function selection Overspeed detection frequency Droop gain Droop filter constant BCD code input bias BCD code input gain Binary input bias Binary input gain Selection of whether digital input and analog compensation input are enabled or disabled Data read timing signal on/off selection Analog output signal selection Setting for zero analog output Setting for maximum analog output Analog output signal voltage/current switchover Analog meter voltage output selection Setting for zero analog meter voltage output Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output Y0 output selection Y1 output selection Y2 output selection Y3 output selection Y4 output selection Data Codes Link Parameter Extension Write Setting (Data code 7F/FF) B0 B4 BA BB BC BD C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Name Read 30 34 3A 3B 3C 3D 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 Analog output.

Most recent No.APPENDICES Function Analog output. No. 79 are accessible for computer link operation which uses the PU connector. No. No. but they are inaccessible for computer link operation which uses the option (FRA5NR). No. 223 . 77 and Pr. 3. 6 Most recent No. 5. 2/alarm display clear Most recent No. 4 Most recent No. digital output Parameter Number 318 Y5 output selection Data Codes Link Parameter Extension Write Setting (Data code 7F/FF) 92 3 Name Read 12 319 320 321 322 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 900 901 902 903 904 905 990 991                  Y6 output selection RA1 output selection RA2 output selection RA3 output selection RA output selection Inverter station number Communication speed Stop bit length Parity check yes/no Communication retry count Communication check time interval Waiting time setting Operation command right Speed command right Link start mode selection CR • LF yes/no selection E2PROM write selection FM terminal calibration AM terminal calibration Frequency setting voltage bias Frequency setting voltage gain Frequency setting current bias Frequency setting current gain Buzzer control LCD contrast Second parameter switch-over Frequency setting Running frequency (RAM) Running frequency (E PROM) 2 13 14 15 16 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 5A 5B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B   7F 93 94 95 96 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA DC DD DE DF E0 E1 DA DB EC ED EE     F3 F4    FA FB FC FD FF 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 9                  Calibration functions Computer link function Relay output Monitor Output current monitor Output voltage monitor Special monitor Special monitor selection No. 7. 8 Inverter status monitor/run command Operation mode acquisition All clear Inverter reset Link parameter extension setting Alarm display Frequency monitor Note: Note that the parameters Pr. 1.

2 12.220V 50Hz AC200 .7 7 Output Three phase. the output voltage will become unstable under changing load conditions.75 2.5 4.4 Power supply Single phase.5 6. resulting in a higher temperature rise of the converter and the capacitor.5 0.4 1. 200 to 220V 50Hz. 224 .5 4 2. 200 to 240V 60Hz 4. The A500 inverter is not CE marked for single-phase operation.Appendix 2 Operating the Inverter Using a Single-Phase Power Supply APPENDICES Appendix 2 Operating the Inverter Using a Single-Phase Power Supply If a single-phase power supply is used to operate the inverter only 4 of the 6 of the diodes will be used. #Cautions on operating the inverter using single-phase power supply (1) Connect the single-phase power supply to the terminals R and S of the inverter.9 17. <Example circuit> NFB Power supply Single phase AC200 .5 1.5 5.240V 60Hz Start signal STF (STR) SD Grounding R S T Inverter U V W Motor IM Note: Only the NA version A500 is UL listed for the above single-phase ratings.5 9 (Note 1) The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. 200 to 220V 50Hz. be certain the power supply is adequate. The maximum output voltage may be set as desired below supply voltage.5 2. Operating the inverter using a single-phase power supply requies derating of the output current. (Note 2) The power supply capacity changes with the values of power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). (2) If the capacity of the power supply is insufficient.4 11. Therefore the ripple current of the capacitor will increase when compared to operation from a three-phase power supply. #Rating for inverter operation using single-phase power supply Type FR-A520-""K Continuous current (Constant Torque) Voltage (Note 1) Rated input AC current (A) (Single phase) Rated input AC voltage Power supply system capacty (kVA) (Note 2) 0. 200 to 240V 60Hz 1.2 5 3. Therefore. The A500 is not EMC compliant for single-phase operation.

E.. 1997 Oct.E6.. 902 to Pr.. 1997 IB(NA)-66790-A IB(NA)-66790-B IB(NA)-66790-C First edition Partly modified Front cover Additions ! ! Revision Instructions for Standard-compliant products (pages 38.E7) Change in ground terminal position of FR-A520-0.S. 342 "E2PROM write selection" Instructions for fitting the FR-A5NC inboard option Instructions for fitting the FR-A5ND inboard option.75K Change in ground terminal screw size of FR-A520-5.OSD. E. and Canadian Electrical Codes Modification ! ! . 0..5K..4K. 1999 IB(NA)-66790-F Modification ! Instructions for compliance with the UL and CSA standards Jan.. Print Data *Manual Number Sep. 3. E.ECT) Pr. 39) FR-A540-30K to 55K Pr. 6. 1998 IB(NA)-66790-E Additions ! Description of the data line filter Alarm displays (E. 2001 IB(NA)-66790-G Additions ! ! ! ! Alarm displays (E.5K About RS-485/RS-232C converter Partial additions ! Modifications ! ! ! Apr.REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. 905 <adjustment procedure> External options Dedicated inboard options Modifications ! ! ! Mar. 7) Instructions for compliance with U. 7. 1 to E. Alarm displays (E.. E. 1997 Nov. 1998 IB(NA)-66790-D Additions ! In accordance with NA and EC In accordance with Standard-compliant models User group setting Input terminal function selection Modifications ! ! ! Oct.